Literary Book Reviews
You may have written a book report in high school that was a simple summary of a book. OK, so that ensured (more or less) that you read the book, but was pretty mindless and boring. That is NOT what this book review assignment is about.
The idea of a professional book review is in part to briefly summarize the ideas of the book, but the main focus is to give your opinion about the book’s merits – it is a critical analysis of the book. Just like in the literature critique assignment, ‘critical’ does not imply that you are going to be mean or harsh in your review. It means that you are going to evaluate objectively whether the author(s) have fulfilled their objectives in the book, and whether they have used persuasive and unbiased evidence to support their claims. Did you find the book engaging? Persuasive? Did you agree with it? Did you enjoy it? Would you recommend it to others? What is the intended audience of the book? Does it succeed in reaching this audience?
For further explanation, follow the links below.
Work hard on making your book review very readable to a general audience – it should flow well and be written nicely. You should have an introduction, discussion of the book, and clear conclusion (in other words, your review should have explicit sections responding to the several requirements of the rubric. Your review should read like an essay). Your review should contain all of the elements found in the following rubric:
How to Write a Literary Book Review
Sample Book Review 1
Sample Book Review 2
Book Review Rubric
posted by dconlay @ 11:45 AM
365 comments
365 Comments:
Herrera, Iris
Period, 5
1/21/10
A place to call home by: Jackie French koller
Part one
This book is about a girl named Anna and her two siblings. Mandy at the age of 7 years old and Casey, at the of 7 months Anna is 15 years old. Her mother has a big problem with alcohol. Her mother is an alcoholic. Her mother always leaves them a lone for a day or so. One day Anna arrived home from school and she finds out that her mother left them again; she left Casey a lone in the house. Anna found Casey crying. This time that her mother left some how Anna thinks that her mother is not coming back ever again! Anna is pretty much a mother at age of 15. Anna tries to get through all this but she can’t because is too much responsibility for her at her age.
Anna is in love with a boy named Nate, but she doesn’t give to her a chance to have a boyfriend because she doesn’t have a lot of time for boys, because she have to take care of her two siblings. So when Nate a very cute boy in Anna's eyes comes along she can not spend time with him.
Anna stops going to school because she has o take care of Casey. She sends notes to school supposedly written by her mother. She loves school and not going to school makes her sad because she knows that if she doesn’t get an education she won’t have a chance to change her live. She goes to Nate’s house and asked him a favor. She asked him if he could bring her homework because she can’t go to school Nate asked her why she not going to school. Anna lies to him she tells him that her mother is sick and that’s why she is not going school.
Anna has to lie because she is scared that the foster care is going to come and separate her from Mandy and Casey. She doesn’t want to be separate from her lovely sister and her lovely baby brother and she do everything she can to be with them. One day Anna decides to take a walked with Casey to a place that only she knows. This place is near the beach it was a cabin where she always went to distract for a moment. There she found peace. That day that she went to walked with Casey she saw a yellow glow in the water, she took a close view and she saw that it was her mother truck. Her mother was dead. After she found out that her mother was dead she knew that the things would get worst, so she decided to get out from the house as soon as possible because if the police find out that her mother was dead they would go to her house and separate them. She took Mandy and Casey to the cabin. She stayed there for about 5 days.
I.Herrera
period 5
Part two
Casey got really sick because of the cold and the rain. Anna decided to leave from the cabin when Casey got really sick. When she asked for helped the foster care found a couple that was going to take care for her sister, her little brother and as well for her self too. The couple didn’t wanted them but they decided to take care of them because of the money that the foster care was going to give them every month because of taking care of them.
Anna is so desperate that she decides to leave Mandy and Casey with the couple that is taking care of them. She doesn’t want to leave them with them but doesn’t have any other option. She goes to Chicago to look for her dad. In Chicago she finds out that her father is death and that her grandmother doesn’t want to know anything about her. Anna goes back to her house. She finds out that a new couple has adopted Mandy and Casey. The lady from the orphanage told her that the couple could not adopt her because was to much responsibility for them to take care of three kids.
A couple adopt Anna. She knew them. They were Mr. Melt and Mrs. Melt. The couple was some friends of her. She was really happy to live with them. Anna, Mandy and Casey were really happy with their new parents. Anna was happy but she was sad at the same time because her mother was death. Her mother wasn’t a good mother but it was her mother after all.
Anna became girlfriend of Nate. Both of them were happy because they were together after all. Anna never thought that one day she would have happiness in her life, after all she have been passing through. Now she is really happy with her new family. Mr. Melt loves her and Mr. Melt loves her too. Anna loves them too and she really grateful with them for taking care of her and for loving like if she was her daughter.
I recommend this book. This is a good book for people that like to read sad stories. When I read this book I couldn’t put it down I was shocked, surprised, and so sad at the same exact time through the whole book. I really felt like I was there it was so informative. I laughed sometimes and I would be sad most of the time. I really recommend this book to anyone who loves Jackie Kollers books. I really like this book. This book is one of my favorite books.
M Lopez
Period 5
Nick earls after summer mesmerized me with the surprise and that it is about teenagers live.
About the theme of the book is to have good time to wait. Why. Because he explains about that he is waiting for to be accepted for college he wants to go. So he explains about it then he say about his love problem of everything he says about a girl and stuffs it happen.
` About the style of the author is like a teenager. And that his life is funny at the same time or he is different. From the book I like about is that he uses a lot of words to make an image about the persons or plot. Well the place is at the beach and a house. The voice is like always happy. It a unique book and it a good book.
The characters are Alex and fourtina. They do believe in each other and from the other people they now. I like the characters because they give a lot of images and how they are in life. They talk about surfing. Because the both love surfing. And the girl loves it to. To be a good surfing.
The setting takes place in a lot of the places. Like on the beach and a house. Well the world from today is the same. Because some people go to the beach and go to friends houses. To have a free time or day. Well for me is like half of it is a yes because I feel in love and that sometimes I go to my friends houses. Yes I can picture this will what it is going on. And how they look and act. Well that they use it like a different ways and that they give u a lot of the places to image. It goes from one place to other place a lot or sometimes.
The plot of the book goes will like in a first place he says about his mom. Then he says about his life. Then he says how he likes and what he does. The first question is why he does like this? And why he use a lot his mom? Does he fall in love with the girl he meet? And what happens we his life. That what I can say about the book because there are not a lot of the suff of it of the book.
The book is like none of the books I read. This is different book I have read. And it does relate with one issues is that a lot of the people have the same thing like them. And for me yes because I have been like this not like really like the book. Me different like the part was he meets the person. So that I think about the book.
My recommendation is a 10 because it teenagers life’s. And because I like to read romance books of teenagers. And it a book if you like to read this kind of book of teenagers lives. And it can be like you what to be in the book. And because it gives u a lot of the images.
I.Herrera
Period, 5
1/21/10
A place to call home by: Jackie French koller
This book is about a girl named Anna and her two siblings. Mandy at the age of 7 years old and Casey, at the of 7 months Anna is 15 years old. Her mother has a big problem with alcohol. Her mother is an alcoholic. Her mother always leaves them a lone for a day or so. One day Anna arrived home from school and she finds out that her mother left them again; she left Casey a lone in the house. Anna found Casey crying. This time that her mother left some how Anna thinks that her mother is not coming back ever again! Anna is pretty much a mother at age of 15. Anna tries to get through all this but she can’t because is too much responsibility for her at her age.
Anna is in love with a boy named Nate, but she doesn’t give to her a chance to have a boyfriend because she doesn’t have a lot of time for boys, because she have to take care of her two siblings. So when Nate a very cute boy in Anna's eyes comes along she can not spend time with him.
Anna stops going to school because she has o take care of Casey. She sends notes to school supposedly written by her mother. She loves school and not going to school makes her sad because she knows that if she doesn’t get an education she won’t have a chance to change her live. She goes to Nate’s house and asked him a favor. She asked him if he could bring her homework because she can’t go to school Nate asked her why she not going to school. Anna lies to him she tells him that her mother is sick and that’s why she is not going school.
Anna has to lie because she is scared that the foster care is going to come and separate her from Mandy and Casey. She doesn’t want to be separate from her lovely sister and her lovely baby brother and she do everything she can to be with them. One day Anna decides to take a walked with Casey to a place that only she knows. This place is near the beach it was a cabin where she always went to distract for a moment. There she found peace. That day that she went to walked with Casey she saw a yellow glow in the water, she took a close view and she saw that it was her mother truck. Her mother was dead. After she found out that her mother was dead she knew that the things would get worst, so she decided to get out from the house as soon as possible because if the police find out that her mother was dead they would go to her house and separate them. She took Mandy and Casey to the cabin. She stayed there for about 5 days.
Casey got really sick because of the cold and the rain. Anna decided to leave from the cabin when Casey got really sick. When she asked for helped the foster care found a couple that was going to take care for her sister, her little brother and as well for her self too. The couple didn’t wanted them but they decided to take care of them because of the money that the foster care was going to give them every month because of taking care of them.
Anna is so desperate that she decides to leave Mandy and Casey with the couple that is taking care of them. She doesn’t want to leave them with them but doesn’t have any other option. She goes to Chicago to look for her dad. In Chicago she finds out that her father is death and that her grandmother doesn’t want to know anything about her. Anna goes back to her house. She finds out that a new couple has adopted Mandy and Casey. The lady from the orphanage told her that the couple could not adopt her because was to much responsibility for them to take care of three kids.
A couple adopt Anna. She knew them. They were Mr. Melt and Mrs. Melt. The couple was some friends of her. She was really happy to live with them. Anna, Mandy and Casey were really happy with their new parents too. Anna became girlfriend of Nate. Both of them were happy because they were together after all.
I recommend this book. This is a good book for people that like to read sad stories. I wouldn’t call this book as one of my favorites. It was interesting and sad but it is not favorite book.
J. Nelson, Period 4
Red Badge of Courage by Stephen Crane (Part 1)
Although he never once stepped foot on the battlefield, Stephen Crane was able to weave a convincing war story in his 1895 novel Red Badge of Courage. While this is a war novel, Crane does not spin an idealistic tale of victory or overcoming odds. Rather, Red Badge of Courage uses realistic depictions of war, both on and off the battlefield, to explore its effects on the common soldier. Crane’s purpose is to showcase a humble young private named Henry Fleming and his changing feelings and attitudes towards self-preservation, pride, and the “machine” of battle. Through the protagonist’s experiences, Crane hopes to enlighten his audience on one’s place in the universe.
Crane describes in detail the protagonist’s wartime experiences to explore the themes of the link between self-preservation and pride, as well as the nature of the machine of military conflict. First, the young soldier Henry Fleming initially joins the Confederate Army to show off his bravery to his contemporaries. He had often heard tales of glorious victories and “dreamed of battles all his life—of vague and bloody conflicts that had thrilled him with their sweep and fire” (4). At the outset, his regiment simply went on regular marches and “was fed and caressed at station after station until the youth had believed that he must be a hero” (8). However, the real surprise came even before his first battle was fought. As he continues to dwell on the possibility of death and suffering in battle, he is overcome by “a little panic-fear,” and as he further considers the meaning of war, “he saw hideous possibilities” (10). The youth initially had an inflated ego for being “brave” enough to march in the army, but as the time comes closer for him to actually carry out his duties, he becomes a nervous wreck. Later on in the novel, however, after Fleming fights his first battle, the mere fact that he survived is enough to make him boastful again. Going over the encounter again in his mind, “as if apart from himself, he viewed that last scene. He perceived that he man who had fought thus was magnificent” (48). As a result, the concept that Crane is trying to communicate to his audience is that there is a connection between the protagonists’ desire to survive and his desire for glory. The young private does not want to look like a scared fool in front of others, but at the same time, he does not want to lose his life in combat by doing anything more than is required of him. The protagonist regards battle as an “immense and terrible machine” that exists to “produce corpses” (63). The central themes of this novel include self-preservation and pride, and the terrible nature of war.
J. Nelson, Period 4
Red Badge of Courage by Stephen Crane (Part 2)
The key element of Stephen Crane’s style in Red Badge of Courage is his use of descriptive realism to drive the action and to provide a base for the young soldier’s inner thoughts and conflicts. This realism is especially important in conveying the profound attributes of an average skirmish. For example, the scenery of one battle is described in intricate fashion: “The little flames of rifles leaped from it. The song of bullets was in the air and shells snarled along the tree-tops. One tumbled directly into the middle of a hurrying group and exploded in crimson fury” (133). Stephen Crane tries to express the gravity of a battle through vivid and realistic imagery. The use of realism is just as important in expressing the protagonist’s attitudes towards his situation. At some points Fleming has such a bleak outlook on his future that “Once he thought he had concluded that it would be better to get killed directly and end his troubles” (33). Most people experience a feeling of hopelessness in their lives, and the fact that the character of Henry Fleming shares in these emotions allows the reader to connect with the novel. Crane dedicates a large percentage of the book to describing the youth’s secret inner thoughts; the youth logically thinks about the best course of action to take, and sometimes argues with himself to rationalize his own actions. For example, after running away from battle, the youth believes that although other soldiers may have been cowards, he is not, because he was in a dire situation and “he, the enlightened man who looks afar in the dark, had fled because of his superior perceptions of knowledge” (57). Crane relies on realism in his novel to express Fleming’s emotions and the intensity of battle.
Crane seems to place less of an emphasis on the identity of characters in his novel than on human beings in general. For example, characters are rarely referred to by name; they are only given titles, such as “The colonel…the general…the commander…the youth” (41). Crane also refrains from referring to the war as the Civil War, and he does not at any time name locations. The two sides are simply labeled “grey soldiers” (North) and “blue soldiers” (South). Because of this, Crane could be implying that all people are fundamentally the same. One important component of the book, which is the description of Henry Fleming’s inner thoughts, can apply to anyone experiencing that situation. However, Fleming is still quite an interesting character in himself. He ponders his circumstances carefully and he is constantly conflicted internally. For instance, in considering the terrible nature of war, “he tried to mathematically prove to himself that he would not run from a battle” (10). Crane decides to spend much time in analyzing Fleming’s internal conflicts and emotions. In contrast, the other characters are rather flat and don’t do not change throughout the novel. For example, the lieutenant of the company obsesses himself over sending each and every soldier to the front of the line; he takes a private and “drove him back into the ranks with many blows” (45). The lieutenant continues to fulfill his duty through the whole book, chasing young men into battle and cursing all the while. While some of the characters are unchanging, they are reflective of the characteristics of human beings.
J. Nelson, Period 4
Red Badge of Courage by Stephen Crane (Part 3)
The setting, while intended to be just as anonymous as the characters, is highly symbolic in Red Badge of Courage. The reader knows that Henry is fighting for the South in the Civil War, but Crane never discloses where the regiment is at any time. On the contrary, Crane focuses on the natural world directly surrounding the soldiers. For example, Crane describes the area at one point in the novel: “the landscape was streaked with two long, thin, black columns which disappeared on the brow of a hill in front and rearward vanished into a wood…The river was not in view” (18). Notice how the name of the river is not mentioned, and no significant landmarks are given a proper title. Again, this adds to the sense of realism experienced in the novel by directly stating the surroundings, rather than naming them and expecting the reader to know what they look like. Furthermore, the author depicts the protagonist’s surroundings as highly interactive: “When he separated embraces of trees and vines the disturbed foliages waved their arms and turned their face and leaves towards him” (58). In addition, Fleming views Nature as “a woman with a deep aversion to tragedy” (58). This means that there is a strong connection present between the protagonist and his surroundings; he relates to it not only through his senses, but also in his sympathies. He perceives nature as a woman who wants to distance herself from the bloodshed and violence in war, but this really is just a reflection of Fleming’s own personal fears. Nature is simply where he finds comfort. Although this novel takes place in the Civil War in the 1860s, it is not intended to be about the war or the circumstances surrounding it; the novel is intended to magnify the thoughts and feelings of the common soldier.
The plot of the novel takes the reader through the journey of young Henry Fleming’s introduction to wartime and his maturity through crisis. In the beginning, Fleming is eager and excited to join in the military; “he had read of marches, sieges, conflicts, and he had longed to see it all” (4). His dream of attaining glory masks his ability to foresee any possibility of danger in battle. Of course, as the novel progresses, Fleming struggles with the idea of giving up his life, even if it is for a noble cause and he achieves glory in doing so. He becomes scared to death of fighting, realizing that his optimistic views of war were not always as they seemed. The most troubling experience for him is when he encounters a dead soldier, “dressed in a uniform that had once been blue…The eyes…had changed to the dull hue to be seen on the side of a dead fish” (59). This picture is not only frightening, but also symbolic of the role of a single man in the universe. When someone passes away, life still goes on; the author expresses this through contrast between the raging battlefields and the quiet, serene scenes of nature. Eventually, Fleming undergoes a change in the novel, which is brought about by both this scene and the fact that his commander says his regiment fights like a bunch of “mule drivers.” At this point the youth realizes that he is expendable, both as a soldier and as a human soul. He allows his enragement at this epiphany to infiltrate his soul, and this energy drives him in his next battle. He steps onto the field and “had taken up a first position behind the little tree, with a direct determination to hold it against the world” (122). Firing blindly, wildly, but with fierce tenacity, Fleming successfully holds his position and his regiment comes out victorious in the battle. At this point, Fleming has almost completely matured as a soldier, as he continues to demonstrate great courage for the rest of the novel. The youth’s development into a man is the central theme to the plot of Red Badge of Courage.
J. Nelson, Period 4
Red Badge of Courage by Stephen Crane (Part 4)
I think Crane is very successful in his objective of commenting on the internal struggles of humanity. The author intertwines detailed and eye-opening pictures of battle scenes with its effect on the mind, and produces a realistic depiction of a man’s inner conflicts during times of crisis. Henry Fleming’s innermost fears and emotions are opened up and put on display, which creates an intimate feeling of trust between the protagonist and the reader. By exposing Fleming’s vulnerability in this way, the reader cannot help but root for Fleming as he strives to overcome his self-doubt and mature into a fully-realized, competent soldier who rushes into battle without a second thought.
One book that shares themes with Red Badge of Courage is Catch-22 by Joseph Heller. Both of these novels comment on the harsh reality of war, but in completely different fashions. While Crane endeavors to create a realistic, sober tale about one man’s internal struggles, Heller primarily utilizes irony, over-the-top characters, and a humorous style to paint a funny-but-true picture of war. Red Badge of Courage would be more suited to the individual who is seeking a more refined, thought-provoking novel with a message for humanity. Catch-22 is ideal for the reader who wants a fast-paced read that focuses more on entertaining than on making one think.
Red Badge of Courage is a thought-provoking novel that relies on the element of realism to illustrate battles and to shape the protagonist’s inner conflicts. While it may not have the most riveting story-telling or the most exciting action, it is successful in narrating the tale of a southern boy’s growth into a man through his experience in war. This book is recommended for anyone looking for a story of an unlikely hero rising against his greatest fears and overcoming obstacles to prove his own self-worth. For its inspiring narrative, fascinating symbolism, and attention to detail, Red Badge of Courage gets 4 out of 5 stars.
****
E.Trujillo
Period 5
Lock and Key Part 1
Sarah Dessen’s book Lock and Key amazed me with its wonderful life stories. In the book Ruby’s life changes completely when her mom leaves and she is sent to live with her sister. “But the fact of the matter is, she is gone and you can’t be by yourself”. I believe this story is extraordinary because the story attracts you to keep reading it from begging to end.
This book explores different themes to which people can relate to.It explores the theme of forgiveness which is expressed when Ruby learns to forgive her sister. It also explores the theme of family by showing how Ruby finds the true meaning of family. It also talks about letting go of the past which is expressed by Ruby being able to forget her past and enjoying her new life. One of the life lessons it teaches is that before you can truly be happy, you have to learn to forgive. Another lesson it teaches is that we have to love our family even if they are not perfect because they will always accept us just how we are. It also teaches us that we should forget the past and live day by day our lives because the choices we made in the past are already done and we can’t do anything about them. We can lock our past and unlock a whole new life.
Sarah Dessen has written 8 books for teens. She writes about things that happen often among us. What I like the most about Sarah Dessen’s books is that tee can relate to them. I also like that when you read her books you can easily imagine how the characters are. You can also feel like you are part of the setting. Most of her books are somehow alike but they teach you different life lessons. Her books make you want to keep reading them since the moment you open the book. Her books as well as her characters are amazing.
The main characters of the story are Ruby, Cora, Jamie and Nate. Ruby is a sarcastic and indepent person who believes she can take care of herself. “I’m almost eighteen… and I was doing just fine on my own”. Cora is a person who likes to help people.“Unless you work eighty hours a week saving the world the way she does, she is tough to impress”. Jamie is wealthy and easy going person. There’s also Nate, a friendly, popular and optimistic swimmer. I really like the characters Sarah Dessen creates because you can easily relate to them.
E.Trujillo
Period 5
Lock and Key Part 2
When you read Dessen’s books you can imagine you are there with the characters.She usually uses places in North Carolina as her settings . Lock and Key is set in Wildflower Ridge in the Town of Lakeview. Most of the story takes place in a wealthy neighborhood but sometimes it goes back to a poor town. The houses at Wildflower are big, nice and expensive. As you read the book, the setting becomes more clear to you. Sarah usually uses a reoccuring setting and characters for her books. The setting is interesting but the story is even more.
The book begins with Ruby starting her new life but it then explains how she got there. At first Ruby used to live with her mom but then her mom left and she was sent to live with her sister. Ruby doesn’t like to depend on any one so she’s decided to scape as soon as she turns eighteen. Ruby plans on not making friends but then she ends up with three really good friends. She never imagined that with a school assignment she would find what she had never knew, the true meaning of family. Ruby also learns to not be afraid of staring a new life. She learns to stay away from drugs and finds ou who her real friends are. Ruby never imagined that after her mom left things would be better for her. Learn how Ruby’s life changes by reading Lock and Key. This book just like other books by Sarah Dessen is amazing. This book relates to issues that a lot of teens go through. One of the issues it relates to is that we all want to be indepent but we we are not ready to be alone. Another problem is that we are usually are away from our families because we don’t understant the real value of them. Another issue is that it covers is that we are afraid to leave our past behind. We are usually remainding ourselves of our mistakes and we don’t allow ourself to change. I believe that all of us have experience this situations before. I personally learned a lot from this book.
I really recommend people to read lock and Key. You won’t want to stop reading it. I hope that other people will enjoy this bokk too just like I did.
J.Mejia
period. 1
Second Stringer
by:Dygard,Thomas J.
Dygard, Thomas J. Second Stringer delivers me with the greatness of a captain. This book is about a second string quarterback who replaces one of the best quarterbacks in the league due to an arm injury. Kevin the second string quarterback has never started a game and has no experience in leading the team. Rob the first string quarterback helps Kevin overcome his fears and teaches him the works of football.
In this book the all star quarterback goes down and the second string has to replace him. He has never played in a full game before. He has also never been a captain, a leader. No one thinks he is going to be as good as Rob not even himself. The team wanted to put in another quarterback but the coach said no. Rob invites him over to his house so they could practice on how to throw for accuracy. Kevin gets confidence and so does the team. They go to the champion ship and they…………. Read the book and find out.
This book surprised me in many ways. I thought that the book was going to be about a guy who is just lucky and wins a spot at a bad school but no its not. This book is about the passion of the game. Some one who likes the game. This book reminds me of a real life situation when one of the best quarterback in the league goes down and the second string had to step it up and be the leader. No one had any confidents in him but he shows them that he could take the team to the champion ships. That’s how this book is.
The plot of the book is from the beginning, some of the players didn’t like him to play quarterback. The main characters in this book are the quarterback rob and Kevin. They are the first and second stringers. Rob is a good kid he’s popular during the football season but once it is over it’s like he’s not even there. Kevin is also a good kid gets good grades but he’s not 100% football like rob. This takes place on the football field of Warren high. The theme of this book I would say don’t get discourage from what other people say.
I like this book because it has character. Kevin doesn’t let anybody mess with him and the coach tells him that to. “Kevin you’re the quarterback now” I like that quote because the coach is telling him that he is the captain of the team and not to let anybody push him around. There is another quote that I like and rob says this one. “Kevin can u come over to my house to spot me” I like this quote because here rob helps Kevin and gives him some techniques on how to be good. This shows team work rob is trying to help Kevin.
A. Romero
Believing
Part 1
The book that I read tells a story of an ordinary 19 year old boy from Los Angeles that loves to play soccer and his very talented. In the book of Robert Rigby, Goal! The Dream Begins is a very inspiring book for people that have dreams and don’t give up on them. That person is willing to do anything to achieve his goals in life. Santiago Munes, an LA kid that works in landscaping with his father in the city of Bayberry Hills with the origins of Mexican traits, try to make it day by day to survive in an illegal immigrant world. With the support of his grandmother he manages to play for Newcastle United, a soccer team from the British FA Premiers League. He manages to have fame and glory but starts right after all the sacrifices he had to make including living his family behind six thousand miles away.
The theme of this book is to never give up on what your dreams are. It shows the reader that if you are a good person from inside then you have good things happening to you in live. The characters in this book tended to look up to Santiago because he is a good person in live. The lesson is to not give up in your dreams. That even a person with economic difficulties can make there dreams come true. A person that is trying to pursue a career that is going to take time but is dream is to complete his or her education; not to give up and know that anything in life is possible.
The style that the author uses to describes the séance is very passionate specially wend Santiago scored goals. Since the beginning of the story he has provided the reader to be part of the game. The way he describes the moments that Santiago is going through makes you understand the though times that the main character is facing. Personally I like the way the story was told by the author because he describes the precious moment lived by Santiago. Through out the story he uses a 3rd person’s narrative. He has a very good way to put you in the game with Santiago.
The way that he describes the character in this book is really good because you can tell right away what kind of people they are. For example Santiago is a good young man that likes to work and believes in fairness. He doesn’t give up and puts much attention on people that only give him negative comments about his dreams. Gavin is Santiago’s best friend in the U.K, but his attitude towards life is a bit different from Santiago’s. He is a famous soccer player that was just bough to increase the potential of the team. He is a big show off and on the begging of the book he thinks that he is the greatest person in the world. He drinks and party’s all the time when soccer season is on, and eventually this leads him into problems in the future. The fact that Santiago has an asthma problem but yet he go’s out for pro, that shows the reader that he is a strong man and fights for what he believes in.
A. Romero
Part 2
I believe that the author did a great job on describing the setting for the reader. It made me feel in the game when Santiago was playing the last game so that they would stay in the league. At the last part of the story, the author tents to make the reader sit on the edge of his seat by having a great amount of tension in whether if Santiago would make a goal from the free kick that was awarded to the team. There were only seconds away so that the game would finish, and the score was even. At that moment the author describes the people in the stadium and how Santiago was feeling. Another section of the book that was described well was when Santiago found out that his father had passed away from a heart attack. This crush poor Santiago and the author describe his pain to the reader. This book was based on a real setting with real people so there was nothing unrealistic about it.
This book has a lesson for a person not to give up on you dreams and goals that you have applied for the future. Even a person with low chances of succeeding in live, in a country that you are not welcome can accomplish his goals. The novel shows how this young man how suffers from asthma can overcome medical problems and become the leader of a team. He lives to another country that is six thousand miles away from a family member. This boy leaves everything behind not thinking about the money that he would waist. We have to remember that he is poor and his father dose not approve of his decisions. Yet he still leaves even though the chances of him making it in the team are very low. Towards the middle of the story, he finds a girl named Jane and falls in love. He also tries to straiten up Gavin, but he tells him off. Santiago faces many challenges that always kick’s him out of the team. Yet he manages to accomplish many of his goals and dreams at the end.
In an overall point of view, this book relates to every student that has dreams to become someone in life. In a personal manner, I have a dream to become a doctor and have my own clinic to help lower class people. This is something challenging for any student but I know that it possible. The route is going to be though but at the end of that tunnel I know that there is light waiting for me. I have not read a book that relates to this one and I think its one of a kind. This book show young teens to have dreams and to follow then even if they seem impossible to accomplish. It shows the reader to over come obstacles that are in your way towards that light at the end of the tunnel. In conclusion, I think that this is a great book to read and you can learn many valuable lessons from it.
I highly recommend for any one to read this book especially if you like sports. I don’t mean you have to like soccer in particular. I have heard from people that don’t like sports say that this is a good novel. It’s the whole idea of a young man with financial difficulties and family issues over coming challenges to becoming a professional soccer player. From the beginning of the book you can tell the challenges that Santiago and his family had to pass. One of them is wend they were migrating from Mexico to the U.S. Not only that but they also mention a lot how his mom walked out on his family wend he was younger. I know that this book can be enjoyed by any one regardless of age or sex. It’s a book that can teach you a thing or two about life and its problems.
James Pond
2/1/2010
Per.5
Rainbow Six Book Review
Rainbow Six is an action thriller from Tom Clancy that's one crazy roller coaster from start to finish. With 790 pages this book will keep you turning them just waiting to see what happens next. Like Clancy's other works this is a militaristic thriller with many details and lots of tension.
Rainbow Six takes place in modern times and many of the action sequences take place all over the world. One of the strong points of this book is its constant change of scenery. From Brazil to Holland Clancy does a good job of mixing it up and gives vivid details of the surroundings. But the bad part of the jumping from place to place is that you don't get to much time between missions and what's there is usually just fluff. Another strong point is that you get to go into the eyes of the members of the Rainbow squad which makes them seem more believable not just super men running around without meaning behind it. The plot has some nice twists and turns in it mixing it up and keeping you on your feet. One negative part is that parts of this book don't seem like they were written by Clancy with many factions having the wrong abbreviations and and a few weapon name errors but nothing major.
The basic plot behind the book is several NATO countries have collectively organized an elite counter terrorist unit, composed of the best soldiers from the militaries of several nations, named Rainbow. The story is well written and really isn't like to much out there. Many of the action sequences are hostage standoff situations and you really get a feel of the tension that goes through these people's head when they have to make these choices. Now one of the biggest flaws about this book is that the plot does follow a few stereotype in these types of books such as USA is always good, the best, and never wrong. Another bad thing is that nothing never really goes wrong for these guys and everything just falls into place for them. Also there are a few flaws and subplot holes.
So in conclusion this is a good book with a alot of fun to be had but there's a few fatal flaws from it receiving a perfect score. 4/5
D.Cherney Period 1
Have you ever lost the trust with someone? Well, the main character, named Francis Cassavant, in this book did. He had a girlfriend named Nicole Rennard and lost trust with her after he didn’t help her in a time of need. He went to war cause of this and had his face blown off by a grenade. He then tried to redeem himself by going after the person who hurt Nicole. Cormier’s Heroes lured me to its good plot and its good theme.
The theme of the book was that you don’t have to do something to gain trust back, you can just talk with that person and resolve it then. The life lesson in this book is to not do things that you don’t need to do. They can fix themselves in the future. You don’t need to do anything. Things should be left how they are and don’t change it for the worst. You change it for the better. If you change it for the worst, you could lose everything. If you change it for the better, you will probably make everything better than it was before.
I liked the book Heroes written by Robert Cormier. He wrote a great story on what could happen if you lose the trust in someone. The book has a serious tone and tells a very good lesson. The author’s voice in the book is very good. The book is like other books I have read. They are good stories that tell a very good lesson. The book was one of the best books I have ever read. It is a really good book to read.
Their was three main characters in the book Heroes written by Robert Cormier. The first is Francis Cassavant. He is a 14 year old kid who hangs out at a recreation center with some other people. The second character is the book is Nicole Rennard. She is Francis’ girlfriend and they meet at the recreation center. The other character is Larry LaSalle. He is in charge of the recreation center and is everyone’s hero. I like the character’s in this book because they are the right type of characters that should be used in this book.
The setting in this book is like any other city now. It has all of the things we have here in the real world in the book written by Robert Cormier. It makes me feel like part of the setting because it is like the same as the real world. I could picture the setting of this book if I closed my eyes because it was a great setting and would be hard to forget. The setting in the book has everything that we have. That makes the book so good. It can relate to real life situations. It can also relate to any real life problems that we have today.
The book Heroes written by Robert Cormier starts with three characters at a broken down recreation center. Their names are Francis, Nicole, and Larry. First, Francis meets Nicole at the rec center. They get together and become great friends. They also meet Larry, who becomes great friends with both of them and teaches Francis how to play table tennis. But one day, Larry does something that changes everything and everyone splits away from everyone. Larry is a war veteran and hero because he saved many lives when he went to war. Francis then goes to the army cause of this and becomes a hero himself for saving his platoon by taking a grenade for them, which blew up him face badly.Francis wants to kill Larry for what he did, but he winds up not doing it. He then finds Nicole and apologizes to her, then they become friends again.
You can compare this book to many books. You can compare it with books that teach the same lesson. You can compare it with books with the same lesson. There are a lot of books that could compare to this one with those same thing previously mentioned. Most books would have things about explosions. Some would have some about mistrust. Those books don’t come close to this one. It was a great books that tell a great story.
So, overall, the book Heroes written by Robert Cormier was a good book to read. It has many things that could draw you into reading it. I would recommend reading this book. It was a great book and I would want to read it again.
D.Cherney Period 1
Have you ever lost the trust with someone? Well, the main character, named Francis Cassavant, in this book did. He had a girlfriend named Nicole Rennard and lost trust with her after he didn’t help her in a time of need. He went to war cause of this and had his face blown off by a grenade. He then tried to redeem himself by going after the person who hurt Nicole. Cormier’s Heroes lured me to its good plot and its good theme.
The theme of the book was that you don’t have to do something to gain trust back, you can just talk with that person and resolve it then. The life lesson in this book is to not do things that you don’t need to do. They can fix themselves in the future. You don’t need to do anything. Things should be left how they are and don’t change it for the worst. You change it for the better. If you change it for the worst, you could lose everything. If you change it for the better, you will probably make everything better than it was before.
I liked the book Heroes written by Robert Cormier. He wrote a great story on what could happen if you lose the trust in someone. The book has a serious tone and tells a very good lesson. The author’s voice in the book is very good. The book is like other books I have read. They are good stories that tell a very good lesson. The book was one of the best books I have ever read. It is a really good book to read.
Their was three main characters in the book Heroes written by Robert Cormier. The first is Francis Cassavant. He is a 14 year old kid who hangs out at a recreation center with some other people. The second character is the book is Nicole Rennard. She is Francis’ girlfriend and they meet at the recreation center. The other character is Larry LaSalle. He is in charge of the recreation center and is everyone’s hero. I like the character’s in this book because they are the right type of characters that should be used in this book.
The setting in this book is like any other city now. It has all of the things we have here in the real world in the book written by Robert Cormier. It makes me feel like part of the setting because it is like the same as the real world. I could picture the setting of this book if I closed my eyes because it was a great setting and would be hard to forget. The setting in the book has everything that we have. That makes the book so good. It can relate to real life situations. It can also relate to any real life problems that we have today.
The book Heroes written by Robert Cormier starts with three characters at a broken down recreation center. Their names are Francis, Nicole, and Larry. First, Francis meets Nicole at the rec center. They get together and become great friends. They also meet Larry, who becomes great friends with both of them and teaches Francis how to play table tennis. But one day, Larry does something that changes everything and everyone splits away from everyone. Larry is a war veteran and hero because he saved many lives when he went to war. Francis then goes to the army cause of this and becomes a hero himself for saving his platoon by taking a grenade for them, which blew up him face badly.Francis wants to kill Larry for what he did, but he winds up not doing it. He then finds Nicole and apologizes to her, then they become friends again.
You can compare this book to many books. You can compare it with books that teach the same lesson. You can compare it with books with the same lesson. There are a lot of books that could compare to this one with those same thing previously mentioned. Most books would have things about explosions. Some would have some about mistrust. Those books don’t come close to this one. It was a great books that tell a great story.
So, overall, the book Heroes written by Robert Cormier was a good book to read. It has many things that could draw you into reading it. I would recommend reading this book. It was a great book and I would want to read it again.
M. Alejandra
Period 2
The Lovely Bones
Alice Sebold
Sebold’s The Lovely Bones is a lovely novel that begins with a chilling discovery; "My name was Salmon, like the fish; first name, Susie. I was fourteen when I was murdered on December 6, 1973."
Alice Sebold’s novel is more about the meaning of life then death. The story starts off in a mysterious heaven. The narrator Susie Salmon talks about how her family, the rocky marriage of her mom and dad, and about her bother and sister growing up in the shadow of their older sisters murder.
The Lovely Bones is a very unique book. As you continue reading the theme is set on a father's love for his daughter has no limits. “Nothing is ever certain.” Susie’s dad is completely destroyed when he realizes that his little girl is dead and wont rest until he finds the killer. Her dad quickly puts his eye on the neighbor a very strange man whom is very suspicious. The feeling that he is the murderer of his 14 year old daughter is laid upon him but he does not have any evidence.
The murderer George Harvey is serial killer who has been killing girls and women for a long time and has never been caught. The author presents him child who experienced a horrible childhood. Susie needs him to be dead so she protect any other girls or women he might kill and so she can break the bonds of Earth and finally rest in peace.
Susie’s heaven resembles the high school she never got to attend. “Large, squat building spread out on dismally landscaped lots.” Susie feels like she doesn’t belong in her heaven. She feels that she needs to be on earth to protect her family. Later she tries her hardest to help her family realize what really happened to her and who; the serial killer Mr. Harvey really is…her murder.
The characters in The Lovely Bones are over whelming. You meet them just as they are dealing with Susie’s disappearance then her death. Susie’s mother is profoundly unhappy even before Susie’s death. She is selfish and unfeeling as well when she has an affair with the detective who is investigating Susie’s death. But later realizes her faults. Her dad Jack Salmon feels an enormous guilt for having failed to protect his little girl. He is a man who is faced as well with the loss of his wife who leaves the family to resolve her own grief. Lindsey is the one of the family members who suffers in silence and makes herself to be strong for everyone else. Yet, her pain is deep and bears many burdens: because she looks like Lindsey, “People see only a bloody body when they look at her. ”She has a six year old brother who must lean on her when their mother leaves.
The murderer George Harvey is serial killer who has been killing girls and women for a long time and has never been caught. The author presents him child who experienced a horrible childhood. Susie needs him to be dead so she protect any other girls or women he might kill and so she can break the bonds of Earth and finally rest in peace.
As you keep reading there are a lot of surprises throughout the story. Their mother leaves her family to go with the detective for seven years. Alice Sebold creates a novel that is risky but gracefully succeeds. She makes readers feel what the characters feel…in life and death.
YPadilla
Period 1
The Lovely Bones
By: Alice Sebold
What would happen if you got murdered by your neighbor? In the novel of The Lovely Bones written by Alice Sebold, it discusses how a teenage girl named Susie got murdered by her neighbor Mr. Harvey. This book can teach you many things like never trusting a stranger in your neighborhood. The novel has also been created as a movie and I saw that the book goes more into detail and it’s more entertaining. The book helps you understand the reason Susie got murdered and how Mr. Harvey plan to kill her. This is a remarkably well-written book. It attempts a structure that could leave you with substances and amazing interests.
The theme of The Lovely Bones novel is never trust a stranger in your neighborhood before something bad happens to you. The lesson that Susie gave us in the book was never listen to other people but yourself. What I liked about the book is that it goes into very good detail and it explains you the way Mr. Harvey planned to murder Susie. The author had unique ways to express the characters feelings and reactions in the novel. The characters had a different way to react to Susie’s death. Susie’s father reacts like a caring, and lovable father that just got his heart broken. The character I enjoined reading was Susie’s character because she explains all the movement during her death all the way to heaven and how she is willing to leave earth and have a new life in heaven.
During the beginning of the book she is saying how Mr. Harvey was raping her and killed her. She was only 14 years old when she was murdered. It was one day, after school, she took a short cut though the cornfield. In her way there she found herself with Mr. Harvey. He was walking with her and he invited Susie to a secret basement that he builds. So Susie goes inside the basement with Mr. Harvey and in that moment he stares at her with some eyes that want to hurt you. And you could know what happen next. After in heaven she get to know a teenage girl named Holly. Holly was also murder by Harvey. Mr. Harvey would first plan the death and then kill the girls. It’s freaky and scary….
This book has been the best one I have read because it’s amazing, interesting, scary and bravely. I recommend this book to all students that are interested in reading and enjoin reading books with deaths. Even though this book has a happy ending and has a very unique format of setting.
YPadilla
Period 1
The Lovely Bones
By: Alice Sebold
What would happen if you got murdered by your neighbor? In the novel of The Lovely Bones written by Alice Sebold, it discusses how a teenage girl named Susie got murdered by her neighbor Mr. Harvey. This book can teach you many things like never trusting a stranger in your neighborhood. The novel has also been created as a movie and I saw that the book goes more into detail and it’s more entertaining. The book helps you understand the reason Susie got murdered and how Mr. Harvey plan to kill her. This is a remarkably well-written book. It attempts a structure that could leave you with substances and amazing interests.
The theme of The Lovely Bones novel is never trust a stranger in your neighborhood before something bad happens to you. The lesson that Susie gave us in the book was never listen to other people but yourself. What I liked about the book is that it goes into very good detail and it explains you the way Mr. Harvey planned to murder Susie. The author had unique ways to express the characters feelings and reactions in the novel. The characters had a different way to react to Susie’s death. Susie’s father reacts like a caring, and lovable father that just got his heart broken. The character I enjoined reading was Susie’s character because she explains all the movement during her death all the way to heaven and how she is willing to leave earth and have a new life in heaven.
During the beginning of the book she is saying how Mr. Harvey was raping her and killed her. She was only 14 years old when she was murdered. It was one day, after school, she took a short cut though the cornfield. In her way there she found herself with Mr. Harvey. He was walking with her and he invited Susie to a secret basement that he builds. So Susie goes inside the basement with Mr. Harvey and in that moment he stares at her with some eyes that want to hurt you. And you could know what happen next. After in heaven she get to know a teenage girl named Holly. Holly was also murder by Harvey. Mr. Harvey would first plan the death and then kill the girls. It’s freaky and scary….
This book has been the best one I have read because it’s amazing, interesting, scary and bravely. I recommend this book to all students that are interested in reading and enjoin reading books with deaths. Even though this book has a happy ending and has a very unique format of setting.
Nancy Ferreyra p.2
"Garden of Angels"
by:
Lurlene McDaniel
This book is called “Garden Angels” written by Lurlene McDaniel. A fascinated book, which made many families understand what it means to keep the family together through good time and times.
In this book you’ll see an example of many families in this country and others struggle of many different types of diseases. That can’t be cured if not detected on time, for example in this story. It all began in the 1970’s in the city of Connors, Georgia in this book you’ll find a family of 4 that struggle while the mother of two daughters has cancer and she only controlled it for a while and then she died. Her younger daughter Darcy had to tolerate a diagnosed with a malignancy called breast cancer that ate her mom Joy Quinlin cell by cell, while her two daughters Adel the older one and Darcy stood around wringing our hands and praying payers for healing that fell on god’s deaf ears. Joy Quinlin’s husband also prayed along with his two daughters over his wife’s health.
After years Darcy’s mom died, when Darcy had so much to tell her mom about the war and what happen to the solders who were in it, the feelings she had for some new boy in school, but all of that stuff she can’t, so she finds solace in her mother’s garden. There she can help the flowers that her mother planted bloom.
So this is a message form Lurlene McDaniel to all her readers to let know that no matter what happens in life you’ll always have some memories of that special person, but still could find a beautiful place where you can find solace and think back of what you lived before. Also she says that no one here Is alone now because now on day there will be more institutes where to recur at, to not be alone. Life sometimes can be unfair but, for some reason things happen, and only god knows why he takes families away.
J Carrizal
Period 1
Native Son by Richard Wright
Imagine living in the 1930s, in a city dominated by racist people who just discriminate your kind and make you feel ashamed of your own race. Well this story will give you that experience in the perspective of a teenager who feels oppressed by society, which leads him to committing two major crimes. Richard Wright’s, Native Son, opens up your mind and makes you reflect about society tension.
Native Son explores many themes, but one of the major themes is the effect of racism on the oppressed. Bigger, the protagonist portrays the black people of the 1930s. His mind gets corrupted by the racial injustice in his community. He is an example oh how our minds, once corrupted with hatred and fear, leads us to not distinguish the difference between the good and bad.
This story is told from first point of view. I like it this way because it makes you feel part of the story as if it were you experiencing everything. I also like how its style is not like a usual plot. It is actually more of a diary even though it wasn’t meant to be a diary. What I dislike about it is that it left me wondering of what Bigger experienced at the end, rather then knowing what was going to happen.
The characters in the story portray the society of the author’s time and even today. Bigger, the protagonist is a poor, uneducated black man, who comes from the lowest step on the American social and economic ladder. He has felt trapped his whole life, resenting, hating, and fearing the whites who define the narrow limits of his existence. Mary Dalton is the daughter of Mr. Dalton, Bigger’s rich employers. Mary identifies herself as a progressive and interacts with Bigger with little regard for the strict limit society imposes between black men and white women. Mary’s wrongdoing of this frontier leads to her death and the resulting progress of Bigger’s character.
The story’s setting is very clear for it is a normal city just like any other. The author makes you feel like your part of the story due to its first point of view. If you close your eyes you will imagine yourself in a city that you has very strict limits to you and your people. You will know where you’re going because there isn’t much to look at other than what was limited to you. I don’t complain for this because it does go through a lot of action of a human being.
Bigger Thomas wakes up in the morning only to hear his mother complain about him all the time. Anger, fear, and frustration define Bigger’s daily existence. He soon takes the job of a chauffeur from a wealthy white man named Mr. Dalton. He soon starts to open up because the Daltons are generous towards his people. This generosity makes him think a lot, but to the point where he accidentally kills the daughter of Mr. Dalton, Mary. He tries to lie about the murder, but soon gets caught after committing another crime. In jail he starts to realize what he did wrong and right, but when he does, it is too late.
I think this book can almost be compared to a diary, but with a usual plot like all stories. It relates to the society of black people from the 1930s. It also relates to today’s society for its political theme and individual theme for example, communism issues and fear of a human being. Personally, I think this book relates to me for its theme of fear for certain things, although this also relates to all human.
Overall I think this is a very interesting book to read for its reality. I recommend this book to anyone who wants to know more about the experiences of people who felt oppressed by society. It will help you open up your mind and question society from years ago and even today.
A. Tenno
Period 4
The Jungle Book Review
Many novels in American History have had a profound impact on our nation. Upton Sinclair crafted one of these novels in The Jungle, in which an immigrant family deals with the pitfalls and tribulations of living in America. They soon realize the streets are not “paved with gold,” and experience firsthand the corruption and greed of the trusts. Sinclair created this epic novel, which truly is an example of the immigrant experience, to express his socialist views to his audience. His use of themes, style, characters, settings, plot, and allusions paint a wonderful picture of life in the “Era of Good Stealings”, and truly create and example of Americana.
Sinclair uses a variety of themes to heighten the reader’s experience whilst reading The Jungle. His most prevalent theme, at least at the end of the novel, is that of socialism. “He heard them address Adams as ‘comrade’, so he knew they were socialists”(372). He uses socialism to express his message, that the country is corrupt by the robber barons that control both politics and industry. Sinclair believes that socialism can solve their problem, as when the main character accepts socialism he becomes enlightened and his life gets back on track. Another theme is the immigrant experience, which Sinclair uses extremely effectively as a tool to get his audience to relate to his characters and their issues. “The bohemians came after them (Germans), after them the poles” (73). He uses this as a theme to emphasize the exploitation of people who were just coming to America to make their life better. He does this to help his readers, who likely had relatives in the same position, relate to his plot and message. More so, this theme also creates an even larger feeling of anger towards the rich who swindled and stole from their poor brethren, which does follow Social Darwinism, but goes against all the Biblical and spiritual teachings of our society. Sinclair seems to be saying that kindness cannot exist where greed and corruption are entrenched. The last theme that Sinclair uses is that of Individualism. As many of us have learned from experience, the older generations tend to be more independent and headstrong than we would like. “Jurgis was so bent upon his task that he knew nothing… and scarcely realized that people were trying to interfere with him” (171). This allows for the audience to relate to Jurgis, as a headstrong patriarchal dictator. Sinclair does this so his audience can even more relate to the novel, and believe in his socialist ideals.
(Continued in next post due to length issues)
A. Tenno
The Jungle (Continued)
Sinclair’s voice or style in The Jungle is extremely vivid. He uses and weaves in his socialist ideals, which might sit unsatisfyingly with his audience. He does use a plethora of descriptive language, especially when describing how the animals were slaughtered. However, this description might put off some readers, since he goes into great detail pertaining to the slitting of pig’s throats and such. “This floor was half an inch deep with blood, in spite of the best efforts of the men who kept shoveling it through the holes; it must have made the floor slippery, but no one could have guessed that…” (42). His descriptions had a purpose, however, inciting the public to wonder where their roasts and hams came from. I still have issues looking at my meat, especially sausage. However, this underlying style of attacking the meat companies seamed to work, since today we have much more sanitary conditions for our meats. However, his descriptions are not Dickens-esque, in the manner that they do not get in the way of the reader’s understanding of the plot. Also, it seems to flow evenly, making the reader interested in the plot and characters. “But she laid cold and still-she was gone-she was gone!” (213). Finally, Sinclair styles his work in such a manner that the audience does not truly understand his true agenda until the end (“Chicago will be ours!” (338)). He does this for a variety of reasons, mainly since the novel was serialized and he wanted to maintain his audience. He does this extremely effectively, since socialism was sort of a taboo subject even back then, with the circulation of black lists of known socialist members among many of the plants. But all in all, Sinclair crafts his novel using a style of deception and vivid descriptions that make us wonder how our meat reaches our tables.
The main character in The Jungle, Jurgis, is a prime example of American stubbornness and ingenuity. Although Jurgis does not succeed at much in his life, he always vows that he will “Work harder”, and make life better for his family. Although his foray into being a hobo, traveling the country, and then becoming a criminal before turning into a straight edge socialist is somewhat hard to believe, Sinclair masterfully makes the audience believe that Jurgis is just another Grandfather telling stories about how he had to walk uphill both ways to school in ten feet of snow. “He knew that he was wronged, and that the world had wronged him; that the law, the society, with all its powers, had declared itself his foe” (181). Jurgis is a prime example of the immigrant who comes to America to work hard so as to provide a better life for his family, and that is his main appeal. He is relatable to most if not all of the population who has been oppressed and had to rise from the clutches of impoverishment, and the journey that they must go on to reach success. Although Jurgis is not perfect, he is extremely believable as a character and was masterfully crafted by Sinclair, who probably used the experiences of many of his immigrant peers to help provide insight into the plights and experiences of the workingman.
A. Tenno
The Jungle (Continued)
The setting of The Jungle is highly believable and extremely accurate to the period. Sinclair talks of the many crowded factories, the unbelievable smells, and the crowded homes that only make the novel more and more believable. “To this part of the yards came all the “tankage,” and the waste products of all sorts; here they dried out the bones, —and in suffocating cellars where the daylight never came you might see men and women and children bending over whirling machines and sawing bits of bone into all sorts of shapes, breathing their lungs full of the fine dust, and doomed to die” (149). Sinclair uses this setting for a variety of reasons. His use of deplorable conditions to emphasize the needs of the poor only strengthens his socialist argument, especially due to the swindling of Jurgis and his family. “All of this did not chill their ardor as much as might have been expected, because of the volubility of the agent” (52). It must have been extremely awful working in the factories, as evidenced by the numerous injuries and the blood stained floors. However, the setting is extremely believable, yet somewhat incredulous due to the extreme poverty of the families. Also, it seems to snow a little more frequently in the novel than I would expect (my grandfather who grew up in Chicago agrees). However, Sinclair’s setting of an extremely poor working town is extremely believable, and accurate to the time and place of Chicago.
The plot of the novel follows the course of an oscillating line. After every up that Jurgis has, his world seems to be crashing down the next second. One second, he is given one hundred dollars by a kind yet rather drunk benefactor, the next he is thrown in jail under suspicion of stealing that money. He has a house, and seems to be doing well, then his wife gets raped and he gets arrested for attacking her rapist. Every time Jurgis has a positive event, it seems to come to an end as quickly as it started. However, the constant ups and downs make the plot extremely believable, since it is definitely not a Disney movie so to speak. However, the story does somewhat end well for Jurgis, even though he loses a portion of his family. He seems to pull of a Renaissance man sort of life, ranging from meat packing to crime to hoboing. Sinclair also uses the plot as a device to insert his feelings about socialism. When Jurgis is enlightened by the teachings and ideals of socialism, his life turns around, and socialism seems to be surging forward as a challenge to the Democrats and Republicans. All in all, the plot of The Jungle was extremely well put together and very believable in addition to being extremely exciting and suspenseful.
A.Tenno
The Jungle (continued)
One can make many connections with the novel. The most obvious are to Nazi Germany and Soviet Russia, which were the two somewhat successful socialist movements. Also, one sees connections with the French Revolution, since the ideals of equality and liberties were set high on a pedestal. However, with this connotation brings reminders of the great murders committed by each group: Hitler’s Last Resort, The Soviet Purges, and The Reign of Terror. This presents an issue and a chink in the armor of socialism. If the people are in control, what is stopping them from killing in a mob style? One can look at the KKK, who uses their power to create terror among those who do not believe as they do. Another connotation to this novel was the corruption of the governments in the late 1800’s in America. Although the government was set on destroying the Trusts, they had so much power that they could do whatever they wanted to rob their workers. The last connection one can make to The Jungle is to Campbell’s idea of the Hero With a Thousand Faces, as Jurgis seems to follow the long journey and redemption aspects of the Hero. Although one may not think that Jurgis is a hero, he is the Protagonist of the novel and has some hero-like qualities.
Sinclair uses the tools of theme, plot, allusions, characters, and setting to create a novel that is both complex and easy to read. His actions to incite the public to rise up are duly noted, and this seems like one of the first real rebellions against capitalism and Social Darwinism in the modern America. However, his novel was extremely well crafted, and has withstood the test of time as a testament to the power and way freedom of speech can be used. His novel had a great impact on the meat packing industry, and inspired many others to change society for the better. Overall, I give it a 9.5 out of 10, as it is an excellent read for those who enjoy political commentary and the story of the American Immigrant.
G.Guido
Period 4
The Kite Runner
Suspense, poverty, evil, betrayal, forgiveness, love these are only a few words to describe Hosseini’s The Kite Runner. This novel left me speechless with its suspenseful plot and surprising twist of events. It’s an incredible story that trays the struggles of a country, wild roller coaster relationships, and the hardships of poverty and self-struggles that many front on a daily basis.
There are multiple themes in this novel, for example forgiveness, love, betrayal, assimilation, and the ranks of social/economic status. The theme that seems to stand out the most is that of betrayal, because it is the one thing that haunts the narrator through out the entire book, “He knew I had betrayed him…” (105). The betrayal from which he fringes onto throughout his life exposes all his memories in his childhood and the events that lead up to the twists and turns he faces in his adulthood. The Kite Runner mostly illustrates the hardships that are faced in the world even into this modern time. I really enjoyed the style of this text, because the emotions and events weren’t vague, “I’ll never forget the way Baba said that, the pain in his plea, the fear.” (107). The style is raw and full of emotion and it leaves you in suspense wondering what’s next. You also get a clear understanding of the setting because of the author’s style of writing. The images of poverty and evil are really painted into the image of the setting. “We passed the rusted skeleton of an overturned car, a TV set with no screen half-buried in rubble, a wall with the words ZENDA BAD TALIBAN! (Long live the Taliban!) sprayed in black” (251) The author’s voice is alike and simultaneously unlike other writers. The narrator is the main character so his mixed emotions and memories transfer through onto the reader very clearly, “I was a liar, a cheat, and a thief. And I would have told, except that a part of me was glad...I wanted to be able to breathe again” (105). At the same time you understand the complicated dilemmas he faces as he grows older and the mistakes he makes along the way.
There are many characters in this story, and they’re all intertwined into a huge web. The person that holds this web together is Amir, a complicated person, “That’s what I made myself believe. I actually aspired to cowardice, because the alternative, the real reason I was running, was that Assef was right: Nothing was free in this world. Maybe Hassan was the price I had to pay, the lamb I had to slay, to win Baba. Was it a fair price? The answer floated to my conscious mind before I could thwart it: He was just a Hazara, wasn’t he?” (77). Amir is complex because he grows up struggling to find his father’s love and he lives his adulthood burying a past he is ashamed of. His father Baba is characterized as a great man leader and is respected by everyone “Do you always have to be the hero? I thought, my heart fluttering. Can’t you just let it go for once? But I knew he couldn’t-it wasn’t in his nature.”(115). Hassan is Amir’s servant, and an extremely loyal friend, “He knew I had betrayed him and yet he was rescuing me once again, maybe for the last time.”(105). The author makes you believe these characters are real, because you don’t get a good or bad character. You get a character with mixed emotions and actions, ones that make mistakes just like characters in real life.
G.Guido
Period 4
The Kite Runner
There are two settings, in the United States and in Kabul. The United States is explained from the perspective of an immigrant. The places Amir and Baba frequent are concentrated around their own culture. For example the flee market they attended every weekend is explained as full of Afghan culture and it is the location in which Amir visits and courts his future wife. The setting back home in Kabul has two time frames, that of the last peaceful moments before the country’s revolution and Russian invasion “Blue skies stood tall and far, the sun like a branding iron searing the back of our neck.”(107). The second time frame setting is when Amir returns to his country and finds everything completely different “ I remembered how green the playing field grass had been in the ‘70s when Baba used to bring me to soccer games here. Now the pitch was a mess. There were holes and craters everywhere, most notably a pair of deep holes in the ground …And there was no grass at all, just dirt.” (268). There are a lot of references like this one that compare before and after pictures. This technique helps bring the reader to the place the characters are, and how the characters feel about the location and the unfortunate new changes.
The plot of the story relies heavily on the memories of the narrator, Amir. Amir and his father Baba live in Kabul with two servants Hassan and his father Ali. Amir is envious of the relationship Baba shares with Hassan. In that case when a kite racing tournament comes along, Amir feels winning this tournament will in a sense buy his father’s love. Amir wins with the help of Hassan, an unexpected event occurs that day that scars both Hassan and Amir for life. Amir gains the love of his dad but loses Hassan, and must reencounter what he buries later in his adult life, “Because the past claws its way out.” (1). The unstable Afghanistan drives Baba and Amir to the United States where Amir meets his wife Soraya, “…sunlight had danced in Soraya’s eyes, and of delicate hollows above her collarbone.”(149). A phone call drives Amir back to Kabul to find Sohrab, Hassan’s son. This turns into a whole new journey full of discoveries and encounters with the past.
It is difficult to connect this author with other writer’s because his story involves a whole new story in a different unexplored culture. This book became very popular especially after being published after 9/11; it helps Americans see that Afghanistan faces their own problems even in modern times. This book connected with me at a personal level because I think it reflects the lies and betrayals that many struggle with and look for their own redemption, this is also especially accomplished because the author embellishes parts of his own life, adding on to its more realistic feel.
I strongly recommend this book; it’s not a typical book. It has so many twists and turns, and very compelling events. You’re left with a feeling of satisfaction because you were part of such a unique and amazing story.
Angel Jimenez
p.5
The Natural by Robert Redford is an exciting book.This book is a story about a guy named Roy Hobbs who has a lot of trobule becoming a pro baseball player.
The theam of this book is to never give up no mater what obsticles come your way.trought this book roy hobbs gets alot of obsticles to become a profesinal baseball player and to be the beast. When he was young he was ggoing to tryout for a pro team but he ends up geting shot by some crazy lady. He comes back to the sport and makes it pro at the age of 39 and he has to prove himsealf to get a srarting spot and to get respect because they think he is to old to play pro ball. He also has girl problems. He falls in love with a gold digger and she relly dosnt like him.
The style of this book is uniqe. it has alot of stuff that other books dont have. this book style makes you feel like if you wer roy hobbs and you went threw his struggle and his glory when he broke records. Robert Redford gives alot of detales in this story its like if you can see it in front of you.
The chracters of this book are Roy Hobbs, Pop Fisher, Red, Bump, Memo, and Iris Lemon. The main character is Roy hobbs he is a pro basball player he likes food and he falls in love fast. Pop Fisher is the owner of the Knights the pro baseball team that Roy plays for. Red is roys first freind that he gets in the team. Red is the equipment manager for the team. Bump is the beast player the Knights had befor Roy came to the team. Bump didnt like Roy very much. Memo is the girl that roy falls in love with she is also Bumps girlfreind. Iris Lemon is the girl that falls in love with roy she has a daugter and she givs roy his game back when he is on a slump.
The seting in the beganing is on a train. Robert Redford described the train perfactly. He makes you feel like if your in the train. then the seting is on a city mostly a hotel and the baseball stadium. The athuor describes the loker room when Roy gets thear and you can picture it relly esaly and perfect.
The plot of this book is about Roy Hobbs way on becoming a profesinal baseball player. He has alot of things that make him not reach his goal fast because he gets shot. He fanilly becomes pro but he is 39 so his careare will not last long. He breaks alot of records in a short amount of time. Roy becomes loved by alot of people. Roy falls in love with a girl named Memo. He meats her because of Bump he trades rooms with Roy and she gose in side the room and in bed with him but she thinks its Bump. Then another girl comes her name is Iris Lemon he meats her but he dosent know if he should talk to her again because she has a daughter.
This book dose not compare with any other books in any way. this book has a uniqe style and it has stuff other books dont. So it cant compare with any. This book dose not conect with me in a personal way. It may be in a current event or isue because alot of people have alot of obsticles to become profesinal athleats.
I recomend this book because its very intresting. You will never get bored reading it makes you wana watch the movie. its exciting dramatic its sad and funny it has everything a good sports book needs.
C. Arriaza
Period:2
Right Behind You
The authors name is gail giles.he is a good author and person that knows how to develop his ideas.
Kip is a kid who murder bobby clark he spends most of his life in shame and he doesnt tell anybody onl his dad knew but they moved away to str=art a new life.after he moved he had friends but until one day.
The day he told his whole story he told his friends what had happen and they all left him and he had to move away again. Him his dad and his dad's girlfriend suffer alot. They decided to go to a house in Texas.
He meet a new girl he found out bad things about herand one day he told her his story he didn't know what she was gonna do. One day he got a call from her and she told him Im standing right behind.
Alissa Scheafer
Period 1
Perfect You
by Elizabeth Scott
Elizabeth Scott’s book, Perfect You, was an informing and inspirational book based on a young teenager. Kate Brown is like most teenagers until she is faced with a drastic change in her life. She has to cope with many new changes and deal with them. She feels that if she shuts everyone out of her life, then things couldn’t hurt her anymore. She realizes that shutting everyone out is the best way to handle her situation. Perfect You was very informing and I really enjoyed reading this book.
Many books have a message and or theme to them. Perfect You, by Elizabeth Scott, theme is to never close everyone out of your life. When everything seems to being going wrong in your life, don’t stop caring about anyone or anything. People will still be there that care about you to help you along the way. The book also teaches the reader that even when life throws you a curveball, good things can still happen, but only if you let them.
I found that the author, Elizabeth Scott, writing style was very informing and also inspiring. I liked realizing the overall message that she was trying to portray in this book. It made me realize that even though you go through struggle in life, good things can still happen. All you have to do is let them happen. The author’s voice is like other books I’ve read, in which they are informing certain situations that young adults go through in life.
Kate Brown is a teenager who has been through a lot. At first, she has a best friend named Anna who she loves being around. Suddenly Anna becomes popluar and forgets all about Kate. After being hurt by so many people she figures that the only way her life will get better is if she keeps to herself. I found Kate’s character to be very interesting and intriguing. What I look for in books is something that young teenagers can relate to and this book did exactly that.
The setting of the book is extremely visible. Its setting is in a normal community. It takes place at the mall and also at the school. The way the author wrote the book helped me picture what was going on even if I had my eyes closed. Because of this, I felt it was easier to read and fully understand what was going on throughout the book.
Kate Brown had the life she had always wanted until the day her father decided to quit his job to accomplish his dream of selling vitamins. Kate is now forced to work with her dad to sell vitamins. To make matters worse, her best friend for years becomes popluar and acts like Kate doesn’t exist anymore. Kate also meets this popluar and irresistible guy Will. She denies the fact that she has fallen for him. In the end, Kate realizes that even when she thinks her life sucks, good things can and will happen and she needs to let them happen.
I can compare this book to other books that I’ve read by Elizabeth Scott. The books she has written are about struggles and controversies that young adults face in their life. I feel that many young girls and or guys can relate to this book. I myself can also relate to it because I have been in tough situations and felt like nothing good can happen. In the end, some good things may happen if only you let them happen.
Perfect You, by Elizabeth Scott was an interesting and well informing book. I recommend this book to any young adult seeking for advice on the struggles that many young adults face. This book helps the reader realize that good things will happen to you if only you let them.
C. Head
Period 4
AP English Language
2-1-10
The Stranger
“… I felt that I had been happy and that I was happy again.” (pg. 123) This one quote encompasses the whole story. Through Monsieur Meursault’s life he faces many trials which somehow manage to become something good. However, not everything can be made to something wonderful. Albert Camus’ The Stranger enthralled me with its honest and sort of sad way of looking at life.
The main theme or life lesson in this book was that, in my opinion at least, that the world is a rough place and it’s probably easier to die. “They were announcing departures for a world that now and forever meant nothing to me.” (pg. 122) The narrator has finally given up on the world around him.
Albert Camus’ writing style certainly draws the reader in as soon as the book is picked up off the shelf. His sentence structure is short and to the point which is actually much easier to understand as well as read. His first sentence in the whole book simply starts out as, “Maman died today.” (pg. 3) It’s not a long drawn out way of getting to the point. The narrator simply states what happened. This book isn’t necessarily funny, but it occasionally has a light hearted and relaxed tone to it. One quote in particular that shows the levity in the narrators tone would be, “The word around the neighborhood is that he lives off women. But when you ask him what he does, he’s a warehouse guard.” (pg. 28) Personally I thought this quote to be a little sarcastic and a little witty. The way the stories written kind of sets up that it’s not necessarily in our time, but perhaps the older days, “First he lit his paraffin lamp…” (pg. 28) There was no electricity so that would infer the time period is not recent. The narrator may not have been able to afford a very nice house. This book is definitely a little more unique in the sense of the writing style and just the honesty of the narrator.
C. Head
Period 4
2-1-10 Cont...
The main character in this book, Monsieur Meursault, is definitely written so that you believe he’s a real person. The book is written from his point of view and the thoughts in his head are ones that are easy to relate to. For example, “A minute later she asked me if I loved her. I told her it didn’t mean anything but that I didn’t think so.” (pg. 35) There’s nothing amazing or fantastic about him. He’s just a typical guy who I think many people are more liable to understand and be able to relate him. Another big character in this story is Raymond, the neighbor. Raymond is known as a womanizer who is extremely quite the mean drunk. “The girl rushed to the door and told the policeman that Raymond had hit her.” (pg. 36) Raymond had a nice side, but unfortunately didn’t like being cheated on. The last two really big characters are Marie, Meursault’s girlfriend, and Old Slamano, Meursault’s neighbor. Salamano is the neighbor that loves and hates his dog. “When I ran into him on the stairs, Salamano was swearing away at the dog.” (pg. 27) Lastly, Marie is the girl who happens to be in love with Monsieur Meursault. “A minute later she asked me if I loved her. I told her it didn’t mean anything but that I didn’t think so. She looked sad.” (pg. 35)
The Stranger is actually set in about three places. The first place is Meursault’s grungy apartment, the second is the beach, and the final is a jail cell. I don’t necessarily know exactly how it feels to live in a grungy apartment but the author paints a clear picture of what it looks like in the apartment. “He has only one room too, and a little kitchen with no window.” (pg. 28) The beach is also painted clearly by his talk about how hot the sun was. “… I could feel my forehead swelling under the sun.” (pg. 57) The narrator also talks about how “The sea gasped for air with each swallow, stifled a little wave that broke on the sand.” (pg. 57) While I read this I completely felt that I was the one sitting with Meursault in that little apartment or that I was the one that was with him while swimming through the waves.
The story opens up with the young man’s mother perishing. He didn’t really take care of her and since she lived in a home he wasn’t necessarily close to his mom anymore. He goes on to talk about his girlfriend, Marie, whom he doesn’t exactly love but likes to be around. He then meets his neighbor Raymond. Raymond turns out to be a woman beater and ends up asking a big favor from Mersault. Mersault then ends up getting into some trouble with the law which doesn’t end up so well for him.
This book isn’t really like other books I’ve read. It’s very unique and special in its own way. This could quite possibly relate to other people’s lives or current events. This book doesn’t really relate me on any level whatsoever, but I think this was an extremely well written and entertaining book. I definitely recommend this book to other people.
C. Umansky
Period 4
One Flew Over the Cuckoo’s Nest by Ken Kesey (1)
Back in the 1950s and 1960s the United States was focused on continuing its efforts against communism and totalitarian regimes, while Ken Kesey was spending his days observing and interviewing patients at a mental hospital. From his experiences, he wrote a unique novel about rebellion against conformity and individualism. One Flew Over the Cuckoo’s Nest, by Ken Kesey, inspired and drew emotion from me with its darkly humorous context and rebellious tone.
Individualism is a prominent theme in One Flew Over the Cuckoo’s Nest. Before McMurphy arrived at the psychiatric ward, Nurse Ratched had all of the men conformed to her schedule and restrictions, and they did not express themselves. They didn’t display emotion, and for Chief Bromden, McMurphy’s laugh was the “first laugh he’s heard in years”, showing just how oppressed these patients are (12). McMurphy goes about trying to unveil each man’s true nature by acting rambunctiously in front of them and blatantly disregarding Ratched’s rules, and openly defying her. He exceptionally tries to get the men to express themselves sexually; as matriarchy and female dominance play a major role in the novel. Harding even tells McMurphy that they are “comical little creatures (that) can’t even achieve masculinity in the rabbit world” after McMurphy remarks about rabbits’ excessive breeding habits (65). Bromden’s mother dominated her husband and son, Ratched and her nurses dominate the ward, Harding by his wife, and Billy Babbit’s mother dictate’s his development. It is no coincidence that Billy finally gains his confidence and persona back after McMurphy hooks him up with Candy, even though he eventually succumbs to the guilt towards his mother. If these men had the tools to become individuals they would be able to become well, but the oppression for them to conform by society and the hindrance of sexuality only cause them harm.
Ken Kesey uses such language and writes with a style that invigorates deep passions; especially those that erupt with a loathing towards Nurse Ratched. I don’t believe I have ever hated a character as much as I hated her since I read about Severus Snape in third grade. Kesey portrays her with so much oppression and dominance and genuine evil that one finds themself cheering on McMurphy and hoping for her demise. Although the novel is altogether serious, Kesey utilizes humorous situations that help the storyline flow. Take, for example this excerpt from page 44:
“”He has also stated that his wife’s ample bosom at times gives him a feeling of inferiority. So. Does anyone care to touch upon this subject further?”
Harding shuts his eyes, and nobody else says anything. McMurphy looks around at the other guys, waiting to see if anybody is going to answer the Nurse, then holds his hand up and snaps his fingers, like a schoolkid in class; the nurse nods at him.
“Mr.-ah-McMurry?”
“Touch upon what?”
“What? Touch-“
“You ask, I believe, Does anyone care to touch upon-“
“Touch upon the-subject, Mr. McMurry, the subject of Mr. Harding’s problem with his wife.”
“Oh. I thought you mean touch upon her-something else.”
I like the book’s humorous tones underneath the serious lessons the novel relays.
While the novel would not be as great without all of the characters in it, three main characters really make the book. Randle P. McMurphy and Nurse Ratched’s relationship explore the ideas of rebelling against conformity and oppressive forces, while Chief Bromden acts as the perfect narrator as he observes this relationship and unwittingly transmits thoughtful insight. Bromden is believed to be deaf and dumb by everyone, but he realizes that this is a result of other people acting like he was never there, rather then him pretending.
(2)
He recalls as a child trying to talk to some government officials at his home, but they just got “back in the car and drove away, with me standing there wondering if they ever even saw me” (215). His traits attribute to his detailed narration and how he observes McMurphy’s untamed individuality clash with Ratched’s strict regime-esque ward policies. From the very start, Ratched attempts to get McMurphy to comply with her rules but he just replies, “Ya know, ma’am, ya know-that is the ex-act thing somebody always tells me about the rules…just when they figure I’m about to do the dead opposite” (26).
While McMurphy is the definitive protagonist, Ratched is the definite antagonist, and is so controlling one really comes to dislike her as a person (even though she’s just a character). But despite her efforts, she seems to have met her match with McMurphy, constantly having to remind him that he is “under the jurisdiction of me..the staff..Under jurisdiction and control-“, because she can never really get McMurphy to give in and conform (144). The characters in the novel come to life, which help envelope the reader, in fascinate them, and make for an exciting read.
The setting of One Flew Over the Cuckoo’s Nest is a mental hospital somewhere in Oregon and most likely in the 1950s or 60s, as World War II is still a recent memory for Chief Bromden. Nurse Ratched tries to keep her ward completely isolated from the Outside; in doing this she is able to control everything and everyone with her tyrannical dominance. It is not until McMurphy comes until the original setting as changed, as McMurphy brings new life to the patients who, before, were like “old, worthless clocks that just keep ticking and cuckooing without meaning nothing” and gives them a view of the outside world (55). He symbolizes a breath of fresh air and hope for the patients, and he further instills this, as well as confidence, in them by backing them up and getting them authorized to go on a fishing trip (244). One can see the setting shift from oppressed to released as the story moves along.
Nurse Ratched has all the men in her psychiatric ward compliant and conformed, that is, until McMurphy arrives and stirs thing up. Blatantly clashing with everything the Big Nurse stands for, especially how at the Group Therapy Meetings she gets the men to act like a “bunch of chickens at a peckin’ party” (57). McMurphy aims to get the men to express their individuality and is always going back and forth with the Nurse. She doesn’t allow them to watch the World Series, McMurphy and the men disregard their chores and stare at a blank TV. Eventually something’s got to give, and that is what makes One Flew Over the Cuckoo’s Nest gripping until the finish.
Kesey’s novel deals with rebelling against conformity during a time when America was going through an anti-Communism movement and against totalitarian regimes, so one can really relate to it through history classes and texts, which go into detail of that age. Chief Bromden puts into perspective what he and McMurphy is up against when he says “it’s not just the Big Nurse by herself, but it’s the whole Combine, the nationwide Combine that’s a really big force, and the nurse is just a high-ranking official for them” when trying to find what the root of their troubles are (192). This book is similar to The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn by Mark Twain, as both protagonists are up against an oppressive society with only rejects by their side (Jim for Huckleberry and the mental patients for McMurphy). This book really connects with the ready because it instills the fact that sometimes stands must be made and that there are certain things worth laying one’s life down for.
This is by far one of the better books I have read and I would recommend it to all. The story has an exciting plotline, with McMurphy and his escapades within and outside of the hospital; characters also provide a humorous tone. All in all this is an enlightening book that implants meaning in the reader through symbols and character’s actions.
J. Cerros
Period 4
The Color Purple
Many people in life are separated from the people that they love and everyone deals with this separation differently. Throughout the novel Celie is miserable with the pain of her separation with her sister Nettie. Walker’s The Color Purple captivated me with the unique style and literary devices.
Separation with someone that you love is hard to forget so you will always have that person in mind. Celie and her sister, Nettie, are separated but their love is so strong that they get through life thinking that in the end they are going to met again. The life lesson that this demonstrates is that if a love is strong that you will you can overcome any obstacles in your way and then met up at the end with the person that you love.
I like the author’s style because it is very easy to understand and you can feel the emotions that the writer is feeling when she is writing the novel. It is also very easy to keep up with the events that are going on in the story. This book is written like a dairy to god so one phrase that is repeated a lot is “Dear God” when Celie is telling god the events that were going on in her life (pg. 1). Walker also never says the name of Celie’s husband, which kept me captivated in the story on why Celie always called him “Mr. ______” (pg. 114). Near the end of the book Celie doesn’t write to god anymore but to Nettie now that she found out the she is alive and has received all of Nettie’s letters to her. No the style isn’t that funny because throughout the book Celie misses Nettie and she is going through so much with her husband that it is emotional at some parts. When I was reading the book I always knew the place that the setting was taking place because Walker did describe the setting very good that made you feel like you were there. The author’s voice in the novel was sad most of the time because she was always being separated from the people that she loved. The style of this book is unique from any other book that I have read because I had never read a book that always started with Dear God and I could feel the emotions of the author.
All the characters in the story were created so cleverly that you could believe in them as people. The main character in the story was Celie and you could feel that emotions that she was feeling because she was so sad that she was separated from her sister the only person that she had loved. I like Celie as a person but it frustrated me that she didn’t stand up fro herself and just let things happen. The first time that she stood up for herself was when she was moving to Tennessee and stood up to Mr.________ about Nettie’s letters. She called him a “lowdown dog” because Mr._______ had been hiding her sister’s letters from her (pg. 199). Mr. _______ another character in the story but he is in love with Shrug that he hits Celie because she isn’t Shrug (pg. 270). So he takes out the pain from Shrug not loving him by hitting Celie. Shrug is a singer that was once a partner of Mr. ________ but she leaves to follow her singing career. Celie ends up falling in love with Shrug and Shrug with
J. Cerros
Period 4
The Color Purple
Continued...
Celie. Shrug ends up coming back to live with Mr.______ because she is sick and cant sing anymore but then ends up moving out when she feels better and finding other lovers on the way. Another character is Nettie, Celie’s sister; she is a smart woman that becomes a missionary to help other kids in Africa (pg 126).
The story takes place in the south and the women during this time were treated, as they were less. The place that they lived was like isolated because during that time the houses were miles away form each other and it was a small town. This is not like how we live now because now the houses are so much closer and you don’t own a lot of land like before. Some similarities are that we still like in a small city and are friendly to our neighbors. Throughout the book I could image the setting of the story if I closed my eyes because it was described so excellent. Just image a big piece of land with two houses and a lake on the side. I imagine the house in good condition but with some ware and tear. Also the grass is green and at the end of the land think of all the trees that Celie used to cut down.
The book starts of by Celie being raped by her dad and her having to kids and having to give them away. Then she is forced to marry a man she doesn’t love that abuses her by hitting her and making her feel bad. Her sister ends up moving away but she doesn’t know where till the end of the story. Celie then falls in live with Shrug and moves with her to Tennessee years later and leaves her husband. Harpo marries Sophia with a strong personality and have five kids. Then at the end of the story everyone will be amazed on what happens.
This doesn’t relate to my life because I haven’t been separated from the people that I love. People that can relate to the story are the ones that lived during the time, the women that were abused, and the ones that are separated from their loved ones.
I would recommend this book to everyone. This is a book that everyone should read because it is such a good story. This book will keep everybody that read the first page captivated and want to finish the book because it will enthralled till the end of the book.
JMarin
Period 2
1st part...
Victor Villasenor’s Rain of Gold astonished me with its adventurous and mirthful events. A story full of memoirs, heroism, and myth cultivated by two families that collapse but simultaneously discover life secrets and the significance of human nature. Like numerous of Villasenor’s books of life-twisting and spiritual experiences, Rain of Gold contains the clandestine of two families and their desire to escape a revolution that has torn apart their family generations. Both families find themselves in a desperate situation with nothing left of their once united family and have to make the decision of either staying in Mexico during its Revolutionary War or go on a journey to the United States to find better lives. The book is fiction but it is based on true events and it’s a history of the author’s background.
Rain of Gold is full of surprises; it amazed me to see that a book could hold that many themes and life lessons. The Mexican culture is full of ancient myths and stories about our past and self-conscience. Our older peers teach us how to live life and guide us even through the roughest times. Rain of Gold has it all: mystery, passion, beauty, hatred, lust, birth, blood, death, miracles. All the elements for a blockbuster of a novel. Plus, something extra: truth. It has sex, romance, violence, bootlegging, the American dream and strong family devotion.
I really like how Villasenor writes Rain of Gold. It is written in a smooth and easy style that kept the plot moving quickly and the pages turning. It’s captivating and dwelling in its nature and incredibly humorous. It is especially unique in the sense that not many authors write with the love and passion for their ancestry. Villasenor revives memories and ancient times; he prospers the ideas and traditions of his people in a very symbolic and humble manor.
The main characters in the story are Juan Salvador Villasenor and Guadalupe Gomez. They both are very young and live in different states in Mexico during the Mexican Revolution from 1910. Both Juan and Lupe are the youngest in their families.
Juan’s mother (Dona Margarita) is a Yaqui Indian and his father is a tall and handsome French-Mexican with red hair. After the revolution broke out Juan’s father abandoned Juan and his mother because he lost all hope and died in the mountains. Dona Margarita, Juan and his older sister Luisa are left alone in their humble home in the mountains. They decide to cross the border and move to the U.S. They live in California with Luisa’s husband. Years later Juan goes to jail for a crime he did not commit. After years of being in jail and being lost Juan moves up to Montana and learns the significance of gambling and drinking with a group of owners of a bar. Lupe lived her early childhood back in La Lluvia de Oro in the state of Chihuahua with her mother Dona Guadalupe, her brother Victoriano, her sisters Carlota, Maria, and Sophia. Don Victor Gomez (Lupe’s father) comes back from a trip to try to find a job. When he left Lupe was a baby and so it takes time for her to get used to her father again. In their shack up in the mountains American soldiers camp and protect the area. These mountains contain gold and after the Americans take all the gold they simply leave back to their country. Lupe’s parents decide to also travel up north to the U.S in search of better lives. They work in the fields and go from town to town looking for work. I relate to the characters because I am Mexican too and
The characters remind me of some of my family members.
JMarin
Period 2
2nd part
The setting takes place in very distinctive places. Most of the story takes place in Southern California where both families live in the twenties and where Lupe and Juan meet. At the beginning of the story the setting is in Mexico. Villasenor does a glanderous job by describing the containing persons and places by specific details that it makes you feel like you are right there. As I read the book I could actually picture the places the book took me to. Many of the events that happen during the story I can relate to because I also came to this country at a small age and I also faced discrimination. Several cities and towns mentioned in the story are still present like Carlsbad and Santa Ana.
Rain of Gold is fundamentally about love and women’s strength and virtues. Juan Salvador is a bootlegger and a gambler, the enemies of Lupe’s family. “These two things have torn apart more families than war itself” says Dona Guadalupe to Lupe one day. As Salvador is in jail he meets an Italian convict who was put in jail for bootlegging ands they become really good friends. The Italian teaches Salvador the basics for making the perfect whiskey. Out in the streets Salvador starts manufacturing whiskey and makes a lot of money from it. Lupe and Salvador meet in the Santa Ana and begin to love each other. They meet each other’s families and become engaged. Salvador lies to Lupe and tells her and her family that he moves fertilizer for living. He doesn’t want to lie to her but he also loves her very much and doesn’t want to lose her. Lupe wants to believe him and trusts him but many people spread rumors about this bootlegger and Carlota dislikes also accuses Salvador to be a bootlegger. Will Lupe and Salvador married and live happily ever after or will Lupe find out about Salvador’s secrets and leave him?
This book reminds me of another book I read earlier in my life also written by Victor Villasenor and it’s called Burro Genius. In Burro Genius, Villasenor elucidates his childhood and how he became a writer. Both stories are impressively inspiring and motivational and have touched me. I spent my early childhood in Mexico as well and many of the events in the story I can relate to. Like Lupe and Salvador came to this country in seek for better lifestyles, I also came with my mother and brother to find better lives. I was truly inspired by the story and it inundated my mind with deep memories of my early childhood. There is a second part to this amazing book and I’m already half way done with it.
Overall, Rain of Gold is a grand and vivid history. The characters are eagerly drawn. Often I felt like a family member watching from a corner stool. I would definitely recommend this book to anyone out there that is moved by stunning history and timeless romance. I give Rain of Gold a five out five stars. Unquestionably, the best book that I have ever read. I learned so much from reading this book. It’s exhilarating and thrilling throughout the whole story. I couldn’t maintain from reading the wonderfulness and greatness story of two families and two countries.
A. Wright
Per.5
City Of Bones
Cassandra Clare
Cassandra Clare’s City Of Bones was an out of this realm escapade!
The book’s theme would definitely be adventure. A young, somewhat normal girl, finds herself thrown into a fairytale world. She learns who she is, what her past was, and it all takes her on the trip and jump start of her life. The way Clare wrote this story blows my mind. I was addicted on the first page. She throws in so many different elements and makes it all work really well with each other. She has demons from hell, witches, warlocks, vampires, werewolves, clubs, techno, teenage love, family feuds, lies, and the biggest mind twist that leaves your jaw dropped! The writing is simple yet holds so much creativity and imagination. I liked how it was written a lot.
The characters were very attractive. I don’t mean in looks, even though they were all described as being very good looking. Each main character had something that made them very interesting. Clary, the simple, boring, uninteresting girl who relates to almost every existing teenager these days. She finds her adventure without even trying to look for it. She is brave, risking her life more than a handful of times. I enjoyed her most of all. Than there’s Jace, A Shadow Hunter who slays demons for a living, has no real feelings for others, but of course comes to care deeply for our girl Clary. His sense of humor makes him a real ass, and the way he fights is intense! Isabelle & Alec, Jace’s cousins who are also Shadow Hunters were fun to have around. Isabelle, the flirt, and Alec the guardian (who turned out to be homosexual- one of those twists of today added to an old life style). Simon, Clary’s best friend, who is the sweet geek who comes to the crews rescue multiple times. And of course there’s the big range of demons trying to kill all these kick ass characters!
Well for the most part, the setting is in today’s New York. With the big buildings, sparkly lights, dangerous streets. Only, there’s a lot more going on than meets the mortal eye. Fairy’s play in the parks, vampires club it up with the warlocks, traveling by their demon powered motorcycles. The way Clare writes, everything seems so realistic. Things you would really see are there but have that entwined mysticalness that makes it the unreal. When you read this, you find all the things you let your mind wonder about, is set right in front of your eyes.
The plot is astounding. Like I said, there’s so much going on that your eyes will be glued to this book’s pages. Clary, is thrown into a world she once was apart of, but with her now-disappeared-mother’s and a very powerful warlock help, her mind was erased of her Sight. Now that she is able to See again, her whole world has changed. She is attacked by demons, vampires try and kill her best friend Simon. She knows spells, or Runes, that she doesn’t even remember what they are. She start’s falling for Jace, who has lived his life thinking feelings were nothing but a weakness. And the end! I won’t give the surprise up but it shocked the heck out of me so… Hope you love it!
There’s a few books that come to mind after reading this. Like Twilight by Stephanie Meyer, and also A great And Terrible Beauty by Libba Bray. All these books have that mystical adventure thrown into a realistic world. Personally this would be a book I could read multiple times and still; get a rush of excitement. Do I recommend a City Of Bones? Yes! I think especially if you liked Twilight, you will very much enjoy this book! It holds so much more adventure, and the limits on the characters are limitless.
A.Karel Period:5
Impulse By: Ellen Hopkins
Ellen Hopkins Impulse mesmerized me with her interesting story. The book is about three teenagers in a psychiatric hospital for three different reasons. With challenges they each have to over come they become closer with each other. Two of them get to make it out but with one of them something goes wrong.
The theme of the author’s book is suicide. The life lesson would be not to end your life. The way the author writes her books are in a poetic way I thought the writing style of the book was good because the way the paragraphs were written were shorter. They way it is written is not funny it’s a serious book. It is set up in Aspen Springs a psychiatric hospital.
There are three main characters in the book. The writer makes it seem as they could be real people. I didn’t have a character in the book I really liked. What made it interesting was what I read about the characters and there lives and what they have to go threw.
The setting is in a psychiatric hospital. It does relate to the real world because there are psychiatric hospitals and many kids with issues like the characters in the book do. When I read the book it’s like a movie’s playing in my head I can picture what’s going on as I am reading. The way the author writes makes it seem as I am also with the characters in the book.
The plot is about three lives with different paths to the same location Aspen Springs a psychiatric hospital for people who have tried to commit suicide. Three teenagers Vanessa smart and beautiful, Tony suffered a painful childhood and Connor who seemed to have to perfect life. All three tried to end there lives and failed. Now with a second chance maybe with each others help they can find a way to a better life.
I would compare the book a little bit to Go ask Alice because they are both drug related and both about the obstacles they go threw. The book does relate to now and pat events many teens go threw drug abuse and addiction. This book not not relate to me in any way.
This book is one of my favorites I would recommend it if you like reading about teen issues and abuse it’s a very intense and interesting book.
EMiguel
Period 3
Letting Go Of Lisa
What do you do when you can’t be with the person you love, forever? In the book “Letting go of Lisa” by Lurlene McDaniel a young man named Nathan Malone finally got to be in high school for his senior year after being home schooled for his entire life. This book really impacted me because it shows to never judge a person just by appearances because you never know what they are going through that makes them that way.
In this book a young girl named Lisa Lindstrom is known as one of the toughest and meanest girls on campus. Nathan was the only guy that managed to break through to her because no matter how she acted towards him and how she looked he was still there insisting on wanting to be with her. Never did he think there was something wrong with her, something that would soon separate them and cause of the way she acted and looked. The major life lesson that this book illustrates is to never judge a person on just looks before getting to know them.
Lurlene McDaniel’s style of writing is quite unique from other books I’ve read. What I like about her style is that she makes things so easy to understand without using big words. It helped me understand and create mental images of the characters and their setting. While reading this book her tone of voice is understanding and acceptance of the situation. Overall I really like how she put her words together to help the reader understand.
Lurlene really brought the characters to life because she put them through what a regular high school student would go through on daily basis. For example with Lisa she would go to school she would do her homework. She would go out to party and she had a motorcycle. Nathan would also go to school from a wealthy family by the personalities given to them they were also given a vehicle to match for example for Lisa’s hard core personality she drove a motorcycle and he just drove a car.
The setting compass to everyday like because of the fact that they go to high school but not of the fact that she never really goes and most of their time together is spent outside of school. Yes, she makes me feel a part of it because going to high school you never really get to know everyone there and it maybe happening to one of those students.
After being home schooled for his entire life Nathan, finally enrolled in school his senior year. On the first day of school he almost got ran over by a girl on a motorcycle then when he got to creative writing class, he realized she sat in front of him. Just when Nathan realizes they had a lot in common Lisa began missing class. Wanting to figure out what was going on he followed her which lead him to the hospital, there she revealed her secret to him. Not knowing if it would have brought them closer or drift apart.
Yes I can compare this book to another book because it has the same plot with an illness ripping people apart one of Lurlene’s other books. A Rose for Melinda also shows this happening. I can’t really relate my own life to this book, other than the fact that I go to high school just like Nathan and Lisa did.
Overall, I like this book because it gives a view of what can happen to anyone no matter how one looks or acts. I would recommend this book to mostly girls and some of the sensitive guys out there. It will really impact your life and teach you not to take life for granted because it can end at any time
C. Tolentino
02/01/10
Period 4
The Metmorphosis
Franz Kafka
For the most part when people have a nightmare it fades away into reality by sunrise. In The Metamorphosis by Franz Kafka this is not the case. Gregor Samsa an ordinary man awakens as a “monstrous vermin” in the course of the novel Gregor as well as his family learn the true meaning of “family” and all its implications. For “It was the commandment of family duty to swallow their disgust and endure him, endure him and nothing more” (29). Kafka’s The Metamorphosis compels its readers to question the meaning behind their usual conception of what is important to them. The text is extremely short although it is not short in its inquisitiveness. The novel, even after reading is as an annoying pop song; it is insistent in encouraging its reader to once again reopening the book as well as altering the perspective in which it was first derived.
The novel begins with the main character (Gregor) discovering that overnight he was transformed into a parasite; he “woke up one morning from unsettling dreams…changed into a monstrous vermin” (3). While this conversion cannot be disregarded Gregor refuses to acknowledge that in his new physical state his family obligations are absolved. Even when he sees himself being transformed in every sense he encourages himself to keep on with his daily obligations;” Just don’t stray in bed being useless” (5).As the novel progresses we are introduce to the immediate family of our primary character; Mr. and Mrs. Samsa whose names are never stated, as well as Grete, Gregor’s younger sister.
In the beginning pages of the novel it is apparent that Gregor’s focus is in providing his parent’s and sister a good life in which he is most proud of ; “He felt very proud that he had been able to provide such a life…for his parents and sister” (16). And although he is proud of his undertakings when providing a comfortable living for his loved ones he also sacrifices many dreams in order to do such. “If I didn’t hold back for my parents’ sake, I would have quit long ago” (4); Gregor assumes the responsibility as the caretaker of the family. He hopes to in exchange for his work and sacrifices that he will be filled with loving care by his family. However, when an out of the ordinary disaster occurs he learns that his family only stood by him in his illustrious days and once he could no longer provide for them he become nothing more than a burden.
C. Tolentino
2nd Part
Period 4
He remains optimistic that all of his work will be worth it in the end and he can realize his dreams. “I haven’t given up hope completely…that will probably take another five or six years—I’m going to do it without fail” (4).Even when he is faced when a new challenge he remains unacceptant of abything out of his life plan, “How about going to sleep for a few minutes and forgetting all this nonsense”. Because of his outlook in his life Gregor is seen as an idealistic person. He believes that after his long work he can live out his artistic dreams, “Then I’m going to make the big break” (4).
Instead of being a charitable martyr the only thing he gains is a slow growing resentment toward his family; “I’ve got the torture…constantly seeing new faces, no relation ships that last or get more intimate” (4).Once the realization of the events sinks in he can no longer deny that not all lives are as fairytales and end with a happy ending; “But what now if all the peace…we to come to a horrible end” (16). His collecting anger towards building obstacles to his dreams is expressed once he no longer denies his brutal transformation; “To the devil with it all!” (4)
Mr. and Mrs. Samsa play passive roles in the novel. Mr. Samsa gave up all financial responsibilities to Gregor when his son began working. After the fail of his business Mr. Samsa rested after years of hard work, “an old man who… could not be expected to undertake too much” (21) Latter in the novel we know that Mr. Samsa had saves up the remains of his failed business. This money is used to sustain the Samsa family after Gregor inability to work. After the money is gone the Samsa family had no other alternatives than to each get jobs and rent out the rooms in their spacious apartment. Once Gregor gives up his role in the family his father reclaims it. In order to provide control in the household Mr. Samsa becomes the dominant member in the family, “With a hostile expression his father clenched his fist, as if to drive Gregor into his room” (12). Mrs. Samsa had always been the most fragile of the characters in the novel; “old mother …gasping for breath” (21).Especially due to the asthma suspend her from doing any physical work. Yet even though she is the most vulnerable character her maternal instincts call to an energy which even she did not know. In one occasion she lashes out on her daughter for not allowing her to see her son, “Let me go to Gregor, he is my unfortunate boy! Don’t you understand that I have to go to him?” (23). Another occasion is in which she begs her husband to spare the life of her son, “her hands clasping his father’s neck, begged for Gregor’s life” (29).
C. Tolentino
3rd Part
The Metamorphosis
Period 4
However, the most drastic mental transformation of the character is of Grete, Gregor’s sister. In the beginning of the novel she is a sheltered girl whose pure enjoyment is in playing her violin, “who for all her seventeen years was still a child” (21). But when a change in her life which “could never…be any question of a complete adjustment”(19) is thrust without warning she must grow up immediately. She takes a job and sacrifices her personal life to take care of Gregor. She too grows resentful of the parasite that her brother had become and argued that she “can’t put up with this torture at home” (38) and advised her parents to “to try to get rid of it…I don’t think anyone would blame us”(37).
After becoming nothing more than a grotesque burden to the family Gregor occupied the room where all unnecessary things were stored. His own family admitted that until the creature which took over their son and brother disappeared nothing would change to what it was before the unfading nightmare. When Gregor died he was treated as garbage that the whole family was glad to be rid of. Even the family maid consoled the family by saying “You don’t have to worry about getting rid of the stuff next door. It’s already been taken care of.” (42).Gregor realized at the end that he had become a plague to his loved ones and “Then without his consent, his head sank to the floor, and from his nostrils streamed his last weak breath” (39).
The story ends with the quote, “And it was like the conformation of their new dreams and good intentions when at the end of the ride their daughter got up first and stretched her young body” (42).After the death of their son Mr. and Mrs. Samsa realized that all the opportunities in insuring a quality life for their family rested in the shoulders of their young daughter. The nightmare which occurred to Gregor was the collecting of the unhappiness and resentment of one individual sacrificing everything for another and hating who they had become because of that. And by the continuing ambition of Gregor’s parents the story could very well be repeated; with the exception of it being in literal means. The Metamorphosis is a captivating novel which urges its readers to reflect their role and whether or not they know what will come of their decisions to continue on in the course of their actions. This is a book I would recommend because it is a book which you will be willing to read over and over again.
C. Flores
Per. 5
P.1What if you could enter someones dreams? See all of there desires, there fears, and loves. What if? In the Novel Wake by Lisa McMann a seventeen year old girl named Janie Hannagan has the capability to enter other people’s dreams. She ends up encountering the dream of a young man that she falls for, his dream is sick a twisted. She keeps encountering his dream trying to figure out the puzzle. No one knows of what Janie does, no one would believe her. If she were to tell anyone they would think she’s a freak. In the novel Janie befriends an elderly lady at the nursing home she works at. Her name is Miss Stubin. Janie soon realizes that this lady has the same power that Janie does. The lady ends up helping Janie overcome her true-power.
The book to me was very good. It has been one of the best books I have ever read. I strongly recommend this book, mostly to female teens. The book really jumps out at you. It makes you want to read more and more. I enjoyed every minute of it. You want to be the character, to feel what she fells. You want to know what her life feels like. The main character Janie is a very likable character. She is bright and kind. She cares for others before she cares for herself. Her character is very well written. I did not want the book to end. I would be willing to read this novel again.
Ever since Janie was eight years old she has been entering people’s dreams. Janie would repeatedly enter her mother’s dreams of falling flat and even dying. Janie’s mother is an alcoholic. She doesn’t clean much and does not take care of Janie. That’s why Janie is so responsible throughout the book. She practically raised herself. Her mother leaves her messes, Janie cleans them. Her mother doesn’t really work, so Janie has to work her self to buy her own things. Janie lives in a bad neighborhood. When she was younger people saw her as white trash. She was never one of the popular kids. She had one best friend, and her name was Carrie Brandt. Carrie was very beautiful. Janie admired that. Janie says to herself “maybe, since this new girl lives next to me on the wrong side of town, they’ll call her white trash too. But she’s really pretty”. In high school Carrie is a popular girl. Janie does not reach her standards, and she is ok with that.
One evening when Janie was thirteen years old she slept over at Carries house. Carrie had a new friend named Melinda who was sleeping over with them also. Melinda was one of the popular kids. She was from a wealthy family. She pretty much saw Janie as trash. But she didn’t seem to think badly of Carrie. As they fell asleep Janie immediately fell into the dream Carrie was having. Carrie was in a forest, she starts to walk and then all of a sudden a rush of water appears. Janie can hear Carrie screaming “Carson get out of there, Carson”. Carrie screams “Help him, save him”. When Janie wakes from Carries dream she becomes concerned to why Carrie would be having this dream. She ends up realizing that Carrie has this dream often. She later finds out that Carson was Carries younger brother. He had drowned in a lake when she was about ten. She does not like to talk about the incident.
P.2In the novel there is a boy named Cabel Strumheller. He starts out to be an awkward boy. “His blue-black hair hangs in greasy ringlets in front of his eyes, and he walks with shoulders curved, as if he were more comfortable being short.” He’s tall and his pants are too short. He smokes cigarettes and does not have a lot of money. But when he comes back his senior year everything changes. He is completely different. He is handsome and all the girls want him. He starts talking to Janie and they soon fall for each other. One night Janie is driving home from work. She drives down a street and while she is driving falls into someone’s dream. Everything goes blank. The dream is dark, there is a shed in the distance. She is in a backyard. She starts to search and then a man who is burnt with knife hands jumps at her. She is terrified. The dream ends and she awakes and as she does her car gently crashes into someone’s yard. She is ok and her car is not damaged so she drives off confused about the dream. She later sees that the dream is Cabels. He was having those horrible dreams because his father was very abusive. One day he burnt Cabels body. Cabel was the character with the burnt skin and knife hands. His dreams were of him killing his deranged father.
In the middle of the book Janie and Cabels relationship grows stronger. Janie finds out from Carrie that Cabel has been getting into drugs and even selling them to the local rich kids. Janie becomes heartbroken. She even hears that Cabel has been talking to Melinda, Janie’s enemy. They grow apart from each other. Janie wants nothing to do with him. He tries to talk to her but she just won’t allow him to come near her. He shows up at her house and she ignores him. Cabel starts to feel hopeless. Janie goes on with her life, angry at Cabel, angry at him for hurting her. Time passes by and they did not talk to each other. In the morning when Janie would walk past cable she would simply drive past him and ignore is presence. During class Janie could feel Cabel looking at her. She wouldn’t dare to look back. Janie wants to deny her feelings for Cabel but the reality is that the feelings for him are there. She understands that her feelings a permanent.
P.3Towards the end of the book Janie decides to confront Cabel about there situation. They end up at his house. They can’t keep their hands off each other. Things get intimate and she wants to take off his shirt. He won’t allow her to. She finally convinces him to do so. His chest was full of burn marks. She immediately knew it was from his father. They start to discuss about him doing drugs. He hesitates to answer. He explains to Janie how he’s not really selling drugs but that he is working for the police. His duty is to catch Melinda’s father. Her father has been dealing cocaine to students at parties. Cabels job is to hangout with the popular crowd that goes to Melinda’s parties, and catch her father in the act. He wants to prove to Janie that he is not lying so he takes her to the station. They walk into the office of a “ bronze-haired woman.” Her name is Fran Komisky. She likes to go by Captain. Fran is the leader of the force. She is in charge of the investigation on Melinda’s father. She’s sits Janie down and explains everything to her.
Cabel ends up busting Melinda’s father at one of her parties. Janie’s best friend Carrie calls up Janie late at night asking her to bail her out of jail. Carrie was at the party when the cops came. Janie went straight to the police station. She saw Cabel and smiled quickly, keeping his identity a secret. Captain tells Cabel to go get Janie. He brings her into the back where her office is. She asks Janie about her capability to enter people’s dreams. Janie explains. Captain Likes what she hears. Janie was able to get into Melinda’s fathers dream. She helped find out where Melinda’s father was keeping his stash of cocaine. Her dream consisted of a boat. They found out that he was keeping it on his yacht. Because Janie is able to enters peoples dreams they were able to trial him. Captain asked Janie to join the force. She felt they could use Janie’s talents. Janie agreed.
The book Wake was amazing. The ending was great. I love happy endings and that is what Lisa McMann gave you. The novel had so much detail. I literally wanted to jump into the book and be the characters. Janie was a strong character. She could influence many people. Cabels character was charming. He was an honest person and accepted Janie for what she was. He was in love with her. They were in love with each other. I loved everything about this book. Thinking about it makes me want to read it once again. Lisa McMann did a great job with this book. I think every one who reads it will greatly enjoy it.
G. Velez
Period 3
Catching Fire
By Suzanne Collins
Catching Fire by Suzanne Collins is the sequel to the book hunger games. Catching Fire is every bit as brilliant as its predecessor. The book picks up where the first left of, with Katniss and Peeta living comfortably with their families. They live like this because, having won the Hunger games, they are entitled to living the life of luxury. Along with the live of luxury the families of the winners are guaranteed safety. But even in this tyrannical world the life of security is never secure. After Katniss undermined the rules of the Games by threatening to kill herself by eating the berries at the end of book one, Panem has been shaken to its very foundation.
This move has caused a complete stir throughout the 12 districts, which could shape up to a full scale rebellion. Katniss finds herself fighting for her survival again even though she is not in the games. President Snow threatens to ill her family if she does not quell the districts during the traditional Victory Tour. Katniss is forced to convince all of Panem that her last act in the arena was not an act of rebellion but an act of pure love for Peeta or everyone she loves will die. After witnessing all the horrors in the Arena, the Capitol, and the mines, Katniss must decide whether to protect her loved ones or take part in the fight for freedom.
Suzanne Collins’ objective for catching fire is to get her messages and themes through to her readers in the form of Katniss and life. Some of the themes in this book are interdependence, government control, and rebellion. Rebellion is the main theme throughout the book and the series. Suzanne Collins’ target audience for the book Catching Fire is anyone from ages 11 and up.
Through Katniss, Peeta, and some new characters, Suzanne Collins shows that you must protect those you love no matter what it takes to do so. Peeta embodies Collins’ belief that in order for an oppressed community to prosper they must depend on one another to break the hold of the oppressor and also to survive and stay alive. In the book Catching Fire, after Katniss and Peeta are chosen to enter the Quarter Quell, a game like the Hunger Games but fiercer that only happens every 25 years. After they learn this they make a promise to help each other survive throughout the entire book various examples of interdependence appear.
eputer
G. Velez
Period 3
Catching Fire
By Suzanne Collins
Collins uses the characters as well as the districts to show her belief in interdependence. Throughout the book the characters show there dependence on one another to survive in various ways. One way is when Peeta drowns at the begging of the Quarter Quell and Katniss is unable to help him. Finnich, a victor in the 64th Hunger Games resuscitates Peeta. After Finich helps Peeta Peeta and Katniss return the favor by helping him when Finich gets paralyzed by some sort of gas. Peeta and Katniss help him get to a lake and bath him to help him get the effects of the gas off. This shows that even during a game of life and death the people are still able to depend on one another to survive.
Suzanne Collins clearly gets her themes across to her readers and makes them draw parallels between their own society and lives and those of the characters in the book. Collins successfully achieved her goal in writing Catching Fire, she showed a society being oppressed but finding a way to come together despite the threat of death. Collins clearly uses The Capitol to portray a tyrannical dictatorship that uses many tactics to keep their people shackled. Also she uses a wide array of characters to portray rebellion and interdependence. Furthermore Collins successfully explores the theme of protecting those you love, no matter what it takes to do so.
Catching Fire is a very addicting book. Even though it starts off slow with Katniss living in bliss, after the problems begin you will be unable to put the book down. The way Collins entwines her own personal beliefs and values along with an amazing story line is absolutely brilliant. This is an absolutely entertaining book that every reader will enjoy whether or not you agree with her beliefs and views.
I rate this novel four and a half stars out of five.
C.Amanda Per3 Glass By Ellen Hopkins
Ellen Hopkins Glass is a very powerful story that kept me on the edge of my seat wanting to read more. The book Glass is the sequel to Crank another compelling story told by Ellen Hopkins. In the end of the book Crank, Kristina is now sober and moving back in with her mother and with her child from the boy who raped her. Kristina has been sober for months now but she still is getting cravings for crystal meth. “I should resist. Turn away. Walk away. Run away, Far away, so far the monster will never find me” as Kristina tries to fight the cravings. It does not last for long and she soon falls into the grip of the monster again.
The theme of my book would be drug abuse and what it can do to your life and the people who love you. Kristina is taken on a wild journey for the second time stealing from people, selling drugs to live, and smoking more crystal meth than before. This book is very emotional and even though it is not a true story, it is based on real events and real things that happen to people who fall into the hands of the monster. Addiction is a very scary thing, yet it is very real and millions of people are dealing with addiction every day. The life lesson of this book would be to teach the reader about addiction and what it can do to your life. It does not matter what kind of addiction it might be, it will ruin your life and hurt the ones who love you. Not very many books teach a life lesson but I feel that this book truly did. This book shows you the consequences of becoming addicted to a drug. It shows how you can lose everything you love over the drug you choose.
The author’s style in this book is very unique. There is a poem in every page within the story. I do not dislike anything about this author’s style. I think that it really grabs your attention. I can say that I do like a lot about this author’s style. I think that it is not like a lot of other author’s styles so that’s makes it more enjoyable. The style of this book really makes you feel like you are there with the characters experiencing what they do. The writing style of this book is serious because the author is telling a very sad story about the struggles of addiction. The author’s voice I would image it would be very soft and settling. This story is very hard to tell and you can notice that it is a soft and serious voice when reading. I think that the style from this book is very unusual but in a good way. I like the fact that it is different from any other book I have read and I can only compare it to the other books she has written.
The characters in this book are all very unique in their own way. The most talked about character would be Kristina. The book is all about her and the addiction she is trying to overcome. Trey who is Kristina’s new boyfriend is also addicted to crystal meth and he sells it. The book is mostly about them two and also Kristina’s baby Hunter’ who father raped Kristina. The writer in this book makes you want to cheer on Kristin, even through her rough times you always want her to get through it. Trey is not so likeable. Kristina makes him sound very handsome and so romantic but he is a player and cheats on her with his brother’s wife. This book makes you really like Kristina and you can tell she is a good person and she just needs to overcome her addiction. At the end of the story Kristina says, “I realize that’s an awful lot of hoping. But hey I’ve always been an optimist…” (P.680). Kristina say this at the end of the book after she and her boyfriend were sent to jail and later knowing she was pregnant with his baby. It really shows how much hope she has in her still after all that has happen to her.
C.Amanda Per.3 Glass By. Ellen Hopkins
PART 2
The setting of this book is set in Reno, Nevada and the author really explains the surroundings in the city very well. When I compare Kristina’s world to mine, they do not really match up. Kristina’s world is very boring and not exciting, she only cares about getting high. In my world I try to explore and see what is new and I do not need drugs to do that. The author definitely can make you feel like you are there with the characters. When I close my eyes, I can almost picture where they might be and what they are exactly doing. The author will let you know when it is cold and when it is hot outside and how the characters are reacting. This book really provides a picture for the reader.
The plot of this book is about Kristina’s who is seventeen turning eighteen, and her life after getting off meth and trying to raise her child. She then tries to get a job and obtain her GED to start a life of her own with her child Hunter. Kristina’s sobriety does not last long and she soon starts to neglect her child and choose drugs over him. Kristina also ends up getting kicked out of her mother’s house without her child to live in her boyfriend’s car. Kristina soon finds herself living with no money, only having her boyfriend and their addiction to crystal meth. When Kristina is at her lowest part in the book, she ends up stealing money from her mother to pay back the drug dealer they owe money to. She lets the drug crystal meth control her life and she will go through any measures to get her next fix. Kristina goes through being sober to relapsing and becoming the person she always feared.
When comparing this book to another, I would have to say I can only compare it to the first book because it is the same story. If I had to compare it to a whole another book with different author, I could not. This book is very unique and it is not like any book I have ever read which makes me like it even more. This book very much relates to current events and issues. Today you always see people struggling with drug and alcohol addictions. This problem with drug and alcohol addiction is always all over the television with shows that are trying to help these people. This book does connect with me on a personal level because the author really pulls you into the story and makes you feel for her characters. I do not relate to any of the characters on a personal level but I do definitely feel there pain and struggles.
When recommending this book for others to read, they should first consider if they want to read about such a harsh subject. I do not recommend this book for younger kids under thirteen. This book was a very touching story and it really connects with you. I would recommend this book for other people to read because it is such a touching story about the struggles of addiction. I personally really enjoyed reading this book and I think that anyone who does read this book will enjoy it as much as I did. I have not read many books like this one. It is a very harsh subject to write a book about but Ellen Hopkins writes it very well. I think that this book is very different and unique and if you like reading something new, then you will definitely love reading this book. I really enjoyed reading Glass and I will definitely read more books by Ellen Hopkins.
M. Ocampo
Period 5
The Book Of Dead Days
By: Marcus Sedgwick
Marcus Sedgwick was born 1968 in Kent England. Marcus is not only an author but a musician and an illustrator as well. He has had quite a few major novels such as Floodland published in 2000. The Dark Horse and Witch Hill both published in 2001. I am looking forward to reading his most recent book Revolver which was published in 2009. The Book I'm doing my review on is The Book of Dead Days which was published the 17th of July, 2003. It is a fictional book but a good one in my opinion. It takes place in a somewhat dangerous European like city at a distant time perhaps the 17th century. According to the story the days between Christmas and New Year's Eve are known as dead days. Sedgwick writes in a cinematic like style. You can picture the surroundings in your mind as you read. Death is everywhere but love is found even in the darkest character's heart.
The story begins with Valerian preforming a magic trick in the theater known as the 'Grand Theater'. Valerian is a rude and ungrateful magician or sorcerer of some sort. Something is always bothering him and he is desperate to find a man and a book which holds the answer the prevent his death. Valerian has a servant only known as "boy" nothing is know about his past. Not even his real name. Boy assist Valerian with his
performances since he is rather good at fitting into small places. Valerian sends boy off on an errand late one night to look for a man known as Green. The man is killed by a mysterious phantom. Boy manages to retrieve what he was sent for. I was a music box with a message hidden in the notes. More ahead in the story we find out that Valerian made a deal for his life in order to impress the woman he was in love with. He wished for wealth, but she still declined. Valerian must now find the book that holds the answer to his salvation. The Book tells him that he must sacrifice another in place and he wants to sacrifice boy. Boy is saved by Kepler. Kepler lies to Valerian telling him that boy is Valerian's son. Valerian willingly goes to his death.
The Book is well written. Sedgwick puts much thought and detail into the surroundings and he also does well to keep you up to pace with what is going on in the story. I enjoyed this book a lot. It shows that the person you treat foully could be the one that loves you the most. Boy didn't have anyone else but Valerian and the same goes for Valerian. All they had was each other. I recommend this book to anyone with a taste for magic and mystery. 4 out of 5.
Y.Medina
P-3
Part 1
Time to let go
by: Lurlene McDaniel
Lurlene McDaniels Time to let go was an inspirational novel that has the capacity to change ones outlook towards coping with the loss of someone they loved. Erin, the main character lives with her parents. Things for her and her family haven't been that great since the death of her younger sister Amy. Amy died in a car crash. Erin felt she was responsible for her death because she sent her out in the errand while it was raining outside and she didn't have her license. After Amys death Erin begins to get these headaches. She sees many doctors, specialists and goes through many tests but they cant seem to find the cause of her headaches. Her parents see that these headaches are getting in the way of Erins life so they force her to see a therapist every week. Erin doesnt like the idea but she does it so that her parents dont argue more about the whole situation. With the help of her Therapist Erin is able to figure out the cause of her headaches.
Lurlene McDaniel is not only sending out a message with this novel but also teaching us a lesson. One lesson that she teaches us is that though the death of someone close to us is hard and no matter how miserable it makes one feel we shouldnt try to run from reality. If we see that we need help we should get it. For example, in the novel Erin is trying to deal with the loss of her sister and problems at home and school. She also encounters a series of headaches that she doesnt know why she gets them. She knows she needs help but refuses to get the help she needs. Her parents eventually make her see a therapist which in the end is good because with the help of the therapist Erin is able to figure out the reason why she gets these headaches. The message that Lurlene sends out is that though life stops for someone it doesnt mean it has to stop for another. If one looses a loved one they must continue with their life. Its not easy but one should always remember that eventually they will reunite.
I think that Lurlenes style of writing is magnificent. She describes events with full details and she allows you to see events as if they were real. She also has the ability to make you think about similar sitautions that teens are going through in this world today. People who have lost a love one most likely feel the same thing Erin is feeling. Lurlene also does a good job in talking about Erins thoughts and how things are coming down on her shoulders.
A Vasquez
Period 05
Part 1.
Everyone has to die at one point and some of us are lucky enough to find out soul mates before that happens. And if we do we are lucky then because that love will last forever. “They say that nothing lasts forever, but I am a firm believer in the fact that for some, love lives on even after we’re gone.” Cecilia Ahern’s P.S I Love You fascinated me with a different love story she wrote.
Each book we read has a different theme whether we relate to it or no that’s our decision. As in love, I think we can all relate because whether we like it or not we will fall in love. While reading P.S I Love You I encountered that some people’s love lasts forever no matter what happens. Whether we are with that person for a life time or just a few weeks we know the impact they have on us and how they change us in ways that we can’t explain. Reading P.S I Love You I noticed how someone’s words can change the view of a person’s life.
Different authors equal different writing styles. Cecelia Ahern’s writing style is a style that anyone can like and is easy to follow. It is written as Gerry’s letters were written which goes month by month. Some parts are funny in which I laughed so much but there was other parts that made me cry because it was so sentimental that it was too hard to hold it in. at first I got confused of where the story took place but as I kept reading I figured out where it took place. The book is unusual because Holly is still receiving letters from her husband in which you keep on reading you’ll understand why that is weird.
Characters can be people we know or even ourselves. The characters in this story can be believed as people we might know. They go through situations that can happen to anyone. I like how the characters were portrayed in this story which made the book more enjoyable to read. By liking the characters a person can get into the book and not get bored of it and not want to finish it. Holly is the main character of this story and she’s married to Gerry which she believes is her soul mate and cant live with out him. But an unexpected thing happens to him and question is if Holly can go through this?
Y. Medina
P-3
Part 2
Time To Let Go
By: Lurlene McDaniel
The characters of the novel can be seen as people of todays world. I say this because of the way that Lurlene puts together the characters and describes their feelings, thoughts and problems. The way she describes them can compare to people in real life. For instance, Erins parents; they are facing the loss of their daughter and dealing with problems and many arguments at home. They are also trying to help out their other daughter who is going through some tough times. We also see Erin who has to deal with parents fighting, school and other problems she is bombarded with. David Devlin is a handsome young man who falls in love with Erin but she doesnt want anything to do with him at first. Many people out there can relate to one of these characters. That is because many people today are going through the same or similar situations. The way that Lurlene McDaniel brought about the characters and their characteristics gives us the ability to not only see these characters as just characters but also as human beings.
This novel can sure compare to the world today. I say this because many of the situations talked about in the novel are going on today. For example many teens face the loss of a loved one, many parents lose their son/daughter, and people fall in love with people who just want them away. There are many other situations that lurlene talks about in the novel that are going on around the world. Lurlene McDaniel uses many literary techniques throughout the novel. The way she uses the literary techniques allows us to visualize the story.
Like i mentioned earlier, this is the story of a young girl whose sister dies and has these terrible headaches she cant get rid of. She faces many problems at home and school. Her parents try to help her out but she says she doesnt need the help they are providing for her. She is forced to see a therapist and though she doesnt want to see the therapist she does. She sees the therapist every week and with her help Erin figures out the cause of her headaches.
This book can be compared to many real life stories. There are many teens around the world who have faced the loss of a loved one and have gone through the grieving process. Some find peace while others dont. However when one looses someone one must be strong and continue with their life. Also, many parents out there have lost a son or daughter and many people who fall in love with someone get rejected by them. This novel had many real life situations.
I would really recommend this book to anyone who is dealing with a loss. It is very inspirational and motivational.
A Vasquez
Period 05
Part 2
Where the story is set can take us to another place of the world. P.S I Love You is set in Dublin and I can actually picture how Dublin looks like by reading the descriptions in the story. At times I can actually feel as if I'm part of the setting but its gets confusing at times because Holly goes from one place to another. When I close my eyes I can imagine where she lives and the lifestyle she lives. While reading this story I got the sense of where she was and how she’s feeling.
Holly and Gerry are happily married but Gerry dies and holly is devastated by this. But with the help of Holly’s she tries to cope with this and tries to live life as normal as can be. After a while Holly starts receiving letters from Gerry which he all wrote before he died. While receiving these letters Holly gets a bit more of hope but at the same time she can’t move on because Gerry is still with her through these letters. As time passes by her friends tell her that living through the letters is stupid and pointless. But as you read along you see why Holly doesn’t want to let go of Gerry.
P.S I Love You isn’t like any other book because this story has its funny moments while having tearful moments at the same time. People do go through what Holly and Gerry went through. It isn’t something pleasant but with hope anyone can go through any situation. I can’t connect to this story at a personal level because Holly’s story is different but the fact that love is involved I know that one day I’ll connect to it maybe not in the same way but in another way I’ll connect to it.
We all like different styles of books. Whether it is horror or comedy but if you like love stories then P.S I Love You is the book for you. It’s not your typical love story but something different can open up your mind. It’s different and not many people will go through the same situation but reading this will open up the loving side everyone has in them.
E. Reynoso
Period 5
New Moon
Part 1
Stephanie Meyer’s New Moon made me fall in love with its love story and unique way of making the reader keep you reading. “I’m leaving”, says Edward. Edward leaves Bella what would happen next? I really enjoyed all the twilight saga, New Moon is one of the more interested ones.
The main theme of New Moon is that true love will defeat lust. When Edward leaves Bella, Bella wants to forget him by hanging out with Jacob. Soon enough Jacob and Bella fall in “love”. As we all know, Bella never forgot about Edward, she would wake up at night screaming since he left her. New Moon doesn’t really have a lesson. Besides that true love never dies and it helps you keep going in life if you really find true love.
Stephanie Meyer has a very unique way to write her books, we can’t compare the Twilight Saga to any other vampire series. That’s why a lot of teens grow up falling in love with them. I really love the way she writes her books because she makes everything sound so real, even though we all know that it’s all fake. These books are really good compared to other books I’ve read, like I’ve said, you can’t compare them to any other vampire series. The narrator’s voice is unique because she makes it not boring which make you keep going and finishing the book.
The main characters in New Moon are Bella and Jacob, its all about them. Meyer does make sound like real people because what happens makes it sound like a real story besides that part that Jacob is a wolf and Edward is a vampire. Like I said, there’s nothing I dislike about the books. From Bella when she managed to some what forget about Edward, thanks to the love that Jacob gave her. He was really the only person that has really been there for her. All the characters have really good personalities, which are what makes a good book.
The setting for New Moon mainly take place in Forks. Comparing it to the place where I’m living now its way different in Forks it’s really cold and it snows. The author makes you think like you’re really sucked in the place she’s talking about because she does a really good job in describing the place. If I were to close my eyes I would really be able to see the place she’s talking about because she gives a really good description of the setting.
E. Reynoso
Part 2
One thing you’ll love about this book is that it’s very interesting and you will really hooked on it. The main plot of the story, the part that makes the book an oh my god is when Edward, leaves Bella and she think her world is crashed down ever since his absence. Lots of questions start running thru your head, like what would she do? Would she go after him? Will she find love again? There’s only one way to find out and that’s to read the book.
New Moon is the second book from the Twilight Saga. Can you compare it this book to another one? No, I don’t think so because you can’t really compare it to another vampire book or any other one because in my opinion New Moon has everything from romance to fighting to action. What else do you want in a book while this one has everything? I don’t really think this book relates to my personal level because we all know there’s nothing like this in a real human life.
In conclusion, I really recommend this book if you like to read fantasy love books. If you do I promise you, you’ll be hooked on it all night long like me. I would read until midnight. This is a book you’ll never regret reading. So get on it!
O. Ortiz
p.3
1/31/10
The uncertain journey part 1
Margaret pointer the uncertain journey book mesmerized me with the sympathetic portrayal of 12 illegal immigrants who entered the US during the 80's to escape their lives in Mexico, El Salvador, Ecuador, Haiti, Guatemala, Jamaica, and Honduras. Whether talking about Salvadorian refugees or boat people from Haiti, these stories speak to the harshness of the situations from which illegal aliens come, the hardships they endure on the northward road, and their perseverance in the attempt to improve their lives. This are all success stories and herein lays a problem; with both similar outcomes and narrative style, the book becomes repetitious and predictable. It doesn't impede readability at all, but renders a sense of inevitability, so that no matter how ominous the situations are, readers come to expect that all will be fine.
Each a success story in its own way--illustrate the various routes and hazards through which the sin papeles (``those without papers'') reach Florida or the Southwest, the networks that support newly arrived aliens, and the hopes that sustain them. The near casual attitude of some Mexicans toward emigration and possible deportation contrasts markedly with that of other emigrants, for whom the journey is often a desperate, all or nothing gamble. Pointer uses fictional techniques like flashback and direct quotes to enliven the innate drama here but what's lacking is a sense of distinct personalities the sin papeles all seem to speak with one voice and to be cut from the same cloth. Also, the opening chapter, describing the problem of illegal immigration in general, is short on specifics, especially with regard to economic issues, and long on undocumented assertions.
Ricardo’s second entry into the United States was much easier than a first. After taking a bus to the border, he was able to pay a coyote to take him across the river in a boat, then his road to San Antonio in a driven by another coyote. The day after arrival, he applied for a dishwasher’s job in the same restaurant where he’d worked before his deportation. While he waited for an opening, he did yard work and hauling with Pedro, who had bought an old truck while Ricardo was in Mexico. Less than a month passed before Ricardo was called back to work by the restaurant owner. It was then that he and Ana got married and found an apartment of their own.
In more ways than one, the marriage marked a turning point in Ricardo’s life Ana had been born in the United States and spoke fluent English, and she insisted that Ricardo learn more than the common English words and phrases she had taught him during their courtship. After their marriage, she demanded that they speak English in their home. At times, this rule angered Ricardo, and he refused to speak at all. This is one of the problems that the majority of people have, they don’t speak a word in English and it’s difficult for them to accomplish their dreams. This is one of the problems that Ricardo has he doesn’t speak English and his wife wants him to learn how to speak English but he doesn’t want to.
O. Ortiz
p.3
The uncertain journey part 2
For six years, Ricardo worked at the restaurant, and Ana worked as a teacher’s aide. When the federal amnesty program was put into effect, Ricardo qualified because he had been a continuous resident of the United States since 1981. After filing his amnesty application, Ricardo received permission to live and to work in this country. At last, he need have no fear of crossing the border to visit his family. He need not fear the visits of the immigration authorities. And he could start progressing towards his goal that of owning his own business. Now, Ricardo has reached that goal he owns a catering truck that provides lunches and snacks to workers in office buildings and construction sites.
After along period of time he start reaching his goals because when he got here they used to pay him just two dollars and hour he worked from ten to twelve hours a day and he just got pay thirty dollars a day. He and other immigrants that are here in the United States have fear fear of the immigration they have to hide or run from the immigration. This is one of the biggest problems that the undocumented people have to deal with everyday. They suffer form racism they don’t get paid well and some of them don’t get even paid. Other problem that the immigrants have to deal with is leaving behind their own families just to give them a better life. When they leave their families there’s a chance that they might not come back because a lot of people dies trying to cross the border and some of them get killed by the border patrol officers.
This book in life real life its very similar on real life because the exact things that the book talk about is the same thing that happens in real life; for example when people die trying to cross the border or when people leave their children or wife behind, this is true this is real life a lot of people die trying to come to the United States because they want to have a better life and give a better life to their love ones. The author does made me feel that am part of the story because I went through this am illegal and I know what it feels like to be left behind my dad left us to come to the United States it was hard because I knew that he might never come back I didn’t wanted him to leave but he just wanted us to have a better life I saw a lot of people die when I came to the United States and it feels very bad because watching someone die and thinking about their families its sad because instead of having a better life their going to have someone death.
My recommendation is that the United States needs to change their rules because a lot of people are dying. I know that each country has the right to have their own rules but the Unites States is conceited the richest country of the world even with this recession so that means that a lot of people are going to try to come here. The police and government and the border patrol tries to take us out but the true is that there a lot of people who still going to try to come to get a better life. So I think that the United States should do is that they should have a kind of work permission. Like a six months or two years to work that way people can have the opportunity to come to the United States and be safe and that way the percent of people who dies is going to go down.
YGonzalez
Comp lit 3 AB
Per.2
"Is it love or a terrible betray?" Jennie is a fourteen years old girl who's life is turning upside down. Her father has walked out on her and her mother seeks comfort in pills and her best friend Marcie practically abandoned her to be with her boyfriend. Until she meets Mr. Johnstone (JJ) the substitute math teacher. Soon their friendship moves from beyond the classroom. Jennie is insecure, and confused about her feelings for Mr. Johnstone.
The author gives a great lesson for young girls like Jennie. Jennie was a lonely girl who didn't have anyone to give her advice or guide her the only comfort she had was her diary. Her diary symbolized her loneliness, and confusion about (J.J.) her math teacher. The authors style was very unique because Jennie would write and express herself how her feeling were really strong. The author let there readers know how Jennie felt.
Marcie was jennies best friend since 1st grade. they were practically like sisters. but Marcie soon began to spend her time with her new boyfriend and didn't have anytime left to spend time with Jennie. (bf) the authors makes the readers feel like there part of Jennie's diary. The authors use specific details to picture it in your mind. She uses the time, year, and the specific moment. For example when Jennie first saw JJ for the first time. In her math class and how they both felt there was a connection between Jennie and Mr. J. Tuesday April 6 was the first time Mr. J had to walk to Jennie’s math class. He was really amazed on how smart Jennie was that she would finish her homework faster. And offered her to be her student aid and help him correct papers.
I cannot compare this book to any others because this book was based on a true story and was edited by Dr. Beatriz Sparks. This diary can relate to girls that have felt this way in their personal life and sometimes when a teacher or any adult starts telling you nice complements to make you feel great how wonderful you are can sometimes be a little dangerous. So you should probably consult this to someone you trust or a guardian. Jennie felt really confused and lonely about her feeling for Mr. J that she didn't tell anyone except her diary. But one day when she went to J apt she accidentally hear that J is going to leave before he gets in trouble for seducing a minor but this was not his first time. Jennie was heart broken and felt betrayed from Mr. J. that later she decided to tell her mom and they both got professional help to accumulate this. Mr. J. ended up in jail for seducing a minor.
J. Kumar
Period 4
Jane Eyre Part 1
Jane Eyre written by Charlotte Bronte is a one-of-a-kind feminist novel about a plain governess’s attempts to find happiness and her place in society. I was amazed by Bronte’s ability to create such a relatable character and also deliver a powerful message about society.
The theme of this novel, the superfluous nature of social rules, has been explored in many other works, but Bronte has put a fresh spin on it. She explores the restrictions placed on both upper and lower class women by creating a character that is exposed to both extremes. “If God had gifted me with some beauty and much wealth,” says Jane to Mr. Rochester, the wealthy man she loves, “I should have made it hard for you to leave me” (276). She lets social norms get in the way of her happiness and leaves Mr. Rochester because “the wider ocean – wealth, caste, custom – intervened between” them (323). Later when Jane is presented with the opportunity to marry a man that is socially expectable, she refuses. “If I join St. John [the man who proposes to her], I abandon half myself,” says Jane (441).
J. Kumar
Part 2
This novel is written as Jane Eyre’s autobiography. Its straightforward and honest style is refreshing and keeps the story interesting. Jane is not afraid to speak her mind about what she experiences. Seeing the story through her eyes also allows the reader to better understand the effects society has on her.
Jane Eyre has an interesting array of multidimensional characters. The main characters are Jane Eyre and Edward Rochester. Jane Eyre is a poor and plain orphan yet she is educated like a wealthy person. This dichotomy plays a key role in the novel and helps shape Jane. “The Miss Reeds could not play as well!” Jane’s old nurse says to her when she sees that Jane has surpassed her rich cousins in learning (102). Jane exceeds everyone’s expectations for a poor orphan and is told “you are genteel enough; you look like a lady, and it is as much as I ever expected of you” (101). Mr. Rochester is a tortured rich man who has given up on life but has a strong spirit. “If he was absent from the room an hour a perceptible dullness seemed to steal over the spirits of his guests” (207).
J. Kumar
Part 3
This novel is set in the 1800s in rural England. Jane lives in several places including an extravagant mansion, an awful boarding school, the house of a wealthy man, the streets, a small cottage, a house of her own, and finally a small house that Mr. Rochester owns. With each change in location Jane changes and becomes a stronger person.
The simple plot of this novel is driven by Jane’s desire to express herself and become a strong individual. At the beginning of the story, Jane, who is orphaned, lives with her aunt who despises her. When she is ten she is shipped of to a boarding school for poor girls who are orphans. After a rough start at the school, Jane excels in her learning and decides to become a governess. She gets a job teaching Mr. Rochester’s ward, Adele. She and Mr. Rochester begin to fall in love and he asks her to marry him. Jane hesitantly excepts because she is aware of her social inferiority to him. However, she feels that she will have finally found happiness once she has married him. After a turn of events the marriage is thwarted once Jane finds out the Mr. Rochester has an insane wife who is living in the attic of his house. Jane sees no other option than to immediately run away. She is taken in by a family who she later finds are her long lost relatives. She gets an even bigger surprise when she discovers that her deceased uncle has left her with an enormous fortune. She feels that her life is finally falling into place, but then her cousin St. John asks her to marry him and become a missionary. This is a socially approved match, but Jane cannot imagine marrying a man she does not love. She leaves to see Mr. Rochester once last time and finds out that his insane wife set his house on fire and died. Mr. Rochester is left blind and crippled by the incident and when Jane sees him she realizes that she wants to marry him. In the end, she breaks social rules but finds happiness.
J. Kumar
Part 4
The story of lovers who cannot be together is a common plot base because it reflects the conflict between societal pressures and the wants of people. “The wider ocean – wealth, caste, custom – intervened between me and what I naturally and inevitably loved,” says Jane of her relationship with Mr. Rochester. A similar theme can be seen in Pride and Prejudice which is also a story about two people who create their own obstacles in finding love. “I could easily forgive his pride, if he had not mortified mine,” says Elizabeth (64). Her counterpart, Darcy “had never been bewitched by any women as he was by her [but] believed, that if it were not for the inferiority of her connections, he should be in some danger” (78). The characters in both books let society get in the way of what they want.
Jane Eyre is a beautifully crafted novel that I would recommend to anyone. I give it 4 out of 5 stars.
K.Peterson
Period 4
The Joy Luck Club
The Joy Luck Club
Amy Tan’s novel The Joy Luck Club is a collection of poignant stories about mothers and daughters battling to survive against, war, cruelty, fate and an oppressive culture. The stories, woven together by the common bond of struggle and grief, follow four Chinese families before, during and after World War II. Each daughter must deal with the hopes and dreams of their mother and attempt to find their place in a changing world. Tan’s book beautifully shows how gender identity in the Chinese culture affected the lives of these young women, and their bitter struggle to survive and provide a better life for their children.
The theme of The Joy Luck Club is how cultural gender roles impact not only the individual, but future generations as well. The author, Amy Tan, wrote this novel from personal experience. Raised in northern California, the first generation Chinese American struggled with her mother’s cultural expectations and wanting to fit into the American way of life. The character, Lindo Jong, in the novel illustrate this point when she states, “….I wanted my children to have the best combinations: American circumstances and Chinese character. How could I know these two things do not mix?” I believe the life lesson in The Joy Luck Club is one of survival and sacrifice for one’s children. Each of the sixteen stories illustrates how each mother and daughter must fight to survive during war, unhappy marriages, poverty and abuse. The struggles and pain are not forgotten, but are passed down to the next generation. Sometimes the mothers’ devotion to their daughters are hidden by criticism and demands, however underneath it all is the lesson that a parent must sacrifice in order for their child to have a better life.
The unusual style of The Joy Luck Club helps the reader understand the Chinese culture and the difference between China and America. Tan’s novel has four distinctively different parts which begin with a traditional Chinese story or fable. I enjoyed jumping from one family’s story to another and experiencing the contrast between the two cultures. Part of the book takes place in China and part in San Francisco. The book has only female voices; the perspective of the mothers and daughters both past and present. I did not find The Joy Luck Club to be a funny book. For me, it was bittersweet, full of bravery and sadness.
K.Peterson
Period 4
The Joy Luck Club
Part 2
The Joy Luck Club has over sixteen main characters. The most important characters are all women. Each woman has a different set of struggles that she has to overcome. The characters are all very believable. No one was all good or all bad. They were believable because, as a reader, I was able to understand the character’s hopes and dreams and many different struggles. As a young woman, the book made me look at my life in America and appreciate the opportunities and freedom that I enjoy. Also, by understanding the mother’s life, the reader is given a better understanding of how each daughter is affected by her parent’s history. For me, if I had to choose a main character it would by Jing-mei “June” Woo. She was the newest member of The Joy Luck Club and a daughter of a recently deceased Chinese born mother. June has difficulty understanding her Chinese heritage, however at the end of the novel she is able to make peace with her identity, “ I look at their faces again and I see no trace of my mother in them. Yet they still look familiar. And now I also see what part of me is Chinese. It is so obvious. It is my family. It is in our blood. After all these years, it can finally be let go.”
The Joy Luck Club is set in China during the 1920 to 1940s and also present day San Francisco. The chapters of the book that are set in China, explain the culture and social beliefs of their people. According to Rit Nosotro’s essay, Women in China, Women had no power and their work centered on their home and their family. Their duty in life was to be obedient to their husband and provide a male heir. For hundreds of years women in China served as slaves, concubines, and many marriages were arranged from infancy. Females were considered weak, and many female babies were killed at birth. The contrast of the modern American city, San Francisco is sharp and clear. In America, women struggle with balancing family and work while attempting to keep their traditional parents happy. The author paints a beautiful and distinct picture of China. She describes the food, clothes and landscape in rich detail. An-Mei Hsu describes her home town this way, “ In early morning peasants sold vegetables I had never seen or eaten before in my life. . .so sweet, so tender, so fresh. . .And they had houses of all shapes and colors, one painted in pink, another with rooms that jutted out at every angle like the backs and fronts of Victorian dresses, others with roofs like pointed hats and wood carvings painted white to look like ivory.”
K.Peterson
Period 4
The Joy Luck Club
Part 3
The plot in the novel centers on the character Jing-mei. Her mother, Suyuan Woo, has recently died and Jing-mei must take her mother’s place at the weekly Mahjong game, called The Joy Luck Club. Jing-mei discovers that her mother had left twin girls in China when she fled to America during the war. Jing-mei is reluctant to find her twin sisters , however she is encouraged to enter this journey by the other three Joy Luck Club members. To help Jing-mei understand her culture and her mother’s struggles, each woman and their daughter tells their different story of struggle and survival.
I find many similarities between Amy Tan’s The Joy Luck Club and Jane Austen’s Pride and Prejudice. Each book’s voice is written from a female perspective, explaining what it is like to live in a society from a woman’s point of view. Female gender roles in China and England were similar; women had no power and marriage was the ultimate goal. While the settings, England and China, were very different, the concerns of their women were very much the same. Marrying for love was considered a novel and risky idea, while marrying for money, safety and power were the norm. Both Austen and Tan were able to capture the essence of women’s struggles in their society.
Amy Tan’s novel The Joy Luck Club is a hauntingly beautiful book written about the relationships between mothers and daughters. The book illustrates how the despair and desperation of one generation can get passed on to their children. It is a novel that discusses a parent’s sacrifice and how difficult it is for cultures to assimilate into western society. For me, The Joy Luck Club is a story of the importance of survival and the willingness and necessity for women to take control of their lives and their destiny.
One Hundred Years of Solitude
JTorres
Part: 1
“One Hundred Years of Solitude is the first piece of literature since the Book of Genesis that should be required reading for the entire human race” (Kennedy, New York Times Book Review). Gabriel Garcia Marquez’s, One Hundred Years of Solitude, captivated me with its dreamlike and fantastic elements that strike the soul.
One of the themes of One Hundred Years of Solitude is time. This novel argues that history repeats itself in cycles and that each generation is bound to make the same mistakes. To emphasize that time does not always progress; the author gives the characters a limited amount of names and a repetition of characteristics. Even after six generations, the book ends like it begins; with the town of Macondo isolated from humanity. The first character to notice that in Macondo “time was going in a circle” was Ursula when she realized that the sketch that was drawn by Aureliano Triste “was a direct descent of the plans with which Jose Arcadio had illustrated his project for solar welfare” (Garcia Marquez 221). Through this theme the reader can infer that the author is trying to say that one can not run away from the past because in the end it will always manage to come back. He might also be trying to say that it is part of human nature to make the same mistakes others have made, even though different opportunities are provided.
One Hundread Years of Solitude
JTorres
P:2
Garcia Marquez has a unique writing style. This novel is told from a third person omniscient point-of view in which the narrator shows concern with the feelings and actions of the Buendia family. While reading this novel one enjoys the way in which Garcia Marquez uses the style of magical realism. This style of writing is “characterized by elements of fantasy woven into the story” which creates illogical scenarios (themodernworld.com). Magical realism is apparent throughout the novel, especially when Garcia Marquez describes the town of Macondo, its inhabitants, and their intense situations. The reader also enjoys the way in which Garcia Marquez begins each chapter “in midst of things”, that is to say the first line of every chapter foreshadows an event that will later occur within the next few chapters”. For example, the beginning of the novel foreshadows that “Colonel Aureliano Buendia will face a firing squad”, yet the event does not occur until the middle of the novel when it is revealed that “Colonel Aureliano Buendia organized thirty-two armed uprisings” (my emphasis, Garcia Marquez 1, 103). Garcia Marquez’s writing style is unlike anything that I have ever read, but none the less I found it spectacular. The way in which he defines fantasy captivated my imagination and stole my uttermost attention.
The protagonists of One Hundred Years of Solitude span over six generations, which total up to sixteen family members. To emphasis that history repeats itself in cycles and that each generation is bound to make the same mistakes, Garcia Marquez gives the Buendia family, a limited amount of names. The men of the Buendia family are named either Jose Arcadio or Aureliano; while the women are named Ursula, Amaranta, or Remedios. Although one may think that telling the difference between characters would be difficult Garcia Marquez eases up this task by addressing the characters with a different form of the name. For example, Jose Arcadio Segundo is named after his father Arcadio, who is named after his father Jose Arcadio, who is named after his father Jose Arcadio Buendia. Garcia Marquez further eases up the situation by providing the reader with a family tree at the beginning on the novel. Since all members inherit the same form of the name, they also inherit certain personality traits. For example, the Ursula’s were “active, small, severe” women “of unbreakable nerves” (Garcia Marquez 9). The “Aurelianos were withdrawn, but with lucid minds, the José Arcadios were impulsive and enterprising, but they were marked with a tragic sign” (Garcia Marquez 81). The Remedios “brought a sense of merriment to the house” and the Amarantas “had a rare sensibility for appreciating the things of the world and had a secret tenderness (Garcia Marquez 87, 94). When portraying the physical appearance of the characters Garcia Marquez uses wild descriptions that make it hard for the reader to believe in the characters as people. For example, Jose Arcadio is portrayed with “jaws of iron” and “covered with cryptic tattooing” and Remedios the beauty who was a creature of “incredible beauty” who contained a “suffocating odor that “gave of a breath of perturbation, a tormenting breeze that was still perceptible several hours after she had passed by” “(Garcia Marquez 88, 89, 230, 233). The unique characterization of this novel is unlike anything that I have ever encountered and it is what makes this novel so interesting.
One Hundred Years of Solitude
JTorres
P:3
Although the time setting of this novel is not formally addressed, it is briefly mentioned that “the world was so recent that many things lacked names, and in order to indicate them it was necessary to point” (Garcia Marquez 1). This ambiguity on behalf of Garcia Marquez suggests that he does not want the reader to know the exact time period of the novel in order to lose them in the magic of the fictional town. The setting of the novel is Macondo, an isolated town founded by Jose Arcadio Buendia. It is described as a happy town with its “three-hundred inhabitants” “where no one was over thirty years of age and where no one had died” (Garcia Marquez 9). It “was a town that was more orderly and hardworking than any known”. “The placement of the houses in such a way that from all of them one could reach the river and draw water with the same effort, and the streets were lined up with such good sense that no house got more sun than another during the hot time of day” (Garcia Marquez 9). The inhabitants of the town “knew that to the east lay an impenetrable mountain chain”, so when the gypsies came with their inventions “everyone was surprised that they had been able to find the town in the drowsiness of the swamp” (Garcia Marquez 9, 10). Due to its isolation Macondo was a village that lacked technological advances, which is why they depended on the gypsies to “announce the latest and most starling discoveries of the sages” (Garcia Marquez 16). The setting of this novel contrasts to the world around me because of the isolation of the town and its lack of technology. In our world today we are privileged to be of walking distance of many businesses and we can easily community to different parts of the world with the technology that is available to us. Although one may infer that it would be difficult to picture the isolated town of Macondo, it is not. Garcia Marquez’s use of descriptive details makes it difficult, if not impossible to not picture the setting. An example would be when he is describing the identical houses of the inhabitants of Macondo each with “a small, well-lighted living room, a dining room in the shape of a terrace with gaily colored flowers, two bedrooms, a courtyard with a gigantic chestnut tree, a well-kept garden, and a coral where goats, pigs, and hens live in peaceful communion” (Garcia Marquez 8).
One Hundred Years of Solitude
JTorres
P:3
Although the time setting of this novel is not formally addressed, it is briefly mentioned that “the world was so recent that many things lacked names, and in order to indicate them it was necessary to point” (Garcia Marquez 1). This ambiguity on behalf of Garcia Marquez suggests that he does not want the reader to know the exact time period of the novel in order to lose them in the magic of the fictional town. The setting of the novel is Macondo, an isolated town founded by Jose Arcadio Buendia. It is described as a happy town with its “three-hundred inhabitants” “where no one was over thirty years of age and where no one had died” (Garcia Marquez 9). It “was a town that was more orderly and hardworking than any known”. “The placement of the houses in such a way that from all of them one could reach the river and draw water with the same effort, and the streets were lined up with such good sense that no house got more sun than another during the hot time of day” (Garcia Marquez 9). The inhabitants of the town “knew that to the east lay an impenetrable mountain chain”, so when the gypsies came with their inventions “everyone was surprised that they had been able to find the town in the drowsiness of the swamp” (Garcia Marquez 9, 10). Due to its isolation Macondo was a village that lacked technological advances, which is why they depended on the gypsies to “announce the latest and most starling discoveries of the sages” (Garcia Marquez 16). The setting of this novel contrasts to the world around me because of the isolation of the town and its lack of technology. In our world today we are privileged to be of walking distance of many businesses and we can easily community to different parts of the world with the technology that is available to us. Although one may infer that it would be difficult to picture the isolated town of Macondo, it is not. Garcia Marquez’s use of descriptive details makes it difficult, if not impossible to not picture the setting. An example would be when he is describing the identical houses of the inhabitants of Macondo each with “a small, well-lighted living room, a dining room in the shape of a terrace with gaily colored flowers, two bedrooms, a courtyard with a gigantic chestnut tree, a well-kept garden, and a coral where goats, pigs, and hens live in peaceful communion” (Garcia Marquez 8). Garcia Marquez also uses conceit metaphors to describe the setting. For example, he explains that Macondo was “built on the bank of a river of clear water that ran along a bed of polished stones, which were white and enormous, like prehistoric eggs” (Garcia Marquez 1).
The plot of this novel follows the history of Macondo (a fantasy town) which is analyzed through the six generations of the Buendia family. The village was founded by Jose Arcadio Buendia and his wife, Ursula. The town was founded in order for the newlyweds to have a place to raise their family away from their relatives. They set out “completely ignorant of the geography of the region” and headed “toward the land that none had promised them” (Garcia Marquez 10, 22). The location and name of the town came to Jose Arcadio Buendia in the form of a dream which is why the town is dreamlike in every aspect. At the beginning, Macondo was a peaceful place. There was no form of government and all the houses were geometrically positioned so that “no house got more sun than another during the hot time of day” (Garcia Marquez 9). The lack of technology made the inhabitants of the town dependent on the gypsies who “sowed a panic of uproarious joy through the streets” (Garcia Marquez 16). Upon acquiring too much knowledge, Jose Arcadio Buendia turns into a solitary man who neglects his work and two young sons, Jose Arcadio and Aureliano. After two generations the town of Macondo finds itself engaged in a civil war between the Liberals and Conservatives.
One Hundred Years of Solitude
JTorres
P:4
The Liberals were seen as “bad people, wanting to…cut the country up into a federal system that would take power away from the supreme authority” one the other hand, the Conservatives “received their power directly from God…and were defenders of the principal authority” (Garcia Marquez 95). During this time, Macondo went through a period of turbulence and chaos. After “almost twenty years of civil war”, the war is over under the “Treaty of Neerlandia” (Garcia Marquez 103). Shortly after the end of the civil war the village finds itself invaded by a foreign fruit company (a banana company). The arrival of the banana company brings a gilded age to Macondo. The town becomes inhabited by many outsiders who bring with them their technology and customs. Macondo is transformed from a town who was amazed by ice and magnets to one that has movie theaters and railroads. When a disaster hits Macondo, the banana company departs. Macondo is then left with its isolation and former backwardness which led many to believe that time was “turning in a circle (Garcia Marquez 335).
One Hundred Years of Solitude can be compared to the Bible. In the beginning of the novel “the world was so recent that many things lacked names”, this can be compared to the bible because in the beginning of time God had to bring animals “to Adam to see what he would name them” (Genesis 2:19). In both of these works knowledge leads to the destruction of the protagonists. In the bible, Adam and Eve were kicked out of the Garden of Eden for eating a fruit from the tree of knowledge of good and evil which was designed “to make one wise”(Genesis 3:16). In One Hundred Years of Solitude, Jose Arcadio Buendia’s pursuit of knowledge through Melquiades’ scripts leads him to insanity and to be tied to the “chestnut tree in the courtyard” (Garcia Marquez 78). Another biblical parallel can be the on going rain in Macondo that lasted “for four years, eleven months, and two days” that got rid of the malevolent banana company who was responsible for the deaths of “at least three thousand” people (Garcia Marquez 315, 308). After the departure of the banana company the inhabitants of the town were left to start over again. This relates to the bible when God flooded the earth for “forty days and forty nights” because he “saw that the wickedness of man was great in the earth” (Genesis 7:12, 6:5). The remaining inhabitants of Macondo had to begin civilization once again; in the bible this task was left to Noah, his family, and two animals of every kind because God believed they would “be fruitful, and multiply, and replenish the earth” (Genesis 1:18). One Hundred Years of Solitude relates to current world issues factors in regards to the political instability of Latin American countries such as Cuba and Panama. Macondo was established “without having bothered the government” and was therefore not ruled by any appointed officials (Garcia Marquez 56). Upon the arrival of Don Apolinar Moscote, who names himself magistrate, the town starts to witness political turbulence. He was kicked out by Jose Arcadio Buendia, founder of the town, who argued that in that “town we do not give orders” and judges are not needed “because there’s nothing that needs judging” (Garcia Marquez 56). Moscote later returned “with six barefoot and ragged soldiers, armed with shotguns” in order to intimidate the inhabitants and assert his power (Garcia Marquez 57). He was later replaced by Arcadio who “from the first day of his rule revealed his prediction for decrees” (Garcia Marques 104). Throughout his reign as ruler, “Arcadio continued tightening the tourniquet with unnecessary rigor until he became the cruelest ruler that Macondo had ever known” (Garcia Marquez 105). This clearly depicts the political instability that the inhabitants of Macondo went through with each of their dictators.
One Hundred Years of Solitude
JTorres
P:5
Like in Macondo, both Cuba and Panama went through various dictatorships that politically oppressed them; depriving them of their right to “life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness” (Declaration of Independence). Although this novel does not relate to me on a personal level, one can infer that it relates to the author’s life. Aracatca, Garcia Marquez’s native town in Columbia, contains many similarities to the history of Macondo. Both of these places were invaded by prosperous foreign fruit companies who then later abandoned them; leaving them in worst conditions than they found them in. For example, after the “banana company tore down its installations”; “Macondo was in ruins. In the swampy street were…the last memories of the hordes of newcomers who had fled Macondo as wildly as they had arrived.” (Garcia Marquez 330).
In conclusion, One Hundred Years of Solitude is a novel full of magic that is capable of igniting all types of emotions within its readers. For its splendid ability to captivate the reader in its engaging plot, I award this novel five out of five stars. I highly recommend this novel to anyone who is interested in a challenging read and who is willing to be lost in the beauty of Garcia Marquez’s fantasy town of Macondo.
A. Abernathy
Period 4
“Between the wish and the thing the world lies waiting.” (Pg. 238). This phrase from All The Pretty Horses reflects the fate of every character in both this novel and reality. Written by Cormac McCarthy, this novel is a notch in a long line of similar novels by this author all with the concept of the inevitability of reality, which Cormac has become known as the cornerstone of this genre. In his first installment to his vastly popular The Border Trilogy, two young men who have grown discontent with their calm lives embark on a road which has no clear ending into the harsh terrain of Mexico. It is not until fate brings a third member to their party that their descent from peace and ignorance is shattered. The events of barbarism and blood that follow could hardly have been foreseen, and this is exactly the point that McCarthy is trying to make. He is trying to show the idea of Sacred Violence; the idea that there will never be a lasting peace; that society cannot and never will reach a time absent of violence, because that would indicate a state capable of being foreseen or anticipated. Of course this is an easy point to make, being that every establishment that has existed has been rocked by times of bloodshed, but Cormac feels it is a point worth making over and over because it is one so easily denied by ignorant people.
McCarthy’s writing style reflects the mentality of both himself and his stories, due to its absence of many forms of punctuation. He writes only to the effect that the reader can interpret his writing, and while I have no preference, I do appreciate the unique perspective that he holds on writing. Cormac’s writings all contain the element of fate in them, in that fate is not a course capable of being anticipated, and that like a river, it has both rapids capable of being anticipated and undercurrents that are incapable of being prepared for. “There is no such thing as life without bloodshed. The notion that the species can be improved in some way, that everyone could live in harmony, is really a dangerous idea” (An interview of Cormac McCarthy by the New York Times). While many people have been repulsed by his almost morbid ideas, McCarthy has really in no way altered reality to shape this idea of Sacred Violence. In another of his novels, Blood Meridian, Cormac bases every act of brutality on actual events printed in Texan newspapers during the time of the novel. In this way, McCarthy is merely addressing what is happening in reality.
A. Abernathy - Continued
Period 4
While there are many themes that are present in Cormac McCarthy’s novels, he has never written any of them with the intent of forming them to these themes. This is merely the way that he views the world, and as such, it is the way he crafts his stories. This being said, there are themes, messages and lessons capable of being garnished from this story, in the same way that multiple themes, messages and lessons can be learned from everyday events. The idea of Sacred Violence is first and foremost in All The Pretty Horses, as it is the title of every event that takes place once the young men leave their shelter.
“Way the world is. Somebody can wake up and sneeze somewhere in Arkansas or some damn place and before you're done there's wars and ruination and all hell” (Pg. 92). This discussion takes place after the first unexpected occurrence in which the boys find themselves involved in a horse theft; something which they never envisioned themselves participating in, no matter the reason. In their discussion the boys reveal their insecurities with the experiences they have had, and reveal to the reader the manner in which the events before their arrival to any number of places will contort their innocence and force them to react in a way contrary with their beliefs.
The characters in All The pretty Horses are primarily not your typical heroes and villains. While the sheriff they come into conflict with does seem very sinister, it is only because they have broken the law that his actions are so harsh. The fact that the reader knows the theft was in order to return a stolen horse serves only to exemplify his behavior as profoundly evil. The main character, John Grady, often goes into philosophical conversations with his companion, Lacey Rawlins.
“You think God looks out for people? said Rawlins.
Yeah I guess He does. You?
Yeah. I do.” (Pg. 92). This is something that I was drawn to, because of the fact of their insecurity. Because I was able to relate to the main characters I think it made them much more believable to me, given that they are my same age and are having the same questions I often do. The men have their faith questioned multiple times throughout the novel, and Grady emerges from these events severely questioning his place with God and in the world.
“Where is your country? he said.
I dont know, said John Grady. I dont know where it is. I dont know what happens to country.” (Pg. 299). These characters are all put through severe events, and as such they are uncertain and wary about everything that has yet to happen.
A. Abernathy - Continued
Period 4
The setting in All The Pretty Horses is in Mexico in the 50’s, with the departure of two young cowhands from their homes in Texas. McCarthy describes the Mexican terrain as a place shaped by leather and sweat, and he uses the environment to give a hint as to the events soon to unfold. “The sun sat blood red and elliptic under the reefs of bloodred could before him.” (Pg. 5). McCarthy’s use of the environment given a unity to his work which gives credit to the events as they occur while further progressing the story.
Through my experiences, the story or event most comparable and similar to All The Pretty Horses would have to be events from my life, as they are the ones that shocked me as thoroughly as the events in this book did to it’s characters. There have been several events in my life of unprecedented violence that I was not yet prepared for, as there are in other’s lives, which reflect the cruelty of reality shown in Cormac McCarthy’s novel. One example of unwarranted horror in the face of innocence would be when me and my friends were playing tag outside my house in a cul-de-sac. Suddenly there was a roaring crash, a startling alarm to our senses that left us with adrenaline flowing. There had been a crash just the street over from us in which a car full of drunk teenagers had crashed at upwards of sixty miles an hour into the back of a minivan, careened off and dashed open upon a street light. Without going into great detail, only one of the four drunks had survived, leaving a trail of wreckage and two limbs torn free of their late owners. We beheld this with eyes not yet christened with the site of death in reality, and we were all slightly removed from reality for a few days after.
I give this book five world weary travelers out of five.
m.arroyo
period:2
part 1
“I just want people to understand how a person with big dreams can lose everything to the streets without the proper love and support. Sonia Rodriguez” Reymundo Sanchez and Sonia Rodriguez’s Lady Q The Rise And Fall Of A Latin Queen identified what being in a gang really means and what can happen when you do not have the support of your family. The book is about Sonia Rodriguez also known as Lady Q. How she struggled the violence, drugs, and gang members that then led her to be a Latin Queen. From throwing punches, selling drugs, and getting shot at, doing time in prison she realized that saving herself and children meant changing.
The theme of the book is that gangs are pointless and that you need someone to support you or else you can go can go towards the wrong path. Basically do not get into gangs just cause something happened to you in the past that you still have anger towards. Just cause you do not get the support or love at home joining a gang will not get you that love or support. “Kids you see on the corner acting hard-core, ones people see as bad kids, they are not bad kids. They are just misguided and misunderstood and they are looking for acceptance and love anywhere and any way they can find it. Sonia Rodriguez”
Gangs can lead to bad things in your future. Sometimes even affect your children later on in life. Maybe leading them the same way as themselves. “Lady Q was very proud of her daughter but did not even think about making changes in her lifestyle that would encourage Lisette’s educational growth. Reymundo Sanchez” The life lesson is think about it before joining a gang because it has consequences and you will regret it later on in life. “She began to make arrangements to separate herself from all but handful of Latin Kings and Queens. Reymundo Sanchez”
The author’s style of writing about the book I liked a lot, it was very detailed. The way he wrote the book made me think of how it was. I was able to picture a lot of the stuff I read. It was not funny it was more serious. The author’s voice was unusual from other books I have read. It made me feel like I was there while everything was happening. “A shootout broke out between the two gangs. Those who did not have a gun ran for the cars. Thos of us who did continued shooting into a crowd of innocent, unsuspecting people. Sonia Rodriguez”
m.arroyo
period:2
part 2
The main character is Sonia Rodriguez known in the book as Lady Q. I think Lady Q was a strong person but weak to. The decisions she made, made her look weak like joining a gang. But she was strong cause of the abuse she went through at home. How she never had her family’s support, unlike that she went on with her life. The thing that made Lady Q the strongest and have doubt about her mother loving her. Was when her stepfather physically abused her. “From this tender age Sonia was already filled with doubts about whether her mother loved her. Reymundo Sanchez”
The book does not compare or contrast to the world I know. There’s a lot of violence in the book that I have not been around of. The author does make me feel like am part of the setting by the way he describes everything. The majority of times I was able to close my eyes and picture the books setting. The author’s setting and place is detailed, interesting, and touching. The stuff Lady Q went through made me think, how can a person go through all of that in their life.
The plot of the book is how Lady Q struggles through out her life but never gives up. The up and downs she went through. Having a baby at a young age did not stop her or being homeless knowing her mom had a place for her to stay. But her daughter seeing all the stuff she went through would affect her later on in life. One of the results was that Lady Q’s daughter became involved with gang members and became pregnant at age sixteen. “He listened to the story of my life and he saw the parallels between me and my mother and me and Lisette. Sonia Rodriguez”
I can compare this book to “My Bloody Life” the author is always Reymundo Sanchez who was a Latin King. It does relate to current events and issues we have today. Some events are shot outs we hear about on the news happening around the United States. The issues are the gangs, how kids get influenced and then join. Gangs are increasing everyday more and more kids are being influenced at a young age. “I have always tried to figure out why our people fight against each other over different colors, cause now that am older I realize how ignorant I was. Sonia Rodriguez”
I would recommend this book to anyone. It is a very good book I give it four stars out of five. Everything has a consequence on what people do. Do not let the people you love go through you went through because it could have the same results. This is what the made me understand everything is possible just do not give up.
G. Kaur
Period 4
Heart of Darkness
by Joseph Conrad
(Part 1)
“The brown current ran swiftly out of the heart of darkness, bearing us down towards the sea with twice the speed of our upward progress; and Kurtz’s life was running swiftly, too, ebbing, ebbing out of his heart into the sea of inexorable time….”(151). Heart of Darkness is a novella written by Joseph Conrad in the 19th century that describes the journey of a steamship caption into and out of Africa’s “heart of darkness.” The novella is an interesting piece of literature that contains a unique writing style and a haunting tale.
The major theme in this book is madness. The cause of this madness within the characters is their inability to distinguish between good and evil. They are so corrupt and greedy for power that they forget what is good and what is bad. Also there is no structural society and government that can limit the corruption of these people. Therefore, due to these reasons the men become mentally mad because there are no restrictions but a lot of ivory to make them rich. “The word ivory rang in the air, was whispered, was sighed. You would think they were praying to it” (91).
As madness was spreading among the men in Africa many doctors in Europe were experimenting with people who were about to go to Africa. For example in the beginning of the novella a doctor examined the protagonist Marlow and implied that going into the interior changes men’s psyches. Also, the doctor told Marlow that he measured the skulls of men before they left for Africa because they have a tendency to go mad in the African interior, thus showing the major theme of the book. “The old doctor felt my pulse, evidently thinking of something else the while. ‘Good, good for there,’ he mumbled, and then with a certain eagerness asked me whether I would let him measure my head. Rather surprised, I said Yes, when he produced a thing like calipers and got the dimensions back and front and every way, talking notes carefully. He was an unshaven little man in a threadbare coat like a gaberdine, with his feet in slippers, and I thought him a harmless fool. ‘I always ask leave, in the interests of science, to measure the crania of those going out there,’ he said. ‘And when they come back too?’ I asked. ‘Oh, I never see them,’ he remarked; ‘and, moreover, the changes take place inside, you know.’ He smiled, as if at some quiet joke. ‘So you are going out there. Famous. Interesting too.’ He gave me a searching glance and made another note. ‘Ever any madness in your family?’ he asked, in a matter-of-fact tone. I felt very annoyed. ‘Is that question in the interests of science too?’ ‘It would be,’ he said, without taking notice of my irritation, ‘interesting for science to watch the mental changes of individuals, on the spot, but […]’” (76). By examining this major theme one learns a life lesson, that is, to never leave humans alone without a structural government because then they will become corrupt and mentally mad.
G. Kaur
Period 4
Heart of Darkness
by Joseph Conrad
(Part 2)
The author used a unique writing style to write this book. He used poetic prose, verbose, and a frame narrative that makes his novella different from most of the other books. Conrad’s poetic proses are long and tedious but very interesting. For example when Marlow describes an African mistress of Kurtz he uses a long-winded prose filled with imagery. “She walked with measured steps, draped in striped and fringed cloths, treading the earth proudly, with a slight jingle and flash of barbarous ornaments. She carried her head high……” (142). Although the prose is tedious it is unique because the way Marlow described the mistress the reader feels as if they know her. Also the text contains verbose, that is the text has more words than necessary. This factor makes the novella descriptive and evokes an emotion within the reader. For example when Marlow sees the Native-Africans dying he could just state that they are dying; however, instead he uses verbose to describe the pain they are going through to evoke some emotions from the readers. Another unique style that Conrad embeds into the novella is the framed narrative, meaning a story within a story. Instead of using a simple narrative Conrad uses the framed narrative in which an unknown narrator introduces Marlow to the readers. Then Marlow takes over the narration and tells the story.
The main characters within the novella were Marlow, Kurtz, and an unnamed manager of a station. Marlow is a tough guy who is an independent thinker, honest, intelligent, eloquent, and a natural philosopher. Throughout the novel he fights against the corruption around him and an emotion that encourages him to become corrupt also. On the other hand, the manager is corrupt, greedy for power, and an “empty” character who is selfish. The manger is seen as an empty character because "there was nothing within him" (93) and the reason for this characteristic was dehumanization. The character Kurtz is considered an ideal person in Europe because Europeans think that he has many talents. However, nature and ivory changes Kurtz from an ideal person to one whom everyone is afraid of. In Africa Kurtz becomes so corrupt and an animal that he puts the heads of his rebel on sticks. “I had no idea of the conditions, he (the harlequin) said: these heads were the heads of rebels” (137). Also, Conrad makes the reader feel that the characters are real because the diction that he uses to describe them makes the readers feel as if they know the characters.
S. Bravo
The novel that I read is The Plague by Albert Camus. The novel is set in the 1940's in the town of Oran. The novel emphasizes that sometimes we have no control over our destiny and often have to face what lies before us, even though we don't know what that is. So, we often have to just take a leap of faith and hope for the best, all the while fighting for a just cause, and in this case, fighting against the plague and the horrors that it brings.
The theme of the novel as the title already reveals is a plague that spreads throughout a town off the Algerian coast named Oran, impacting those within in different ways. The plague is not noticed until hundreds and then thousands of rats start to die from it, they're fleas that were on them soon infect the human population and before the people of Oran realize it, they are closed off from the world, "Proclaim a state of plague stop close the town." This spreads alarm and fear to all within the town as the gates close, and they are closed off from the rest of the world, in exile.
The author's style is unique because he writes in a way that leaves you thinking, having the narrator be unknown to the reader for example. The story is told in third person omniscient and the narrator tell that, "In any case the narrator (whose identity will be made known in due course)," pg. 6. This gives the reader a sense of excitement and intrigues them to keep reading, making them want to uncover the identity of the narrator. The author portrays the novel in a serious manner as the things that he tells are of a serious nature, "The truth is that nothing is less sensational than pestilence, and by reason of their very duration great misfortunes are monotonous. In the memories of those who lived through them, the grim days of plague do not stand out like vivid flames, ravenous and inextinguishable, beaconing a troubled sky, but rather like the slow, deliberate progress of some monstrous thing crushing all upon its path," pg. 162. This quote states that the plague is not something that the people were warned about, but rather it occurs quickly and without much warning, giving those affected by it little time to react. The author also uses many allusions such as metaphors, similes, and personification, "What with the gunshots echoing at the gates, the punctual thuds of rubber stamps marking the rhythm of lives and deaths, the files and fires, the panics and formalities, all alike were pledged to an ugly but recorded death, and, amidst noxious fumes and the muted clang of ambulances, all of us ate the same sour bread of exile, unconsciously waiting for the same reunion, the same miracle of peace regained," pg. 167. This describes the fact that everyone in the town was experiencing the same thing and that no one had an exception to what they were suffering through.
G. Kaur
Period 4
Heart Of Darkness
by Joseph Conrad
(Part 3)
The setting of the story takes place in Africa near the Congo River around 1890 and aboard the Nellie on the Thames River (1891). There are two settings because it is a framed narrative. In the beginning the setting on the Thames River and an unnamed character describes it as, “The sea-reach if the Thames stretched before us like the beginning of an interminable waterway. In the offing the sea and the sky were welded together without a joint…” (65). While reading this description one can picture the men sitting and enjoying the moment. Also, Conrad does a great job at describing the Congo River and its surrounding. “…the tide seemed to stand still in red clusters of canvas sharply peaked, with gleams of varnished sprits” (90). By looking at the descriptions of these two settings the reader feels as if they are part of the setting because Conrad uses figurative language and deep imagery to describe the setting.
Like any other book this novella has an initial situation, conflict, climax, suspense, and a conclusion. But the basic plot of the story is that Marlow is an Englishmen who takes a foreign assignment from a Belgian trading company as a steamer captain in Africa, near the Congo River. Marlow’s job in Africa is to transport ivory downriver. However, when he reaches Africa he sees Africans being treated like animals and the Europeans corrupt. When he reaches his station he finds out that his streamer is broken. But later on he discovers that the general manager of his station ordered Marlow’s ship to be broken so Marlow cannot reach Kurtz, an ivory trader. After repairing his streamer Marlow goes to the “heart of darkness” or the inner station where an evil person named Kurtz lives. In Europe Kurtz was seen as an ideal person who was multi-talented; however, ivory corrupted him and ruined his reputation in Africa, but not in Europe because no one knew about his corruption. While Marlow travels to Kurtz’s station his ship is attacked by Africans. Fortunately the ship doesn’t get damaged and Marlow reaches the station. At Kurtz’s station Marlow finds out that Kurtz ordered this attack so Marlow and his fellow Europeans wouldn’t take him back to Europe, for he was sick and going to die. However the men take Kurtz on Marlow’s streamer but on the ship something happens that changes Marlow’s physiological state of mind.
Heart of Darkness relates to another novella named The Secret Share, also written by Joseph Conrad. These two novellas are similar because they both contain a similar concept. In both of the stories Conrad shows the deep relationship between men, land, and sea. Also, Marlow in Heart of Darkness and an unnamed character in The Secret Sharer are the same because they are tough, independent thinkers, and intelligent. They both are captains of a steamer, work for a trading company, love the sea life, and help someone escape from a problem. For example Marlow helps Kurtz escape from the evilness that is making Kurtz mentally mad and the unnamed character in The Secret Sharer helps a criminal escape to an island. These two novellas are very similar and Conrad does a great job at writing them. So if you like reading poetic European literatures that have a haunting tale, then these two novellas are for you because they will take you into the “heart of darkness.”
S. Bravo
Period 2
Part 2
The main character is Dr. Bernard Rieux, who is also the narrator. Dr. Rieux at first comes off as emotionless and detached, not wanting to see the reality of the plague, "But what are a hundred deaths? When one has served in a war, one hardly knows what a dead man is, after a while. And since a dead man has no substance unless one has actually seen him dead, a hundred million corpses broadcast through history are no more than a puff of smoke in the imagination," pg. 35. His character makes me question whether he is a sane man as he continues to refuse to admit that there is a problem amongst them that will not go away just because you don't acknowledge its presence. However throughout the novel Dr. Rieux progresses and ends his secret as narrator at the end by saying, "All the same, following the dictates of his heart, he has deliberately taken the victims' side and tried to share with his fellow citizen the only certitudes they had in common--love, exile, and suffering. Thus he can truly say there was not one of their anxieties in which he did not share, no predicament of theirs that was not his," pg. 272. This shows that Dr. Rieux did his best to capture the emotions of all of the "victims" that have suffered through the plague with him, and that even though he is telling it; he wanted it to be their story. Another character, Raymond Rambert, is a young journalist, caught in the wrong place at the wrong time. He finds himself trapped within the city gates when the outbreak of the plague is announced, and throughout the novel he tries to escape from the town and even goes as far as to ask smugglers, to help him get him out. However, towards the end of the novel he decides to stay and help out the sanitary guard, with the fight against the plague and helping those who are affected by it, which is the whole town. At first I thought that Rambert was selfish because all he his thoughts were occupied on escaping, even though many others were trying to do so as well, he claimed that, “he doesn’t belong here” to Dr. Rieux, and even though he understood, he still felt that it was a lost cause to try and get out of the town.
The setting or occasion in which the book takes place is in the Algerian city of Oran, where there is an outbreak of the plague, sending the people within the town to exile. The time is in the 1940's, and I would say that if the plague took place here in California, there would be mass panic of course, but we have much more information and technology to deal with things of that nature. Back then the people of Oran did not know what to do therefore they panicked and were filled with anguish and suffering, while they waited day after day trying to make it through the epidemic alive, but now if it happened here, there would be panic at first but, with the knowledge we have now on many diseases, we would control the situation and deal with it, as necessary. The author uses very descriptive language, letting you visualize what he is talking about, "The aspect of the sea, too, changed; its dark-blue translucency had gone and, under the lowering sky, it had steely or silvery glints that hurt the eyes to look at. The damp heat of the spring made everyone long for the coming of the dry, clean summer heat," pg. 29. Especially when the narrator discusses the weather does he use very descriptive language, and also when he tells of the plague and its effects on the people, "But there was darkness also in men's hearts, and he true facts were as little calculated to reassure our townsfolk as the wild stories going round about the burials. The narrator cannot help talking about these burials, and a word of excuse is here in place. For he is well aware of the reproach that might be made him in this respect; his justification is that funerals were taking place throughout this period and, in a way, he was compelled, as indeed everybody was compelled, to give heed to them," pg. 156.
S. Bravo
Period 2
Part 3
The plot of the story is divided into five sections and each section describes a certain period in the novel, stating the events that the plague takes place. The first part talks about what life what like for the people of Oran before the plague, and towards the end of the section, just as the plague happens. The second section reveals how the townspeople feel about the plague and how it affects their lives, whether it be by separating them from a loved one, or simply the thought of being exiled from the outside world, "From now on it can be said that plague was the concern of all of us," pg. 61. The third section describes the worst part of the plague and the many lives that it takes, sending them to the crematorium, " . . . the plague had swallowed up everything and everyone. No longer were there individual destinies; only a collective destiny, made of plague and the emotions shared by all," pg. 151. The fourth section pays more attention to emotion, that of the main characters in the novel. It reveals that even though the plague has taken many lives, the characters choose not to look at the negative and rather try to help those in need and fight against the plague, so that they know that in the end they tried to do something to stop it, even if they are not successful in doing so. The fifth and final section of the novel, states that the plague disappears from once it came. There is a public announcement and there is a celebration amongst the townspeople. In this section the true identity of the narrator is revealed, but I am not going to be the one to do so, you’re just going to have to figure that out on your own.
This book connected with me, in a way that I can now understand that even though I may be going through trouble and I think that its the end of the world, there are those out there who have it harder than I do, and I should be grateful for what I have and for the chances I get in life. I can't recall any film or book that I have read, that can compare to that of this one, though I bet there are some out there, I have yet to read or watch it.
I would recommend this novel to anyone who likes to read about the characters going through and overcoming a disaster that changes their lives in the worst way. This novel will suit those who are patient and will read every word with excitement for what is to come. I was surprised when I realized that I liked this novel, and as I read more and more I was pleasantly surprised that I was reading every word, not wanting to miss a beat of what happened next. I would have to say that Albert Camus' The Plague is filled with many unique aspects that capture the reader's eye and hold it there until the very end.
Csilva
Period 3
PUSH by Sapphire intrigued me with an eye opening, appalling story of Precious Jones . This book was detailed in many disturbing ways at times you had no choice but to set it down for a while, then pick right back up and finish reading it, just to see what is going to happen next. Precious has gone through so many things from getting kicked out of school for being pregnant to being raped by her dad and abused by her mom.
The theme of this book was pain. The life lesson that PUSH shows you is that no matter how hard a life you have, no matter where you can from if you want to succeed you can. If you have people that believe in you, that are there for you no matter what, then you can do anything with their help and support. What I liked about the book was that it was real, nothing was made up. What I disliked about it was that it was hard to read because I the beginning Precious didn’t know how to spell so it was difficult to understand what she was trying to say. PUSH does give you a sense of the place it was set in because Precious describes everything around her and what’s going on around her as well.
The characters in the book are Precious Jones, Miss Rain, Precious mom and dad, her two kids and the students in her Each One Teach One class. Sapphire does make you believe the characters are real people because they are real life people. I do like the characters in the book but at the same time I don’t like them. The ones I really dislike are Precious mom and dad just because they have made her suffer so much. Other than that I like all the other characters. Liking the characters and disliking them do affect they way you feel about the book.
The setting of the book takes place in New York, I believe. It contrasts to the world I know because nothing that Precious has gone through I or anyone that I know have experienced it. It does compare to the world at the same time because there are girls that have suffered the way Precious has and maybe they have suffered things that are much worse. Sapphire does make you feel like you’re a part of setting. I don’t even have to close my eyes to picture myself in the setting. The way Sapphire writes the book, with so many details, that as your reading you can imagine yourself in the place that Precious is at surround by all the things that are happening around her and you feel like you are also experiencing
The plot of the story is plain and simple. A 16 year old African American living in a city, with two kids, and abusive mom and dad. She struggles to make a better life for herself and her kids as well. Precious Jones goes through so many horrible things that it shouldn’t happen to anyone under any circumstances.
I really cant compare this book to any other books that are out there. PUSH does relate to some issues that are currently happening because there are people out there that are going through the same things that precious went through. I, personally don’t relate to the book because I havent experienced this.
In conclusion, I would recommend this book for anyone to read, because its good and its eye opening. Its very hard to stop reading and it is worth it!
F. Alcala
Period 3
To the Nines By: Janet Evanovich
Part 1
Stephanie Plum isn’t your average young adult woman. Stephanie plum is a bounty hunter and is described as Beautiful and sexy. Stephanie isn’t really the best at her job but she always tried her best. She did this job mainly for money and for the rush of hunting down the criminals. In the story To the Nines, by Janet Evanovich, Stephanie and her wild sidekick Lula go on crazy missions to hunt down some of the weirdest criminals. Throughout the story there are many characters that contribute to the humorous plot of the story. Stephanie has to find the suspect before it’s too late with the help of the wacky characters. To the Nines is filled with laughs and suspense to keep you reading till the end.
The main character in the novel is Stephanie Plum the bounty hunter. She was from jersey and did things her way. The characters in the story were great from her trusty sidekick Lula to Joe Morelli the cop who has an on again off again relationship with Stephanie. Her sidekick Lula had attitude towards everyone. She wanted to be a model and was the filing clerk at Vinnie’s. Lula went on all the wild chases with Stephanie and contributed with all the hilarious jokes and Stories during the novel. This story has outrages characters which made me laugh and kept the scheme of the story content. The novel had a vast majority of characters which made the story even more entertaining and fascinating.
Stephanie works for Vinnie a bails bondsman who happens to be her cousin. He posted bail on an illegal immigrant who had an expired work visa. He went missing and Stephanie and Lula set out to find him. There case leads them to Las Vegas which is notorious for petty crime and theft. During their chase they encountered a group of killers who were after them. The ending of the story was predictable but still excellent. To the Nines had a great plot with lots of twist and turns. There were many cases Stephanie and Lula encountered but the main case was where they were searching for Samuel Singh the illegal immigrant.
To the Nines is the ninth book of a fifteen book saga. They all have a similar plot but To the Nines had a very comical and sexual fell to it. Although all of the Janet Evanovich novels are humorous and sexual this one had an amusing plot. What I liked about the story is that it didn’t just revolve around one case. There were numerous and on their mission of finding Mr. Singh the cases added on. The cases aren’t normally like the ones you’d think of bounty hunters doing. They searched for missing dogs along side of missing criminals. The plot of this story is very comical.
F.Alcala
Part 2
When Stephanie and Lula arrive to Las Vegas they forget about the chase but the group of killers is still in the back of Stephanie’s head. Lula is just excited she’s in Vegas for the first time in her life. She can care less about the missing immigrant. When Stephanie starts receiving flowers with pictures of dead bodies they both are frightened but it’s nothing Stephanie can’t handle. The pictures kept them on their game and made them want to capture the killing group even more.
The killing group is a group who kills people to a new extent. These killers gave a new name to kill. They would scare Stephanie with the photos they would send her. When Mr. Singh went missing they popped out of nowhere. Maybe they were the ones to blame for the disappearance of Mr. Singh.
As all these crazy things are going on in Stephanie’s work life, her personal life isn’t any less bizarre. She lives at home with her parents and with no pay check there’s no roof over her head. She has a kooky grandma and a sister who is recently divorced but pregnant and ready to have her baby. Her family just ads on to the list of very entertaining characters.
To the Nines is one of the best books I’ve read. I think everyone should pick up a copy and read it. From the very first sentence to the last Janet kept me hooked. The plot of the story was great and made me want to keep reading. The best part was the characters. They made everything funny and give bounty hunters a crazy twist. I give this book 5 out of 5 stars.
N.Fowler
RASH
By Nick Fowler
In Pete Hautman’s Rash he shows how quick things in this world can change. For example in this novel it is law and rules that the government has put forth. In the book the main character named Bo Marsten basically acts normal by showing his emotions to something he doesn’t like, and is sent away to a working camp because hurting someone’s feelings is illegal. The camp he goes to is in Canada and is owned by Mcdonalds, which is surrounded by hungry polar bears.
This story takes place in the 2070’s and the USA is now considered USSA. Its a time where all normal laws and activities are now considered illegal. Bo’s dad and brother are already sent away to working camps. Once he gets sent away he quickly realizes that life is about trying to cope and adjust as good as you can. “One more verbal assault, one more reckless act, one more instance of self-neglect, and it's off to the rock pile" (68). This explains the simple rules that had to be broken in order to get in trouble.
Pete Hautman’s writing style was to get you to understand how corrupt the world has gotten. I enjoy this this kind of writing because it is easily understood and is quick to the point. To me the narrators voice is very detailed and suttle. To me this book is a little more unique than any other book I have read. For example one unique thing about this book is that its taking place within about sixty years from now. He writes about so many things changing very drastically. “For the next three years, I would be a worker drone for McDonald's. They would use me however they saw fit, and there was nothing I could do about it.” (86-87) That quote is just one of the many things in the story that describe his way of writing. For me this book has some funny parts as well as some parts that make you think. This type of writing keeps you reading more.
In the novel the, main character is Bo Marsten. Hautman does a good job of describing him and the situations around him. Bork is an artificial intelligence that Bo has created in science class for a project. It has come to life and is now operating on its own. To me the author has me feel as if I can relate to Bo quite well. He goes through problems that any normal teen would. “Well, if you look at history, you will see that I was not the first guy to do something really stupid over a girl.” (5-6) To me this is an example of why I and other teens might find these characters easy to understand.
N.Fowler
Rash continued
The setting in this story is obviously a new twist and is very unique. There are so many things you can compare and contrast with this setting to the world we live in now. Its during a time where the nation is under some panic and they choose to punish people for doing normal things that anybody in todays world would do. To me this story isn't a story that you can feel a part of. More like a story that you just follow because its to hard to imagine a world that way. When I read this i could sort of picture the setting, very futuristic and dangerous. The author has provided a place not to far away but very very different. A place where none of us could even fit in because of new laws and rules. “I pledge Allegiance to the Flag of the Safer States of America and to the Republic for which it stands one Nation under Law with Security and Safety for All” To any reader this should sum up what has changed in this book.
Rash was about a teenage kid named Bo that is being blamed for spreading a rash throughout his school. He gets mad and gets sent to a working camp in Canada. There is a illegal football team and he starts playing on that. He wants to get accepted to play on the gold-shirts which get treated much better than the other team. During his hole stay, Bork his science project tracks him down and is now running on his own. Bork tries getting Bo out of prison, but can he trust him? There are many interesting things going on during his prison stay. Many choices arise for Bo in the camp as time goes on.
To me I can not compare this to another book I read. This book is set into the future and has so many weird twists and turns. There can be some issues this book relates to, like the unfairness in prisons today, and with illegal groups like the foot ball team. It doesn't connect with me to strongly on a personal level but I still do relate because life is definitely unfair in many ways. Whether it be serious or unserious, life can throw curve balls, and you need to adjust.
I would recommend this novel to anybody with a tolerance for a little adventure and curiosity. It can be a book for just pure enjoyment, and trying to picture the future being so crazy. I would also say that it was a fun book to read and there was lots of adventure throughout.
J Rivera
Period 4
Separate Peace (part 1)
“I never killed anybody and I never developed an intense level of hatred for the enemy.” Growing up may be one of the most painful things you may endure along the way. In the novel, Separate Peace, written by John Knowles, the author wrote about the internal struggle that faces in adulthood. Knowles vividly described the life of a student and his friend, describing their platonic relationship that manifested to death. The novel begins with the protagonist and his friend involve in many athletic activities. Gene, the main character, admired his friend, Phenias, who “possessed an extra vigor, a heightened confidence in himself, a serene capacity for affection…” something he’s always jealous of. Throughout the novel, the two best friends engage in countless of games, for example, Phenias invented a game called “Blitzball.” The two friends later created a club and as a ritual, they forced many boys, including themselves, to plunge down to a lake from a tree. This action foreshadows the symbolic meaning of the book, which was the jump from childhood to adulthood, and the loss of innocence. This novel remains to captivate my mind with its mind-blowing tale of youth, war, and friendship.
Friendship and Jealousy was the underlying theme of the novel. The novel was written in first person, which allowed me to understand Gene’s personality and thoughts. In the beginning of the novel he establishes that there’s a rivalry between he and Phineas, however they remain to be best friend. However, jealousy reigned ramped in the protagonist’s head, and his friendship with his friend is tested. “I was beginning to see that Phineas could get away with anything. I couldn’t help envying him that a little, which was perfectly normal. There was no harm in envying even your best friend a little”. The novel evidently showed some characteristic of human nature and one of the seven deadly sins, jealousy. “I was beginning to see that Phineas could get away with anything. I couldn’t help envying him that a little, which was perfectly normal. There was no harm in envying even your best friend a little”, this shows the jealousy of Gene, and how he envies his best friend Phineas. The climatic end of the novel showed human nature at its worst and how innocence can be deprive of from jealousy.
J Rivera
Period 4
Separate Peace( part 2)
The author used solemn and a very melancholic tone, which created a sense of seriousness in the novel. Truthfully, at times, the novel seemed very dry and somewhat tedious to read considering the lack of excitement of the dialogue. The author’s humor wasn’t passing through for me, although on occasions the author managed to make me smile, however there’s isn’t really a “ha-ha” moment. However, behind the author’s dry humor, he manages to convey concrete details of imagery of that time. The author painted a picture of how it feels to be living in the 1940’s. He manages to make me feel like I’m in the shoes of the protagonist, living in a boarding school with teenage boys. The narration of the story fundamentally raised the issues concerning war propaganda, and the authors views on it were transmitting through.
The characters however, without a doubt, were the most impressive thing in the novel. Knowles managed to portray them as completely real and dynamic. The main character overall showed the minds of youth and how they engage life. His character develops a love-hate relationship with his best friend, Finny, whom he alternately worships and envies. "He had never been jealous of me for a second. Now I knew that there never was and never could have been any rivalry between us. I was not of the same quality as he", indicate his admiration for his friend. Gene manages to showcase what all human beings feel, jealousy, the green-eyed monster. Knowles manage to show what jealousy can do us and how it can poison friendship. Another character Knowles portrayed perfectly was, Phineas. Phineas is honest, handsome, self-confident, well liked by his peers, and the best athlete in the school "which flowed from his legs to torso around shoulders to arms and full strong neck in an uninterrupted, unemphatic unity of strength”; that’s why Gene idolize him. Towards the latter of the novel, Phineas character evolves from a free-spirited happy-go-lucky teen, to a more serious character going through adulthood. He managed to break his leg which prevented him from sports and enlisting to the army and the thought of his best friend, who he trusts, being the culprit of this misdeed.
The setting of the novel definitely adds another dimension to the novel. The novel takes place during 1920’s to 1940’s where World War I. The author made me feel like I was the protagonist in the book. He used real life emotions portrayed making me feel as if I was him. Knowles presented feelings, which can be translated to emotions that we would express if it were the 1940’s again. He managed to narrate how “the war now, so fast that there were casualties even before we reached it, a mind was clouded” giving us the concrete feelings of resentment to the war. Knowles allows the user to enter back to the past, and be in the shoe of a student during a war.
The plot of the novel is a young man's struggle to attain and uphold such a separate peace. The novel portrays a young men whose soul becomes the battleground of jealousy and hatred. He believed that all his anger and resent should go to his friend Phineas. “You always were a savage underneath…like that time when you knocked Finny out of the tree”, this quote from another character symbolizes Gene’s uncontrollable hatred. His insecurities manage to cause actions upon innocent people—his best friend. Knowles managed to tell the turmoil of adolescence, and the dark forces of human nature that make Gene realize he is his own enemy. Gene and other characters, believed that just like the war in the battlefield, everyone’s enemy is an external force. Phineas, who managed to represents peace, manage to become the victim of Gene’s own insecurity. Towards the end of the novel, you get the sense of Gene’s self-realization of himself and his friend.
M. Arteaga
Period 4
The Catcher in the Rye
Part 1
What would you do if you didn’t go to school? When students are in class they think of all the things they can do when they are not there. In J. D. Salinger’s novel, The Catcher in the Rye, wanting to do whatever he pleases, Holden Caulfield, gets kicked out of another school just before their Christmas break, and has his own life adventure before he is allowed to return home for the holidays. Salinger’s The Catcher in the Rye intrigued me with its detailed story of all the adventures you can have when you’re not at school.
There is only one main characters, and a few side characters that show up through the novel. Holden Caulfield is a great protagonist, because the author shows he is a real, true person. Even though he is a fictional character he symbolizes the youth today. Holden is a very talkative character and admits his flaws, “I have a lousy vocabulary and partly because I act young for my age. I’m seventeen now and sometimes act like I’m thirteen.” (p.8) Immaturity is a big part of everyone’s life, and almost everyone has an immature side to them. He also represents a regular teenager on the way he replies to adults’ advice. When Holden went to visit an old teacher, and the teacher gave him advice about his life. “I have a feeling you’re riding for some kind of a terrible fall. But I don’t honestly know what kind…are you listening to me?” (p. 186) Holden tried to avoid the advice but his teacher continued similar to what teenagers do.
In the novel there are two main themes: the burden of growing up and seeing the phoniness of the world. Both themes are portrayed throughout the whole novel as Holden goes on his adventure as he tries to keep himself occupied while he’s not at school. The first theme is introduced when Holden visits his teacher, Mr. Spencer, and tells him how he failed in school will only lead to failure in life. “Life is a game boy. Life is a game that one plays according to the rules.” (pg 8). When Mr. Spencer tells Holden that life is a game, it is foreshadowing the future of Holden in which he needs to grow up or he will just fail in society. The other theme is phoniness in the real world. In his adventure, Holden sees all the phoniness in the world , but never really tries to fix his phoniness. “I’m standing on the edge of some crazy cliff. What I have to do, I have to catch everybody if they start to go over the cliff—I mean if they’re running and they don’t look where they’re going I have to come out from somewhere and catch them. That’s all I’d do all day. I’d just be the catcher in the rye and all.” (pg. 122). Holden tries to see the world in black and white, but fails since he learns that life is not simple. So he decides to try to take children under his wing so they can see the world in the yes of true adventiure. Unlike the phoniness the world has to offer since all the adults have lost their imagination.
J Rivera
Period 4
Separate Peace (part 3)
This novel was very similar to Catcher in the Rye and All Quiet in the Western Front because it both narrates a coming-of-age tail of adolescent. Both novel portrayed characters that loose their innocence after an incident. In Catcher in the Rye, the main character fall victim under adult society. In All Quiet in the Western Front, the character faces internal problems after he killed a soldier. These novels also help exploit the current issues on war. It told issues like how war propaganda affect the minds of youth, such as Leper after seeing the ski movie. This movie has a slight connection to me personally; my opinions about people seem to relate what Gene felt.
Overall this book was engaging and interesting to read. The ending for me was the best, considering how the plot slowly transition to a dramatic close. I give this book 3.5 out of 5.
M.Arteaga
Period 4
The Cathcher in the Rye
Part 2
Salinger’s style is unique from that of other authors, because he writes the novel in the eyes of students that are just trying to have fun and not deal with the stress of the real world. His style shows what kids have to deal with at school. “They have this day, that all the jerks that graduated from Pencey around 1776 come back and walk all over the place…”(p. 168). Just like in school there are events where the student body doesn’t want to participate but they have to do it. Salinger shows that kids don’t want to be spending their time listening to all the things adults have to say.
The novel doesn’t really have a setting, since it doesn’t have detailed descriptions about the places that the events are taking place in. As you read the book you can literally felt like you’re having a conversation with Holden Caulfield as he tells you about his life. The reader can feel like he/ her is literarily having a conversation when the author makes a statement towards the reader. “I’m not going to tell you my whole god dam autobiography or anything. I’ll just tell you about this madman stuff that happened to me around last Christmas.” (p. 1) The things Holden talks about makes you feel like you are next to him, and he is sharing a funny yet eye opening story about his life. “It was freezing cold, and I took my red hunting hat out of my pocket and put it on-I didn’t give a damn how I looked. I even put the earlaps down.” (p. 88) The reader gets feeling that it was cold, because many book would have just stated it was freezing cold, but this book took it to the extent that the character pulled out his hunting hat and even put the earflaps down to cover his ears, because it was so cold. “It was lousy in the park. The sun still wasn’t out and there didn’t look like there was anything in the park except dog crap and globs of spit and cigar butts from old men.” (p. 118) The setting matched the way Holden was feeling, because he wasn’t in such a great mood at this point in the book and the park being trashy just combined with his attitude to make it one scene instead of a happy scene with a terrible attitude. The detailed scenery provided helps the reader get the image of where the novel is taking place since the setting move through out the plot.
There is really no main plot to the story. It’s just a recall of someone’s life written down on a a piece of paper, almost like an autobiography. “Where I want to start telling is the day I left Pencey Prep.” (p. 2) He started off with why he left Pencey, and throughout the whole story there was almost always a reference to Pencey. He talked about his school and his friends at school throughout the whole book. “I’d start hitchhiking my way out West…where it was very pretty and sunny where nobody’d know me and I’d get a job.” (p. 198) His plan was to run away so he could live how he pleased, and not have to worry about anything else. He would be living by his rules under his household. “That’s all I’m going to tell about. I could probably tell you (more) but I don’t feel like it.” (p. 213) His story ended with him returning home for his winter break. He didn’t talk about the way his parents reacted or what he did after that, so it made me a little disappointed that the story just ended, but it ended with him opening up his heart which really made for a good ending.
M.Arteaga
Period 4
The Catcher in the Rye
Part 3
This novel is very similar to J. M. Barrie’s novel, Peter Pan. In Peter Pan the kids travel to Neverland where they try to stay kids forever. Just like in The Catcher in the Rye, Holden does not want to grow up, but realizes he has to just like Wendy and her siblings when they realize they have to go back to the real world and grow up. Both novels share the theme of realizing you have to grow up, since life is not all fun and games.
I would recommend The Catcher in the Rye to anyone who enjoys a story where you can imagine yourself in the plot, as well as to anyone who enjoys having adventures and having fun all the time. Since the novel is almost like a bucket list, its an adventure some one enjoys. The Catcher in the Rye is a great novel that anyone can enjoy.
D.Valdovinos
Period 4
Febuary 1, 2010
Their Eyes Were Watching God (part 1)
Hurston’s novel Their Eyes Were Watching God showcases the intimacy of everyday life and the importance of new beginnings. Janie Crawford, a woman who strives for independence and searches for the true meaning of love, comes back home to Eatonville after her (much younger) husband dies in the after math of a horrible natural disaster. Hurston’s novel captivated me, written during the Harlem Renaissance; it really showcased Hurston’s ability to draw the reader in immediately with her great use of imagery and insight to societal norms of the period. I would recommend this novel to anyone who is a romantic or just wants to learn more about African American Literature and culture.
Three themes that are found in this novel are independence, the importance of age, and racism. After Jody’s death Janie was free and suitors were waiting for her correspondence but Janie confides in her friend Pheoby and says “Tain’t dat ah worries over Joe’s death, Pheoby. Ah just love this freedom” (93). Like a freed caged bird Janie is experiencing the freedom that she was not allowed to have while her husband was alive. As a result she neglects potential suitors because she no longer wants to be caged up. When Teacake (her next husband) enters her life she doesn’t feel threatened because “In the first place he looked too young for her. Must be around twenty five and here she was around forty” (100). The dynamic in her relationship changed and she became the older partner; this change caused Janie to consider that Teacake might be after money and not love. This turned out to be false and Teacake became Janie’s true love and repaired previous mistreatment. Hurston shows the self-hatred of African people through Mrs. Turner who so evidently “took black folk(s) as a personal affront to herself” and goes on to say “Look at me! Ah isn’t got no flat nose and liver lips. Ah’m uh featured woman. Ah got white folks features on my face. Still and all Ah got tu be lumped in wid all de rest. It ain’t fair. Even if dey don’t take us in wid de whites, dey oughta make us uh class tuh ourselves” (142). Hurston gives a deeper background into the psyche of the wounded African American people; this character is a great example of the previous injuries that were committed against black people by white people. This discrimination leads other, lighter, African Americans to hate darker people of the same race.
Throughout the novel Hurston illustrates Janie’s longing to be at one with nature as well as with herself. This simple description of the moon “soon its amber fluid was drenching the earth, and quenching the thirst of the day (99)” couldn’t be made more beautiful. Hurston writes very poetically and describes nature as it own universe. In this passage Hurston writes “her breath was gusty and short. She knew things that nobody had ever told her. For instance, the words of the
D. Valdovinos
Period 4
Their Eyes Were Watching God (part 2)
trees and the wind. She often spoke to the falling seed and said ‘Ah hope you fall on soft ground” because she had heard seeds saying that to each other as they passed” (25.) One can’t help but be swept away by this pure and simple delight Janie partakes in. Such spirituality is always on display in Hurston’s novel: she writes beautifully and is great in selecting her diction. One of Hurston’s main focuses is nature; this passage exemplifies this theme “she stretched on her back beneath the pear tree soaking in the alto chant of visiting bees, the gold of the sun and the panting breath of the breeze when the inaudible voice of it all came to her. She saw the dust-bearing bee sink into the sanctum of a bloom; the thousand sister-calyxes arch to meet the love embrace and the ecstatic shiver of the tree from root to tiniest branch creaming in every blossom and frothing with delight” (11). Hurston does an amazing job of showing the intimacy in what someone would see as commonplace. She uses the relationship between the bee and blossom to illustrate the romance that is created in nature and that between a man and a woman. Hurston’s novel is a great example of the saying “a picture is worth a thousand words” but instead of the picture Hurston gives the reader those thousand words making them very satisfied.
Every character is used to represent a different character trait Jody is power and manipulation, Teacake is honesty, and Janie is independence. Jody controlled every aspect of Janie life and “he slapped Janie until she had a ringing sound in her ears” this made him feel powerful (72). He wasn’t man enough to speak with words so he spoke with physical violence. His heightened view of himself did not allow him to love anyone but himself and this makes him a very unattractive character in the novel. Janie was awakened by Teacake who “had more good nature under his toe-nails than they had in their so-called Christian hearts” (126). Teacake treated Janie correctly and proved to be the greatest man in her life. Their relationship ended very abruptly and unhappily but when Teacake died every word that had to be said was and he left the world in peace, leaving Janie alone once again. Even when she was in a relationship Janie strived to be independent and “She saw no reason to rush at changing things around. She would have the rest of her life to do as she pleased” (89). Both of her relationships before Teacake were disastrous and she wanted to be free of them and when that happened the next relationship she was in worse than the one before it. Janie is ultimately alone and she decides what she wants to do with her life. These characters are very believable and they make the plot more believable.
This novel consists of the retelling of Janie, the protagonist, after she comes “back from burying the dead. Not the dead f sick and ailing with friends at the pillow and the feet. She had come back from the sodden and the bloated; the sudden dead, their eyes flung open in judgment” (1). Janie comes home to Eatonville were her late husband was the mayor and she lived at his side suffering in silence. As she enters the town the townspeople gossip about her and the fact that
D.Valdovinos
Period 4
Their Eyes Were Watching God (part 3)
“Janie’s first dream was dead, so she became a woman” reminded me of Iris the protagonist in Blind Assassin by Margret Atwood. Iris has to marry young so that her family won’t go broke she is forced to trade her dreams and the normalcy of her life for a marriage ripping at the seams. Marriage also seems to be detrimental to both Janie and Iris because once they marry they are no longer happy.
In conclusion the imagery that Hurston uses alone intrigues the reader and in unison with the plot it’s a great novel. It is a pleasure to read and with every page Hurston created a new image in my mind. Not only does this book encompass the role of nature in a person’s life it also gives insight to society in the early nineteenth century. This was one of the best books I have read and I would recommend it to anyone.
JLyons
Period 4
Atonement
One sweltering day on the English countryside and one girl’s childish decision changed the course of many lives forever. Atonement follows that young girl, Briony, from that fateful day in 1935 up until she is an old woman in 1999 as she deals with the guilt of her actions and attempts to move forward with her life. Ian McEwan’s novel, Atonement, grabbed hold of my attention with its fascinating plot, descriptive details, and mesmerizing characters.
The theme of Atonement is a very obvious one. It is to think before you take action and never act out of spite. After having seen her sister and Robbie in the closet and having read his intimate note to her, there seemed to be no other option to who raped her cousin. “Briony said it again, this time without the trace of a question. It was a statement of fact. It was Robbie” (p. 156). Her testimony was what sent him to jail, caused him to join the military, and kept Cecelia and him apart. However, as she got older, she realized the rashness of her judgment. When asked if she thought he did it then, she said, “Yes, yes and no. I wasn’t certain” (p.323). She had no true confidence that it was actually Robbie, but her youthful intuition made the decision for her. Eventually, after learning that Lola and Paul Marshall, a man staying at the house on the night she committed her crime, had been married, she realized that “It was Paul Marshall” (p. 327). At this point there was nothing that she could do about fixing the past, and she lived without atonement for the rest of her life.
Ian McEwan’s style is very interesting in Atonement. The book is entirely in third person omniscient, but it switches from the viewpoint of multiple characters. It is split up into four books, the first being told in multiple perspectives, the second being told from Robbie’s, and the last two being told from Briony’s. The author’s style uses lots of foreshadowing, like leading up to Marshall being the criminal by his talk with Lola earlier in the story. “Those trousers suit you especially well I think” (p. 57) was one slightly creepy thing that the older man told the thirteen year old. Another tool the author employs is flashbacks. When Robbie was in the war, he once flashbacked to “a day in June 1932, all the more beautiful for coming suddenly, after a long spell of rain and wind” (p. 215). There are also flashbacks made by Emily Tallis of her childhood. One interesting style that the author used was a false happy ending. There is one scene where Briony visits her sister and Robbie in London and is able to apologize and “retract her evidence” (p.326). However, this was not how the story really played out, though I won’t give away the ending.
The characters in this novel seemed very lifelike in their dialogue and their reactions. None were extremely over-the-top or had outrageous personalities, but their natural attitudes trap the reader in their stories. The Tallis clan is a superb portrayal of a wealthy family from that time period, with the overworked father who stays in the city overnight, to the mother with migraines, and the young girl attempting to find some excitement at her country estate. The relationship of Cecilia and Briony is also very convincing. Cecilia would, “rescue (Briony) from a nightmare and take her into her own bed” (p. 330) and Briony wanted to be just like her older sister. Robbie Turner’s characterization is also very lifelike. His struggle to forgive Briony or to hate her displays emotions that nearly anyone would feel if in his situation. He knew that “It was not reasonable or just to hate Briony, but it helped” (215). Finally, the description of Lola leads up to her later life as a socialite perfectly. As a thirteen year old girl she says things like, “It’s hopeless. I’m nowhere near ready’, she said, close to tears again. ‘ I haven’t even started on my face” (p.113).
JLyons
Period 4
Atonement Part 2
The setting in Atonement changes four times throughout the novel. The first setting is in the countryside of England at the Tallis’ mansion in 1935. The author uses imagery to describe the details of the estate so well that it feels like you are sitting by the fountain looking out at the island. The house is described as, “barely forty years old, bright orange brick, squat, lead-paned baronial Gothic” (p. 18). The second setting is in on the forefront of World War 2 as Robbie retreats from Dunkirk. Again, the author’s imagery is able to explore the horrors of war and add an entirely new genre of people who would enjoy his book. One scene describes an image that would haunt Robbie for the rest of his like. “The leg was twenty feet up, wedged in the first forking of the trunk, bare, severed cleanly above the knee. From where they stood there was no sign of blood or torn flesh. It was a perfect leg, pale, smooth, small enough to be a child’s” (p.180). The third setting is London during the war as it follows Briony through her trials as a nurse. The setting is not described very often, except for her walk around the town on her day off. “She left the little park behind, and passed a small factory whose thrumming machinery made the pavement vibrate” (p. 302). The final setting is back at the Tallis home, but in 1999, after it had been renovated into a hotel. Briony describes the island, where she used to play and where she had “seen” Lola and Robbie as “The island, which of course was no longer that, was a long mound of smooth grass, like an immense ancient barrow, where rhododendrons and other shrubbery were growing” (p.343).
The plot of Atonement a few events in the character’s lifetime, but those events are able to capture the reader’s attention and hold it there throughout the novel. Even with the author’s foreshadowing and lines like, “Within the half hour, Briony would commit her crime”; the reader is still surprised as the story twists and turns (p. 246). Also, the story leaves much of what happened to Cecilia and Robbie later in life in the dark until the end. “Wake me before seven. I promise you, you won’t hear another word from me” is all you know about Robbie for almost one hundred pages (250). Ultimately, the plot is what highlights the character’s and their actions are what reveal their true nature.
There are many movies and books that are similar to Atonement. One movie is Shawshank Redemption, which is similar because of the man being falsely accused and sent to prison, much like Robbie Turner. You can feel the anger and hatred for their accuser, yet their ability to forgive and live with what happened to them. Another book that Atonement has similar aspects to is Dear John Nicholas Sparks, because of the love letters that Cecilia and Robbie send each other while he is at war. Those pieces of paper are what tide each of them over during that difficult time. A final connection that could be made with a novel is Emily Bronte’s Wuthering Heights. In both stories, there are lovers who are separated due to the people that surround them.
Overall, I found Atonement by Ian McEwan to be an excellent book that I would recommend to anyone. Men may be turned off at first because it can be considered a “love story”, but there are so many more aspects to the story than simply the romance. There is also, war, family issues, and insight into human character.
Part 1
A.Rios
Twisted by Laurie Halse Anderson
Period. 3
My book is called Twisted and the author is Laurie Halse Anderson. This book is packed with high school drama, parties, and fighting. It is ideal for the typical high school girl or by who likes reading about high school troubles. Tyler is put through some really hard things and he had to make some really hard choices. From saying no to sex with his dream girl to not committing suicide. This book has it all. It’s a must read for teens and they wont be disappointed.
A theme of this book is to stand up for yourself. Tyler lets everyone push him around and makes himself an easy target. After everything got to the point where it couldn’t possible get any worse he finally stood up for himself against Chip and “his angel” Bethany. From then on his life only got better. When someone has a bully or a problem, they need to fix it or get rid of it before it gets out of hand. Tyler’s situation got really out of hand to the point where he thought suicide was the answer. He knew that suicide was never the answer so he looked deep inside himself and found the right answer. He did the right thing and good things happened to him after.
This book was styled specifically for teens. I liked how it felt as if I went to the school with Tyler and was there with him threw it all. At times this book can be funny but over all it is pretty serious. Every problem Tyler faces whether it be with his family or school, he’s always mature about it. The author gives very detailed descriptions of the school and the home, therefore, making me feel like I’ve been there before. The author’s voice is like an adult that, when he was a teenager, went through a lot of problems and is in forming the reader of his mistakes and to not make the same ones. This book is about teenage problems and school drama. It is very different from the other books I have read.
The main characters are Tyler, Yoda, Chip, Bethany, and Hannah. I like Tyler because he was a tough guy at heart. I can relate to him because people judge you when they don’t even know you. Yoda is very quiet and nerd-like. He got his nickname Yoda because he loved Star Wars so much that he actually spoke like Yoda. Chip is the mean bully that’s picked on Tyler and Yoda throughout high school. He played football and I didn’t like him because he’s one of those guys that if you were to see him at school you would want to punch him so he could finally leave people alone and stop being so annoying. Bethany was Tyler’s biggest crush and “his angel”. She was pretty, rich, and somewhat smart. She was also Chip’s little sister. Hannah was a freshman and came into the high school looking like she was trying to hard to fit in. She wore really short shorts or skirts and midriff shirts. She was Tyler’s little sister and Yoda’s soon to be girlfriend.
Part 2
A.Rios
Twisted by Laurie Halse Anderson
Period 3
The setting of this book is stressed and depressing at times. To some teenagers the find high school to be exactly that; depressing and stressful. They paint there own paths but to other teenagers it’s the best being with friends, the girls and boys, the drama, it really depends. It’s a rollercoaster going through high school. You either find a way to enjoy it or you don’t. The author makes you feel like you’re a part of the setting because of all the details she uses. She describes everything so that if you were to close your eyes you’d be about to play the book as if it were a movie in your mind. I found that opinions of the setting differ from reader to reader.
In this book Tyler struggled through the first 3 years of high school. His senior year quickly changes after his “fowl deed”. The stress of his little sister coming in a freshman piles onto his need and want for his love Bethany Milbury and the bully Chip with his other football boys. Everyone’s perspective of him changes and all of a sudden he went from nerd-boy to Tyler “Hulk” Miller. His father is a total deadbeat and is work consumed and anger filled. His mom always makes excuses up for why his father is always so stressed and angry. She was basically a single mother because the father would never come out of the basement except to eat. When Tyler goes against his parole to go to a party with Bethany he is forced to face a choice between lust or the right thing to do. Bethany is drunk and wants Tyler and Tyler defiantly wants her but there’s something stopping him. He doesn’t want her in the condition she’s in.
I wouldn’t know a book to compare this book to but this book is very good. I grantee it will connect with any reader on a personal level as it has with me. It’s an interesting read and I highly recommend it to anyone who likes books about high school, parties, drama, and teenage problems. Read it!
Y.Macias
Per.2
A Child Called It
By Dave Pelzer
PART ONE
“With no dreams, I found that words like hope and faith were only letters randomly put together into something meaningless”. This quote from “A Child Called It” shows how Dave, the main character in the story is destroyed and has lost faith in life. This memoir is a heartbreaking story of a young boy looking for love. His violently abusive mother beats him uncontrollably, with the stench of alcohol in her breath, while his so called hero of dad and his four brothers refuse to help. The theme of this remarkable book is surviving horrible abuse from ones parents and the ability of the human spirit to overcome remarkable odds. Dave Pelzer’s “A Child Called It” is an outstanding moving story about a young boy’s courage to survive. His courage and determination saved him from all of the suffering that he endured at such a young age.
Dave Pelzer’s style in this memoir is unique in the sense that it is based on true facts of his life. David himself tells the story in first person through a series of true events. I like the author’s style because it is unique and interesting because the events aren’t just simple creations of the author’s mind, but chosen from many memories for a specific purpose. The main mood in the story is basically serious because it talks about horrific abuse in a child’s life. The style in which the book is written and the detail put in it gives you a sense of the place it’s set. At times I caught myself feeling as if I was in his position ready to be beaten. The style of the author is also unique because he wrote this book for a significant purpose as well, with his style of writing he wants to inform readers about the cruelty of child abuse. Dave’s story is one of the worst child abuse cases in California’s history.
This book is based on the author’s child life from ages 4 to 12. David Pelzer is the main character and narrator of this story. Through out the course of his abuse at the hands of mother, about 8 years, David undergoes drastic changes physically and psychologically.
“I came to believe that for me, there was no God.” this quote that David says shows his loss of hope and faith in God because of the unbelievable cruelty from his Mother. Another main character is Catherine Pelzer, which David refers to as Mother.
“Mother rammed her finger into my mouth, as if she wanted to pull my stomach up through my throat”. This is a quote from David as he refuses to vomit Mother shoves her finger down his mouth to force him, this shows how cruel and heartless his Mother is to him. The author describes her in ways that actually makes you have hatred for her. Stephen Pelzer, Dave’s Father is another character in the story. Unlike Mother Dave’s Father does not beat him, he just stands and watches as his son is hopelessly beaten. “Don’t worry, some day you and I will both get out of this madhouse.” This is a quote Father told David as he leaves for work. Father would always give David hope saying that one day they would run off together, that never came true. The characters in the story are so well described that you get a sense that you actually know them.
The setting of the story takes place around the mid 1960s. Dave grew up in a middle-class suburb of San Francisco. His father was a firefighter, his work would keep him away from home for days at a time. Mother was a stay at home mom and an mentally disturbed alcoholic. Mother started abusing David when he was 4 years old. As she cared for the rest of the family, David was starved, beaten, burned, and referred to as “the boy” and eventually “it”. Along the story she comes up with “games” to torment David. The setting of this story compares to the world I around me because many children are being abused by their parents in their very household. As the author describes the setting and the tricks mother plays on David you can picture every aspect that the author points out.
Y.Macias
Per.2
A Child Called It
By Dave Pelzer
PART TWO
The plot of this story makes it probably the most strongest book I’ve ever read. David is the oldest of a growing family and is horrible abuses and beaten by his mother. Mother starves him and only feeds him scraps of food if he finishes his chores on time. Mother made David eat his brother’s feces, drink ammonia, and would hold his arm over a gas stove. Not only did Mother abuse of David physically but also physiologically. “You are a nobody! An It! You are nonexistent! You are a bastard child! I hate you and I wish you were dead! Do you hear me? Dead!” By calling him an “It” David felt like Mother had stripped him of his very existence. Dave internalizes his mother’s hatred and believed he was unworthy of love. Father, who David sees as his hero, sneaks him food and helps him with chores but this isn’t often. Father mainly stepped back and watched his wife abuse of their son.
This book can relate to many current events and stories. As said before Dave’s story is one of the worst child abuse cases in California. Millions of children are being victimized by a tragic epidemic of child abuse and neglect. David’s story will help people understand that the child abuse crisis goes far beyond excessive spanking. It is known that every year hundreds of thousands of helpless children are being brutalized and tortured physically, emotionally, and sexually. Fortunately this book doesn’t relate or connect with me on a personal level. Hopefully this book is able to help the children and people who relate to David’s story.
This is by far one of the best books I’ve ever read. This captivating story made me want to not put the book down. The heart wrenching book about a helpless child is interesting and moving. I have read this book 3 times and still have the urge to read it many more times. I recommend this book to anyone. This is a book that anyone can read and find it unbelievably captivating. The plot the setting and the results of the story are amazing. Many people recommended this book to me, and after I read it I realized why.
S. Rios
Period 4
10/31/10
Little Women
By: Louisa May Alcott
Part One
Up until the Civil War in the United States men dominated most of society and women where wholly dependent on men. Many women had independent minds yet since they where meant to keep their place in society women kept quiet and did their duties. Little Women by Louisa May Alcott is the story about a family of four loving sisters who battle societies demands and expectations by either conforming to the vanities of life or by learning that money is not everything and that even little women have a say in both matrimonial and societal issues. All in all Little Women by Louisa May Alcott is an agreeable novel aimed at young girls and women who wish to excite their imagination with happily ever afters and are willing to shed a few teardrops.
Along with Alcott's general happy feeling novel she braids in the reoccurring theme of hard work. Alcott uses hard work in the novel by making the young ladies fatherless for a time. This causes the girls to work hard because as oppose to the rich beginning the children had in New England before the Civil War they are now forced to work in jobs they would prefer not to have. Meg, Joe, and fragile little Beth must work in order to help their mother, Mrs. March, keep the household up and running. Something that Alcott does very well is that she has the characters start out without the understanding of what hard work is and has them grow and evolve into young women who eventually learn their lesson as to why hard work is so important in life. Even if one is not the richest and best dressed in society. An example of this is in the beginning of the novel when the four young ladies are seated around the living room complaining about how, “Christmas wont be Christmas without any presents” (page 3). Very quickly after uttering these words the four young women are forced to eat their words when on the day of Christmas their mother explains to them that there is a homeless woman with children who have nothing to eat. At this Mrs. March asks her daughters if they would be kind enough to give the children and their mother the breakfast originally made for Meg, Joe, Beth, and Amy. The girls through doing this act of kindness learn that it is better to give rather than receive, and that they should be thankful for what they have because there are those who have less than the March family.
I enjoy how the novel has a way of making the reader feel as if they have grown up with the March family. It is as if one has watched the family go through the good and bad times while reading the book. This is partially because the novel takes place over a fifteen year span. Alcott did this in order to fully show how the young girls have grown to be young women and how these young women have triumphed over the trials put before them in order to succeed and live maybe not the life they had originally planned for themselves but a happy and satisfying one. This is evident towards the end where Alcott states that, “ touched to the heart, Mrs. March could only stretch out her arms, as if to gather her children and grandchildren to herself, and say, with face and voice of motherly love, gratitude, and humility-- ' Oh, my girls, however long you may live, I never can wish you a greater happiness than this!'”(page 578). This quote makes the reader visualize what is happening and it makes the reader feel the same amount of appreciation and happiness that Mrs. March feels herself and those around her.
S. Rios
Period 4
10/31/10
Little Women
By: Louisa May Alcott
Part Two
As stated in the paragraph previous to this one Alcott makes the reader feel as if the characters are real in the novel and it makes the reader picture in his or her mind whether or not they would like the character. For example towards the beginning of the novel I tended to dislike Amy, the youngest of the March sisters. This was due to the fact that towards the beginning Alcott made Amy sound like a spoiled child who had no care in the world except that of money. Yet as the novel proceeded I began to become more fond of Amy as if she were a real person not just a fictional character in a book I read; especially when Amy declares that she “...is truly trying not to be selfish anymore” and shows this by giving her mother a gift for Christmas in which she spent all her money that she was originally going to use to buy herself a paint set (page 18). The growth not only of Amy but of the entire family throughout the novel makes the reader feel as if the Marches are continuously growing and becoming more close knit as the time goes by.
Something to notice and critique about throughout the novel is that the time period is a bit of a blur. For example the reader can make out that the novel begins at around 1861 because Mr. March is away fighting for the Union during the Civil War that broke out in the United States. Other than that one does not hear of a specific start or end time throughout the novel, which can be tough because it makes it hard to imagine why certain societal matters are the way they are.
The plot, or event that is used to show the theme is quite simple in Alcott's book. The novel is about a family of four daughters who must go through many trials along with a close friend and neighbor in order to find the true meaning to life and become happy with what can achieve by working hard. The girls and Laurie, their neighbor, learn the meaning of life by losing one of their own. They lose young Beth due to an unidentified illness early in the novel and this lose of family greatly changes the outcome of the girls perspective towards one another and the future that they once sought changes as well, because they find the nice things and money never did buy the happiness and good nature that Beth held together.
Although this is a very good book it leads me to think about it as if it was a less articulate version of Pride and Prejudice by Jane Austen. As if this book was written for younger children so they could understand the same meaning that Pride and Prejudice brought to the table. There are many comparisons, for example: both stories contain sisters who seek to get married yet through obstacles in life they learn that marriage and social standings aren't everything in life, both novels also contain a rebel sister and a conformist sister. Elizabeth Bennet and Joe March being the rebel extreme and Lydia Bennet and Amy March being the conformist extreme. When I read Little Women I felt more of a connection simply because I know how losing someone really important can change your perspective on life.
When all is said and done this book has a good story line and a well thought out underlying theme but that's about it. The book is simply good nothing more and nothing less. Do to that I would recommend this novel for young girls above the age of ten but no older than the age of at least fifteen unless they are simply reading this novel for entertainment and does not wish to get anything intellectual out of the novel. So on saying that I would give this novel three out of five stars.
S. Stumpf
Period 4
Part 1-Brave New World
“’And that,’ put in the Director sententiously, ‘that is the secret of happiness and virtue---liking what you’ve got to do. All conditioning aims at that: making people like their inescapable social destiny,” (p. 16). Brave New World, by Aldous Huxley, communicates a bizarre, twisted, captivating, and thought-provoking world that strikes the reader down into a stupor of wonder and bewilderment. Huxley creates such a shocking work by ingeniously incorporating reason and metaphor into Brave New World’s plot.
Brave New World focuses on two central themes of human nature: our stupendous ability to respond to conditioning and our intense drive to find distraction. One example of societal conditioning is, “…and Delta Children wear khaki. Oh no, I don’t want to play with Delta children. And Epsilons are still worse. They’re too stupid to be able to read or write. Besides, they wear black, which is such a beastly colour. I’m so glad I’m a Beta,” (p. 27). This is a depiction of children being talked to in their sleep by a machine for months at a time, solidifying class distinctions and opinions. An example of humanity’s drive for distraction is, “But old clothes are beastly,” continued the untiring whisper. “We always throw away old clothes. Ending is better than mending, ending is better than mending, ending is better…,” (p. 49). Consumerism is emphasized to the maximum by the powers that be and distraction is used as a method of mass sedation. What is especially poignant and frightening about these two themes is how prevalent and relevant they are today.
The author’s style is interesting, but inconsistent. Huxley starts off the novel with a certain experimental tone, with sentences like, “A squat grey building of only thirty-four stories. Over the main entrance the words, CENTRAL LONDON HATCHERY AND CONDITIONING CENTRE, and, in a shield, the World State’s motto, COMUNNITY, IDENTITY, STABILITY,” (p. 3) which give the setting of the chapter abruptly and directly. In the following chapter he jumps around between a tour of the quoted facility and some of the conditioning phrases employed by the sleep-conditioning system, but anything unorthodox besides the beginning sentence of the chapter fizzles out through the course of the book.
The characters of the book are difficult to talk about clustered and generally. Lenina, the prominent female character of the novel, operates in extremely odd ways due to the intense foreign conditioning force of this futuristic society. It seems that all of the characters represent a single power or archetype of humanity, with Lenina the Desirable being sex, Bernard the Different being discontent, John the Outcast Indian being passion and action, and Linda the Pregnant being the Great Mother. One excerpt that exemplifies this archetypal characterization is, “His heart seemed to have disappeared and left a hole. He was empty. Empty, and cold, and rather sick, and giddy. He leaned against the wall to steady himself. Remorseless, treacherous, lecherous…Like drums, like men singing for the corn, like magic, the words repeated and repeated themselves in his head. From being cold he was suddenly hot. His cheeks burnt with the rush of blood, the room swam, and darkened before his eyes. He ground his teeth. ‘I’ll kill him, I’ll kill him, I’ll kill him,’ he kept saying. And suddenly there were more words.
When he is drunk asleep, or in his rage
Or in the incestuous pleasure of his bed…” (p. 133).
This excerpt describes John reading Shakespeare for the first time and moving into the realm of hate and passion. This quote, its singular focus and one-dimensional characterization encompasses the nature of all the characters in the novel.
S. Stumpf
Period 4
Part 2-Brave New World
The setting of Brave New World is nothing too outrageous or outstanding. The story takes place in 2540 A.D. or 632 A.F. The A.F. stands for “After Ford” and is keyed to the year 1908, which is when Henry Ford introduced the “Model T” automobile. The supreme power figurehead in the novel is referred to as “Our Ford.” Ford is so frequently used in this text due to his perfection of the industrial method of the assembly line, which is how humans are grown in the setting of Brave New World. Besides a jump into the future, a complete corporate world, and the civilian use of helicopters, the setting is nothing too fantastic, although it is satisfactory.
The plot of Brave New World revolves around the understanding of the dominating society of the time period and the eventual destruction of it. It follows the meanderings of Lenina, an attractive female, Bernard, a skinny, moody egotist, and John, a Caucasian outcast on an Indian reservation who was born from a woman’s womb (profound and disturbing to the people of the time period because humans are grown exclusively in test tubes). It is the characters who are discontented with society’s operations that the story follows, with Lenina acting as a grounding totem for a constant comparison and conflict between the way society should be and the way society is, as she’s alright with the way of the world. The story is so wonderful and bizarre due to the reasoning Huxley implants behind this society’s functions. It almost all makes sense. There is one crucial component to the plot that limits the novel’s timelessness and believability. The society uses a drug called Soma which in reality is an unknown shamanic hallucinogen employed by holy men in pre-Egyptian times. Soma’s identity is never explicitly described in the text, although its reasons for ingestion are. “Why don’t you take soma when you have these dreadful ideas of yours. You’d forget all about them. And instead of feeling miserable, you’d be jolly. So jolly,” (p. 92). The use of soma is employed and encouraged in the story because it reinforces conditioning systems and processes and keeps the population distracted and therefore sedated. The way that the drug is described in the text, Huxley’s well-known fascination with hallucinogens (The Doors of Perception), and the fact that it’s called soma allows one to confidently conclude that the drug is hallucinogenic. The problem here is that hallucinogens act on the mind in the opposite direction as wished by Huxley in the novel. Psychedelics strip away conditioned systems and give the psychic voyager sight into a world without boundaries, which in turn forces him to remake himself. The use of hallucinogens in this society would be catastrophic.
Brave New World is a work that is so relevant to present circumstances it makes the mind gape in wonder at Aldous Huxley’s powers of foresight. The society of the novel may at first seem more extreme than Western civilization’s prospects, but when one looks and probes deeper the two universes start to coalesce into mere reflections of each other. Distraction, conditioning, and addictions plague both worlds and the mirror that is Brave New World sheds light upon our own that is most frightening.
Brave New World is a work that has its force and soul in its relevancy and reasoning. It is not a tale of epic proportions or a rhetorical masterpiece, but it shakes the mind so violently that only vibrations of strange and wonder can exist without toppling to the ground. The power of this novel should not be underscored for inciting human, external or internal, reflection.
P. Schow
AP English
Period 4
1/31/10
Part 1/3
I enjoyed David Guterson’s novel, Snow Falling on Cedars, because it carries an intriguing plot with many emotions and deep character development throughout the entire story. Guterson wrote a superbly written book which shows that communities can move past prejudice, racism, and hate to do the right things for people. The book, although fiction, discusses true events which helped shape the cultural differences throughout this country. Guterson teaches valuable life lessons to the reader throughout his book, and helps us understand why cultural boundaries are usually necessary, although sometimes unfair. The book deals a sense of respect for others and respect for self. By strongly proving his point through thorough diction, Guterson wrote an inspiring and inviting novel which will be remembered for years.
Throughout his book, Guterson highlights the fact that prejudice separates human beings and that true knowledge is stronger than facts. Because two separate races both occupy the small island of San Pedro, they must come in contact with each other and interact as one community. This is not always true because the Americans look down upon the Japanese families who inhabit the island. Because Pearl Harbor was attacked nine years earlier, the Americans still feel bitter resentment towards the Japanese although none of the neighbors have done any harm. The Americans show prejucice towards the Japs, separating them from the rest of the island’s occupants. Although they live and function together, the two races live in two worlds apart. Guterson shows that cultural boundaries set racial differences but they shouldn’t separate people. In his book, Guterson also explains that human knowledge and inference must be used to make a true decision. Facts only go so far, and it is the duty of the human to see the truth in things beyond the facts. Facts are shown to be one sided but knowledge is the truth, and only brings about the truth. In the book, the jury and judge must take hold of their knowledge to see that Kabuo Miyamoto is not a murderer and set him free.
Part 2/3
During his entire literary work, Guterson writes in a serious yet understandable style. The story is seen through the eyes of Ishmael Chambers, a local reporter who individually runs the island’s only newspaper. Ishmael sees the truth in all things and towards the end, he moves past his resentment and scorn towards the Japanese to help set an innocent man free. The tone that Guterson uses throughout his book helps the reader to become more involved in the story line. The serious nature fits very soundly. Also, Guterson uses a formal style with many literary devices, such as alliterations and similes to help him write a stronger book.
Throughout this novel, Guterson developed his characters very thoroughly and realistically. I enjoyed reading about the characters in this book because they were very believable and I could relate to them in many circumstances. In this book, each character had to face many difficult situations and most characters handled it properly with a relatively calm and controlled attitude. It upset me, though, that many of the characters were very prejudicial and close minded in this book. Many people in the town had no respect for the Japanese culture or class, causing rivalry and separation throughout the two races. Ishmael Chambers, the protagonist and narrator of the novel, was bitter towards the Japanese because his long time lover, Hatsue Miyamoto, had abruptly left him to marry Kabuo, the man on trial for murder. Throughout the entire book, Chambers never forgets hi past relationship and he also never forgives Hatsue for breaking his heart. Ishmael individually solver the murder case of Carl Heine and, although his anger with Hatsue still lingers, Ishmael decides to present the evidence, setting Hatsue’s husband free. The characters in this book, although sometimes distraught and upset, tend to find the truth in the end.
Guterson chose to set his novel in an actual and well known location in the United States. In the Puget Sound, off the coast of the state of Washington, a small island harbors this entire community of Japanese and Americans. The island is called San Pedro Island, and the main city is Amity Harbor. This story takes place thirteen years after the Japanese attacked Pearl Harbor in Hawaii, so the bitterness with the Japanese is still fresh and prominent. The trial begins on December 6, 1945, which is one day before the anniversary of the brutal attack. Since then, World War II has finished and most soldiers are home after brutal combat. In fighting this war, Ishmael Chambers lost his left arm and his faith in God. This island looks very normal and similar to most communities on the outside but it ha one secret, they hate the Japanese. This island provided a perfect setting for the book to take place.
Preston Schow
Part 3/3
In the beginning of the novel, we see that Kabuo Miyamoto is on trial for the murder of Carl Heine, and both men are local fishers on the San Pedro Island. As the story begins, we understand that there is a deep despise for Japanese throughout the book, and Kabuo is seen as the killer. The plot also unveils a deep connection between Hatsu Miyamoto, Kabuo’s wife, and Ishmael Chambers, who shared a deep love ever since childhood. Their love grew stronger over the years and Ishmael wanted to marry. Because of her Japanese heritage and parents, Hatsue could not do this, and abruptly left Ishmael, leaving him heart broken and scarred for life. As the trial proceeds, Ishmael works diligently to help solve the murder. When his evidence is crucial and can change the outcome of Kabuo, Ishmael is torn. He does not want to help Hatsue because his resentment towards her and her family is still strong and prominent. In the end, Ishmael takes his knowledge to the courts and presents it, deciding the fate of Kabuo Miyamoto.
This book did not have any literary connections, but it did connect on a personal level. Guterson’s novel is not related to any other piece of literature, but I enjoyed it greatly and felt a connection to it myself. My grandfather fought in World War II and has told me many brutal stories of the atrocities which occurred during it. I have much respect for him and anybody else that put their lives at risk to save the freedom of this great land. The story of the book is very unique and original, making it such a great book.
David Guterson used many techniques to write an awesome and inspiring novel, which many generations to come will enjoy. Because he put many great literary devices into play and connected the characters and plot so thoroughly, Guterson’s book is an instant classic. It teaches a great moral lesson, and inspires people to do the good in life. I truly enjoyed reading this book and I definitely recommend it to others.
PART #1
E.Gonzalez
Per#3
L8r, G8r
By Lauren Myracle
L8r, G8r
Lauren Myracle's book L8r, G8r was a fun book for me not only that but left me in shock with it's stories. This books plot is about teenagers talking and messaging online on an instant messaging website so it's basically an offline online book. The main characters in this story are Angela, Zoe, and Maddie who are girls that are seniors. After two years of messing around and having fun in high school they are ready to have more fun been seniors. In the story they mostly talk about boyfriends and what they are going to do after high school like for example college. This whole book is mostly about people that are in high school instant messaging telling the story of the book L8r G8r.This book was a great and fun book because it's a book mostly for teenagers with teen experiences in my opinion. The reason I liked the book because it talked about a lot of things that happen everyday in life and also things that I have experienced also things that happen around High School teens. I probably also liked the book because I’m a senior at Estancia High School.
Now explaining the theme
this book’s theme is to have friends to talk to over Instant Messaging and also having conversations with them about how you’re feeling inside and just letting it out with them or family members. This book’s theme is also about trying hard to pass high school and your senior year like for example the characters try hard because of all the things they plan to do after high school like college. So the lesson that this book gives is that even though you have a lot of drama during high school because of bad things happening or haters hating on you never give up to have a good future. Another lesson this book gives is that even though you have frustration in high school but doing and getting your work done it’s going to go good for you and going to have a lot of opportunities in the future if you don’t mess up during the time.
Lauren Myracle’s writing style
is a style that some books that I have read don’t really have. Like for example other stories are told by a narrator and characters but Lauren’s style is different because the characters are just having conversations and that’s what’s telling the story. Another thing about her style is that the way she writes is the way us teenagers speak and would do so its like your experiencing the book because she talks about things that my friends would tell me in messaging so to me her style is a very interesting style. Yes her style is sort of funny because she makes it seem like as if I’m talking to some of my friends while reading the book. It also does place you in the set because what the characters say and their way of speaking reminds you how you are in high school and how you mess around, talk about crushes, and things like that so yes the author really puts you in the set due to her writing the story as if she was a teenager writing the words.
Now talking about the characters
One of the characters is Zoe she is a girl who has two best friends and a boyfriend by the name of Doug who she loses her virginity. During the story she becomes blinded to her relationship with Doug. Another Character is Angela same as Zoe she also has a boyfriend who later gives her a Jeep as a present for Valentine's Day. The last main character is Maddie who is a character who really cares about her friends and offers advice and a person to cry with if feeling bad so she is a girl that can be sort of a sister type of figure. Maddie also said ,”I cant believe he gave you a jeep” then Angela said ,”$1,200, he told me his uncle cut him a deal” so those were some quotes these characters had. Yes the writer does make you believe them as people because they are people who talk, act and have the same feelings just like any regular teenager will here in Costa Mesa.
PART #2
E.Gonzalez
Per#3
L8r G8r’s setting isn’t
like other books like having a setting in a particular place the setting in this book is only one setting which is the instant messaging website were all the girls speak to each other most of the time during their days. Comparing and contrasting this book to the world I know is very much alike because the people in the story have the same mind and type of personality like in the real world today. I can also close my eyes and imagine the setting because when I read this book it was like as if I was talking to one of my friends for reals the way the characters were to each other. The place the author has provided is the internet which is the setting in this story so this place can be real in the real world and in my opinion this happens everyday using the story’s setting which is again the internet a strong thing in the real world that is a must need in the real world.
The plot is about three friends who instant message
each other through the whole story and have ups and downs like any other high school teen would. Now seniors the winsome threesome also known as Angela, Zoe, and Maddie feel invisible because of been seniors. The plot is also about how a girl named Jana wants to ruin their lives like she once did when they were sophomores. So it’s up to Angela and Maddie to look after their friend Zoe who doesn’t notice Jana wants to hurt her. A lot of things happen between the begin of their senior year all the way to their senior prom that no one will forget, even if they want to. So the question is will the three best friends be friends till the end after a lot of drama happens and hatred by their haters.
Now comparing this book to another
book is something different in my opinion because other books are different from this book that I read. This book is different because this book tells a story the way I would tell a story and the way I would speak while telling this story. In my opinion I do think this book relates to current events and issues because this book to me seemed so real because it looked like it was based on a true story due to the type of language they would use. Even though this book was isn’t real it did reach to my personal level because they talked about things that I have experienced and people around me have experienced during my time in Estancia High School so yes it reach to my level.
So my recommendation is if you
are a teen that likes to read about love, life, drama this is a pretty cool book but my recommendation is also that if you don’t like violence, drugs, and bad language I wouldn't recommend it. So my recommendation is that this book is a really interesting book that will keep you really interested because this book is basically about real life situations that happen in the real world everyday so in my opinion this was a good book and a story that will be on your mind so I recommend it.
AFlores
Period 4
An American Tragedy
Part 1
Dreiser’s book An American Tragedy dumbfounded me with its tragic tale of an innocent young man in a journey to find his place in life. Clyde is a young that isn’t sure what he wants in life and decides to separate himself from his family to find his own path and to discovery who he really is. This was a very good novel that will keep you puzzled throughout every chapter as to where Clyde will go next and what people he’ll meet in his journey.
The theme of the novel is that prejudice from others shouldn’t decide your path or decisions. In this novel Clyde bases most of his decisions off of peoples compliments. If they don’t agree with something Clyde is interested in, then he tries to fit in with them and decides to go against his passions. When Clyde is introduced to the “wild” side of life, which was composed of drinking, women, and partying he wasn’t too sure about being involved but eventually did because his friends were doing it and he didn’t want to be left alone. Clyde lacked self-confidence when it came to females because he believed he wasn’t good enough. As he worked, gained money and became more independent his confidence grew with the simple fact of having money. As the novel progressed his focus on prejudice diminishes because he finds more comfort in the new life he’d found.
This novel is separated into Book one, Book Two, and Book Three. The novel has a lot of description towards the setting of the chapter. It helps the reader picture the time period and it gives vivid detail about the lives of the characters but it also helps to lose the readers attention with too much background information. It is unusual to other books I’ve read because this book in particular has a lot of details on events that go on throughout the novel.
AFlores
period 4
An American Tragedy
part 2
The main character Clyde can represent anyone in pursuit of the American dream. He leaves the comforts of home to explore his surroundings and to pursuer his own dreams and not the dreams pursued by his parents. He is caught up when he enters a new way of life in which he has never taken part in before. He is now alone and should pursue life on his own which is always dangerous because a person never knows what to expect. He is a likable character because he is faced with so many obstacles and overcomes them to get what he wants. As the book progresses he starts to become a malignant character that turns to the wrong side of life when it comes to choice making.
The setting is a humble New York neighborhood in which Clyde and his family reside and sing their hymns. Clyde doesn’t really like his home or the people in it and can’t wait until he can get out. The way Dreiser describes the setting makes it a lively positive setting with a lot of vivid details that the reader can imagine and bring the novel alive with its description.
Clyde is introduced into a different style of life from his typical Christian household. He is introduced into drinking, women, and partying along with young men like him. He is involved with a lot of women and goes to party with a lot of men when one day he’s involved in a car accident that kills a child and he decides that its time to move away. When he settles in a new city he meets a young lady who he falls in love with and decides to start a family with. He then meets another girl who he begins to have feelings for and decides that he needs to end his relationship with the carrier of his child. He is threatened by public appeal about leaving a pregnant women so now he is faced with a tough decision to stick around with that girl and the baby or to be happy and go for the girl he has strong feelings for.
AFlores
period 4
An American Tragedy
part 3
This novel is based of a true occurrence of the case of Chester Gillette and Grace Brown. Gillette was a wealthy man that was involved with Grace Brown who ended up pregnant with his child. He didn’t want to be with her for the rest of his life but didn’t want his personal profile to be affected because of the fact that he left a pregnant woman so he went to the extremes to make sure he was left out of any guilt and to go on with his life. The novel was based on this event but with different characters and other added subjects.
This is a good novel to read because its based on a real event but it can get difficult to read because majority of the text is describing the setting and the people. It is also a good book for the readers who enjoy a lot of dialogue in their books. It is a very long read but worth it because there are so many twists and turns within the text and you never really know when Clyde will be happy in life or if he ever will be. The book is very slow paced and a single event takes up a number of pages because the author has a certain style to his writing that brings forth many details about the events and the surroundings within them. The reader must be patient at the opening of the novel in order to be able to read the rest of it and to fully understand the context of it. I recommend this book to be read patiently and over a period of time, it shouldn’t be a read that you can expect to finish in a week or even a month.
V. Silva
P.1
Go Ask Alice
The Book Go Ask Alice by author unknown shocked me with its haunting tales of a teenage girl. The story is about a 15 year old girl whos get involved with drugs. Through out the story you learn more about the character. You read everything she feels everything she won’t share with anyone else. Confused of whether what she is doing is right, she finds many obstacles from drug use to violence.
The theme of the story Go Ask Alice is that take care if yourself dont get involve in something that you might regret later on in your life. Through out the story Alice always wanted to be somebody and she was willing to go ask far as she had too. She cared about her apperence more which made her do things she didn’t want to do. Once she started using drugs people talked to her she meet new friends she had new experiences, but as the story goes on she sees that it gets harder for her to get out of drugs every where she went there was somebody that would give her some.
The style of the book is unique unlike other books. This book is Alices’ diary she writes down everything she has done in her lfe. The 1st person view makes the story more realistic. the way she talks in the book makes you feel like you are actually there with here. She uses vivid descriptions to describe how it felt fer her to use the drugs. This book is not like all the other books it makes you feel like you are actually living what she is, the pain and sadness she feels is intense wheather she will over come it who knows.
The main character in the story is about a girl named Alice. This is a diary about a young teenage girl, who somehow finds herself lost in the world of drugs . She is introduced to LSD during a party where it was slipped into her drink. She loved how the drug made her feel, so she started doing more and more trying to see how they feel. She gets involed with the wrong people through out the story she trys to run away from her problems but her problems would always come back somehow. Its not until she goes to the hospital when she really turns around, but who knows how it really ends?
The setting of the story is the real world and everything around her. She has a normal family that loves her and cares. They help her out in anyway possible even after all she been through her family still supports her. Through out the story Alice makes many desisons about her life some minor some completely changed her. The life altering dessions devistaed her completely, at one point she didn’t know if she could come back.
The story is a big rollercoaster there are some parts of the story where everything is going well, to the parts where the only option she has is suicide. She suffers mentally and physically, and has much fortitude. The emotional stress the character faces in the story, occurs in everyday lives with other teens.
This book is not like other normal books that you read, this book talks how her life got messed by drugs and the people she get involve with. This book relates to the current events everyday, there are some many teenagers that use drugs to escape their life even when they know the dangers. Teenagers that use drugs are risking alot their life family and much more. This book really talks about wat happens to teens that go overboard with drugs and any other illegal things.
This book is good book to read if you have ever wonder what occurs in a teenagers life. It is a very interesting novel that has drugs, fear and everything else. I would recommend this book to anybody who is interested in a drug life.
S Juarez
Period.4
AP Eng Lang
Lord of the Flies
By: William Golding
(Part 1) Book Review
Golding’s Lord of the Flies attracted me with its vivid imagery of savagery that occurs within the characters’ society and for its simplicity writing style. The story starts off with a fair-haired boy lowering himself down some rocks toward a lagoon on a beach. At the lagoon, he encounters another boy, who is chubby, intellectual, and wears thick glasses. The fair-haired boy introduces himself as Ralph and the chubby one introduces himself as Piggy. Through their conversation, it is learn that in the midst of a war, a transport plane carrying a group of English boys was shot down over the ocean. It crashed in thick jungle on a deserted island. Scattered by the wreck, the surviving boys lost each other and could not find the pilot. The Lord of the Flies contains twelve titled chapters. The plot is simple and rarely splits into more than one plot lines, although it does sometimes. Occasionally, the story separates from the general group and follows one child. For example, the story followed the first of Jack’s hunts into the jungle, and also Simon’s wanderings to be alone. Throughout the text of the novel, Golding uses a third person omniscient point of view, and imagery to get across the savagery and minds of all the characters throughout the novel, which in my opinion is a good tactic to use because by telling a story with imagery and getting into the thoughts of the protagonist and supporting characters, it reveals the characters’ “true nature” such as when they lose their civilized ways within their dysfunctional society because of disorderly conduct.
S Juarez
Period.4
AP Eng Lang
Lord of the Flies
By: William Golding
(Part 2) Book Review
In my personal opinion, themes are very useful into getting deeper into the text of the novel and finding out more about the story than just what is being presented to the reader or audience. A major theme discussed in the novel is Civilization vs. Savagery. The central concern of Lord of the Flies is the conflict between two competing impulses that exist within all human beings: the instinct to live by rules, act peacefully, follow moral commands, and value the good of the group against the instinct to gratify one’s immediate desires, act violently to obtain supremacy over others, and enforce one’s will. This conflict might be expressed in a number of ways: civilization vs. savagery, order vs. chaos, reason vs. impulse, law vs. anarchy, or the broader heading of good vs. evil. Throughout the novel, Golding associates the instinct of civilization with good and the instinct of savagery with evil. “Now listen. We might go later on the Castle Rock. But now I’m going to get more of the biguns away from the conch and all that. We’ll kill a pig and give a feast.” He paused and went on more slowly. “And about the beast. When we kill we’ll leave some of the kill for it. Then it won’t bother us, maybe.” We’ll go into the forest now and hunt” (133). It is presentable, that the young crowds of school children all want to have a feast and to have with torturing the pig by chasing it violently across the mountain terrain. It is shown that several distorted events are occurring, one from which the leader of the savage pact wants for his followers to take part in the killings so that they can enjoy their feast. The conflict between the two instincts is the driving force of the novel, explored through the dissolution of the young English boys’ civilized, moral, disciplined behavior as they accustom themselves to a wild, brutal, barbaric life in the jungle. “He argued unconvincingly that they would let him alone, perhaps even make an outlaw of him. But then the fatal unreasoning knowledge came to him again. The breaking of the conch and the deaths of Piggy and Simon lay over the island like vapor. These painted savages would go farther and farther. Then there was that indefinable connection between himself and Jack; who therefore would never let him alone; never” (184). It is noticeably noted the main protagonist, who is Ralph, is deemed of being killed by Jack and reminisces about his dearest friends who have been killed by the hands of Jack and his companions. As the novel progresses, Golding shows how different people feel the influences of the instincts of civilization and savagery to different degrees. Piggy, for instance, has no savage feelings, while Roger seems barely capable of comprehending the rules of civilization. Generally, however, Golding implies that the instinct of savagery is far more primal and fundamental to the human psyche than the instinct of civilization. Golding sees moral behavior, in many cases, as something that civilization forces upon the individual rather than a natural expression of human individuality. “I got this to say. You’re acting like a crowd of kids.” The booing rose and died again as Piggy lifted the white, magic shell. “Which is better, to be a pack of painted Indians like you are, or to be sensible like Ralph is?” “Which is better, to have rules and agree, or to hunt and kill?” (180). Throughout the novel, Piggy is very intellect and resorts to reasoning rather than violence like the res of the boys do, which inevitably leads to his death because the boys do not want anything to do with such authority and do not care about their own well being or situation that they are in. The life lesson that the novel holds is that when people are left to their own devices, Golding implies, people naturally revert to cruelty, savagery, and barbarism. Basically when people are left to fend for themselves without a stabilized society, people’s savage instincts come out and chaos occurs within their society.
S Juarez
Period.4
AP Eng Lang
Lord of the Flies
By: William Golding
(Part 3) Book Review
Golding’s style is simple, yet controversial as to the impact of all the characters mentioned throughout the novel presented in the text. In William Golding’s book, Lord of the Flies, there is a writing style that crosses genres and mediums. One of the techniques he uses in organizing plot is foreshadow. Through the use and manipulation of many symbols, he gives the reader and idea of what is to come foreshadowing future events. Another style that the author uses is that he writes the novel in the third person perspective. There is one omniscient narrator. Although the book generally follows Ralph, it occasionally breaks off and follows another character for a time. This entire book is autobiographical in that it tells us something the author wants to show its audience. Golding tries to teach and warn of the evil nature of mankind. He says through the book that individuals (such as humans), are evil and that it is only society that keeps us from committing crimes. In The Lord of the Flies, Golding’s language is neutral. However, it is simple and it is as if he is telling the story himself rather than writing prose. The vocabulary and sentence structure are simply and easy to understand. Golding uses a lot of imagery and symbolic devices. Golding makes his novel come alive with a significant use of symbolism, physiological development, and general truths. His writing style is simple but the subject matter is deep. He uses a rather comparatively simple story to convey a weighty idea. Overall, Golding’s writing style in my opinion would be considered very well done and full of life because in most books I’ve read many authors leave out sensory details and the truth behind the real face of what happens when society collapses.
S Juarez
Period.4
AP Eng Lang
Lord of the Flies
By: William Golding
(Part 4) Book Review
In the novel, there are many ideal characters, but in my opinion, only a few get to the bottom of the story and plot. Ralph is 12 and one of the older boys on the island. He is the leader throughout most of the book being determined, rational, and understanding. He is dressed as in a typical school uniform, but not as the choir boys. He tries to understand the problem and the people on the island trying to give rational solutions. However, psychologically, he loses faith in the boys and decides that he has little hope to restore order into the island. His purpose is to show the reader through his eyes the degradation of the society on the island, and thereby show the innate evil within man. “This expresses his understanding and caring side.” “Listen, everybody. I’ve got to have time to think things out. I can’t decide what to do straight off. If this isn’t an island we might be rescued straight away. So we’ve got to decide if this is an island. Everybody must stay round here and wait and not go away” (23), Ralph’s personality is that he is the calm-collecting one of the bunch. He tries to put things order, like in his society in which is formerly from and also Ralph tries to judge based on what he would normally do where there are laws and a government to reply on, but since there is none he must reply on his own civilized instincts in which he is from. Jack is also one of the older boys and about Ralph's age. He starts as the leader of the choir boys, and develops into the leader of the hunters eventually taking over everyone on the island. He is dressed nicely in a choir boy outfit. He is strong, villainous, and proud perpetuating the crimes committed by the boys on the island. He cares only for his own power and not for the common good. He disregards order and in him the reader clearly sees the innate evil of man since he was the one that cast off society earliest. He becomes Ralph’s most powerful antagonist because of this. “I ought to be chief because I’m chorister and head boy. I can sing C sharp” (22). Jack tends to be aggressive and wants to be head leader no matter what, and seems to come off in an arrogant way and does not seem to care about his other fellow younger school mates. From the beginning of the novel, Jack desires power above all other things. He is furious when he loses the election to Ralph and continually pushes the boundaries of his subordinate role in the group.
S Juarez
Period.4
AP Eng Lang
Lord of the Flies
By: William Golding
(Part 4)Continued Book Review
Also, Jack’s love of authority and violence are intimately connected, as both enable him to feel powerful and exalted. The protagonist’s main friend is Piggy. Piggy is slightly younger than Ralph and in the weakling in the group being overweight and suffering from asthma. He is dressed similar to Ralph in a typical school uniform and ears glasses. He is weak, smart, and friendly. While he is put down by the other boys, he is necessary on the island as a source of intelligence and insight. His insights are often ignored because of his weak appearance and lack of leadership. “My auntie told me not to run on account of my asthma. I can’t swim. I wasn’t allowed. My asthma…” (13). It is evidently shown that Piggy is extremely weak, in terms of physical appearance and is often ignored but he is crucial to the well beings of the school children because he consents to reasoning and is very intellectual throughout most of the novel. Golding makes these three characters come alive because, they are all relative to one another in society and dependable on each other as well. For example, the character Ralph wishes to form a stable sort of “government” but his main enemy, who is the main antagonist of the novel, brings him down and wants to form a cynical society in which all his remaining school mates on the island convert to violence rather than what they had previously learned in their native homeland of Britain. In my personal opinion, I dislike the character Jack for the simple reason that he is the main demonic force that enables all of the savages within all the individuals and provokes them to unleash their inhibitions.
S Juarez
Period.4
AP Eng Lang
Lord of the Flies
By: William Golding
(Part 5) Book Review
The Lord of the Flies takes place on an island during World War II. This is significant since the isolation forms a sort of civilization and community, a sort of microcosm to the real world. At the same time, the island lacks a society and the societal laws and rules allowing for the boys to run wild and show their true, ugly, inner selves. Since the island is a microcosm, Golding uses it to reflect our world and give comments on our world and his view of human nature. In this book, the setting is used less to create a mood than to put the characters in a particular situation. “The undergrowth at the side of the scar was shaken and a multitude of raindrops fell pattering” (7). It is shown that the description of where the main characters are living seems to be that of a jungle and that many dark intentions lie deep within the jungle as well. In context, Ralph, Jack and Simon climbed the mountain and discovered that they were on an island which was roughly boat shaped, with a mountain, falling down to the sea in cliffs at the blunt end. The mountain sloped gradually into jungle which got flatter towards the pointed end, where it terminated in a rocky promontory, almost a small island, connected to the main island. There was a square shaped jetty of pink rock that cut across the jungle and beach and jutted into the lagoon. This was the platform where the boys held their meetings. A coral reef ran parallel to one side of the island, protecting the lagoon within from the open sea. The other (wild) side of the island was unprotected by a lagoon. “Surrounded by a fringe of inquisitive bright creatures, itself a silver shape beneath the steadfast constellations, Simon's dead body moved out toward the open sea” (154). Golding makes the novel setting as if the reader reading it can close his or her own eyes and picture the exquisite imagery that he conveys during the death of Simon, which is a gruesome, yet calm death and does not seem to impact most of the school boys on the island. “We've got to have rules and obey them. After all, we're not savages. We're English, and the English are best at everything” (35). Golding has also provided a sense of disillusionment for the setting in the throughout the society in which the boys live in because when the setting progresses all the school boys forget that they are representing humans and ultimately forget that they are British which leads to the characters’ destruction and dysfunctional society in which they live in. In my opinion, the setting is very realistic as if you can actually jump into the story and experience at first hand on how such a disorderly and corrupt society can exist with each other and how people’s true instincts come out when there are no laws or government to regulate their behavioral means; by such as having an orderly environment.
S Juarez
Period.4
AP Eng Lang
Lord of the Flies
By: William Golding
(Part 6) Book Review
Throughout the context of the novel, the plot has an interesting choice of perspective because it gets into the mind of Ralph, who is the protagonist, and Jack, who is the antagonist. At first, the boys enjoy their life without grown-ups and spend much of their time splashing in the water and playing games. Ralph, however, complains that they should be maintaining the signal fire and building huts for shelter. The hunters fail in their attempt to catch a wild pig, but their leader, Jack, becomes increasingly preoccupied with the act of hunting. “The pig’s head is cut off; a stick is sharpened at both ends and “jammed in the crack” in the earth” (111). It is shown that the author, Golding has transformed Jack throughout his novel, a very aggressive individual who in fact is only concerned with hunting and Ralph is the only who can see it because the rest of Jack’s followers are simply following him and can not realize their uncivilized ways of life. The climax occurs when order is completely lost, the conch is crush, and Piggy is killed. Jack takes over the group of the hunters, as well as the rest of the smaller children. “Here, struck down by the head, the sow fell and the hunters hurled themselves at her. This dreadful eruption from an unknown world made her frantic; she squealed and bucked and the air was full of sweat and noise and blood and terror. Roger ran round the heap, prodding of the sow, stabbing downward with his knife” (135). During the boy’s hunt, the author describes it as violent and is a part of the climax throughout the novel because it exemplifies the boy’s savagery and end of their innocence. Overall the plot is very intriguing concerning the effects of how small school boys from Britain can deviate and turn to savages in a short period of time without any supervision or authority to control and maintain them as well. “Kill the pig. Cut her throat. Bash her in.” (133). Whenever the hunters went into a frenzy of killing pigs, they would always do a chant, which in Ralph’s point of view seemed very demonic and possessive as it later turns out that he, the person trying to convey authority into the other boys, gives in and begins to participate in one of the killings which ultimately lead to one of his own friend’s painful death. The plot also revolves around the fact that when there is no government to control individuals, it leads to savagery, which in the novel explores that everyone has a sort of beast living inside of them and if it can not be controlled it comes out and takes over the human body; causing drastic results. Overall my opinion on the plot would have to be that it is a very detailed, and processed storyline and I would have liked to see the author stick to just one perspective instead of jumping from character to character because it makes the plot hard to follow and leaves the other characters in another state of mind; leaving behind the thoughts of other possible characters.
S Juarez
Period.4
AP Eng Lang
Lord of the Flies
By: William Golding
(Part 7) Book Review
In my own personal experience I cannot compare this novel to any other because I haven’t read anything with this much sensory detail and with imagery because the novel reveals certain truths of mankind, unlike any other book I’ve read. This book can definitely be related to current issues throughout this time period because in today’s society there is still the uprising question whether or not mankind is in fact savages within our deep souls and the probable cause of what would really happen when all of the laws and government were to banish and soon people would find themselves in a frenzy where their true nature comes out, as Golding uses young school boys on a deserted island to demonstrate this. I truly feel the experience that the characters’ are going through in the novel and adventure that this book has to offer because throughout my life time I have always wondered what would happen if all the laws would vanish and soon I was left by myself to defend against society. In other words, this book connected me with at a very emotional and drastic level because this book is so relatable to events and questions that are going on in today’s society, and one can relate to the book about how a bunch of young mannered school boys can lose their minds and eventually kill each other because they have lost all their natural instincts and civilization.
S Juarez
Period.4
AP Eng Lang
Lord of the Flies
By: William Golding
(Part 8) Book Review
This book is truly awe-inspiring and intriguing to read because it has many “tasty” visual details that one can actually picture in their head. The only thing that I do not like about the novel is the fact that the perspective tends to change a lot and often misses the important thoughts of the other characters and focuses on the mind of the antagonist and can be a little ambiguous at certain events found throughout the novel, but overall I give this book a 5 out of 5 stars. This book deserved a perfect rating because I truly enjoyed the vivid imagery and the simple and complex syntax structure that the author has to offer in the novel with also the plot in mind; it is very well detailed and planed out as well. I really enjoyed Golding’s work of literature because it gets to the point without leaving anything behind by using well developed characters and by asking the rhetorical question found throughout the novel which concerns if whether or not mankind are really savages when put to the test when there are no more rules or regulations and people would have to fend for themselves and act accordingly to their instincts. I definitely recommend this novel to anyone because, this book can be read by anyone of all ages and that’s what makes it a really interesting and intriguing to read because its audience can relate to it by both personal and emotional feelings going on throughout the novel which is also conveyed throughout the text presented in the novel. Also, in terms of the Golding’s usage of vivid imagery is the reason why it drew me into the novel because the setting is very tropical at first, and towards the ending of the novel it changes into a sort of a “hellish” living condition due to the characters’ habitat getting completely engulfed in flames which then therefore can symbolize savagery. In my final conclusion, the novel is a splendid work of art because it really gets “skin deep” into the thoughts of all the main characters in the novel and also exemplifies the rhetorical question that Golding makes clear throughout the novel that people are truly savages deep within their souls and when all civilized ways are completely destroyed is when the individual’s true nature comes out at full force causing devastating moral effects in their particular society. Lastly, Golding’s choice of diction also makes this novel a wonderful read because he uses vivid imagery to portray certain events that occur throughout the novel, which in overall makes the novel an awe-inspiring adventure to follow through from beginning to end.
E. O’Neil
Period 4
AP English Language
2/1/10
My Sister’s Keeper
By Jodi Picoult
Part 1
“See, as much as you want to hold on to the bitter sore memory that someone has left this world, you are still in it” (422). My Sister’s Keeper, by Jodi Picoult, is a heartbreaking novel that forced me to appreciate my own health as I read it. Jodi Picoult was inspired to explore issues such as stem cell research and the idea of the Human Genome Project through her point of view, which is through fiction. The graphic images of the intense pain that Kate Fitzgerald, a leukemia patient, and her family go through, force the reader to take emotions into consideration when formulating their opinion on these highly controversial topics. Anna Fitzgerald was conceived to be a donor for her sister, Kate, who was diagnosed with leukemia at the age of two. At the age of thirteen, Anna petitions to become medically emancipated from her parents, who have used her for multiple transplants and transfusions without her consent, in an effort to prolong her sister’s life. My Sister’s Keeper is about the struggles that Brian and Sara Fitzgerald, Kate and Anna’s parents, face to keep their family together.
The subject matter of My Sister’s Keeper dives deep into the ongoing debate on an acceptable quality of life for an individual. Anna insists that she “wouldn't even be alive, if it wasn't for Kate being sick” (22). Her parent’s motive for the conception of Anna was to save their other daughter’s life. Anna suffered through many traumatic events that any child should not have to experience. She had no say in what she agreed to donate to her sister, which makes the quality of her life insufficient. Individuality is another theme in the story that Anna struggles to obtain. She feels like because so much of her body is keeping Kate alive, “without Kate in the equation,” she will have no direction in her life (179). Those characters that are close to Kate have to learn to come to terms with fate, which is the most prevalent theme throughout the novel. Although Brian loves his daughter, he knows that “she will die” (265). The various treatments that Kate has been given throughout her life aren’t cures, they “just postpone what’s coming” (265). The journey depicted throughout the plot revolves around the lesson that fate is something that is unavoidable. Anna was the first in her family to realize that, which is why she knew that no matter how much she gave to Kate, Kate’s life would still be cut short.
Jodi Picoult uses a very graphic, uncensored style of writing. The disturbing images that she creates of Kate’s episodes stay with the reader throughout the whole story. She also uses many metaphors in an effort to make the reader relate to the pain that the Fitzgerald’s experience. Picoult set her novel in present day so she could also use language that many people use and hear on a daily basis. The endless nights when “Kate wakes up with blood streaming out of her nose, her rectum, and the sockets of her eyes” paint a graphic picture in the reader’s mind of a young girl suffering more than anyone ever should (263). Picoult’s description of the blood and tears that were shed translates her themes extremely efficiently. Since many people have not visited an oncology ward, Sara Fitzgerald claims that “an oncology ward is a battlefield”, attempting to create a more real depiction in the reader’s mind. Metaphors such as this are used throughout the story because many readers cannot relate to battling cancer or watching a child battle cancer. Because this story is set in present day, diction used by the characters is similar, if not the same, as diction used by the readers. Picoult connects with her audience with ease by using commonly used words and phrases, such as “honey”, and “oh my God” (231). Her writing technique is memorable through the powerful imagery, figurative language, and decoded diction.
E. O’Neil
Period 4
AP English Language
2/1/10
My Sister’s Keeper
Part 2
By definition, a family is “a group of persons who form a household under one head” (dictionary.com). Members of a family often have opposing physical and emotional characteristics, but they are still united under that one very powerful word. The main characters of the book are Brian, Kate’s father, Sara, Kate’s mother, Anna, Kate’s sister, Jesse, Kate’s brother, and Campbell Alexander, Anna’s attorney. Anna describes her mother as someone who “could be beautiful, if she were parachuted into someone else’s life” (10). The stress of caring for her family and her ill daughter has transformed her into a different person. Jesse, Kate and Anna’s brother, is often disregarded because his issues are overshadowed by his sisters’. From Anna’s perspective, “Jesse may be a borderline delinquent, but he’s brilliant” (14). In order to receive attention from his parents, Jesse dug himself into a hole that just kept growing with each act of “brilliance”, especially his multiple acts of arson within his community. Campbell Alexander, Anna’s attorney, is well-aware if his flaws and what he needs to fix within himself. He describes himself as “shamelessly self-aggrandizing” (184). Alexander knows that his big ego may push many people away, but it also forces him to exude confidence, something that will undoubtedly help him win his cases.
My Sister’s Keeper is set in a suburban neighborhood in modern times. This setting is exactly the same as my life’s setting, which makes it easier to visualize the details of the story. Although Picoult never goes into any real detail about the Fitzgerald’s home or town that they live in, the general setting puts the events that take place in the story into perspective. The beauty of not going into a great amount of detail on the setting is that the reader is then free to visualize whatever picture that comes into their head. Picoult kept this in mind when writing her novel, forcing the reader to play out their own version of the story in their head.
The plot can be thought of as a rollercoaster with a few ups, yet many downhill sections. It follows Kate’s health, which is often dangerously close to death. Anna, who has been donating her sister materials from her body since birth, hires a lawyer, Campbell Alexander, near the very beginning of the story. After the shock of finding out that they are being sued, Anna’s parents try to balance keeping Kate alive without infringing on Anna’s rights as a human being. In the wake of the big news, Anna and Kate’s “mother is caught between” them, (52). In the midst of his work with the Fitzgerald family, Alexander reconnects with his first love, Julia, who has been assigned as guardian ad litem for Anna’s case. The weeks leading up to the trial are filled with tension and separation within the family, yet after the trial ends, the Fitzgerald’s become closer than ever. However, nobody can prepare themselves for the tragedy that occurs at the end.
E. O’Neil
Period 4
AP English Language
2/1/10
My Sister’s Keeper
Part 3
Although the details of this plot make the story extremely unique, it is relatable to several other stories written and set in several different decades. Lord of the Flies, by William Golding, has a similar, more simplified version of the plot. Both stories deal with children rebelling against authority when they are forced into something that they don’t want to be doing. The boys are forced to be under the control of Ralph, the elected leader. Jack and some other boys eventually get fed up with someone else being in control, and decided to leave the camp and make their own tribe, just as Anna gets fed up with her body being in control of her parents. “It takes an enormous effort, but (she) manage(s) to shake (her) head”, after her mother orders to fire the lawyer she hired (54). Another story that could be compared to My Sister’s Keeper is “Romeo and Juliet”. The two young lovers rebel against their family’s wishes and do what will benefit them the most. Anna also requested “that she not be required to undergo any more treatment for the benefit of her sister, Kate” (52). The more general version of the plot of My Sister’s Keeper is a somewhat common pattern that appears in many different works.
My Sister’s Keeper is a painful book to endure, that may jerk some tears out of the reader. However, reading this book helped me gain insight into the mechanics of other homes that go through much more suffering in one day than I will go through in my entire life. I have learned to not take for granted my own good health, and the opportunities that I have received that wouldn’t be possible for someone with a disease like leukemia. I have also come to appreciate my body’s freedom, and how it has no obligations to anyone else but myself. I recommend this novel for anybody who enjoys realistic plotlines, stories that follow characters that could be a next door neighbor, or somebody who you pass on the street.
M.Davila
P.3
Homer Hickam’s novel October Sky was a fascinating and inspiring true story a
bout a kid who dreams of one day becoming a NASA scientist. With the help of his friends, teacher, and mother he begins building rockets and learns how to fly them.” The Russians aren’t smart enough to build a rocket,” (28) The rocket boys talk about Sputnik orbiting around the world which leads all of them to their goals which is to send their own rockets into space. Their inspiration and dedication to build and fly rockets made this story a very incredible and unforgettable story.
Homer Hickam was a teenage boy from a mining town in West Virginia called Coalwood. He inspired to build rockets when he seen the first artificial satellite, Sputnik, streak across the stars. With his friends and the local nerd, Homer sets out to do just that but with many errors and trials. Along with the town, Homer's father thought they were wasting their time with their rockets. He wanted Homer to be a coal miner just like everyone else but Homer knew he didn't belong there. As time went on, some people from town became interested in seeing the homemade missiles launch into the sky. The boys became popular and were known as the "Rocket boys" around town.
When Homer and his friends fired one of the first rockets off and it crashed into one of the company buildings, Homer's dad said not to shoot anymore rockets on company property. The mining company owns all of Coalwood so they walked eight miles to Snakeroot where they can fire as many rockets as they wanted. They named it Coalwood Missile Agency. They built a fort to stand behind when they fired rockets and a launch pad. They walked there everyday and launched a different rocket and everyday the rockets improved. There were a couple people in town that helped them with welding the nozzles on and ordering the right kind of metal to take the heat. Miss Reilly, the science teacher, bought Homer a book on building rockets for his birthday. Quiten, the local nerd, and Homer mixed certain chemicals in science class to make a better gas to make a better and more powerful launch. With this new formula the rockets became more successful but they would blow up in the air but they never gave up. They fixed the rocket when they put solid gas made out of moonshine inside the rocket
People from town started to watch them launch the rockets. They became popular when everyone saw the rocket go into the air. During this time Homer's dad was really disappointed in him because he quit football to build these rockets. Homer says he is never going to mine coal. One day after they shot off a rocket, the police came to the school to arrest Homer and his friends for starting a forest fire. They gave up on building rockets because all of their dreams were crushed. That night his father was hurt mining and Homer quit school and worked in the mines to help pay the hospital bills. His dad changed his attitude about Homer when he worked in the mines because he thought he was doing the right thing. Homer didn't like it at all and his hopes and dreams were gone. After work one night, Homer's mom told him that Miss Reilly was sick. When he went to visit her, she told him that he didn't belong in the mine and that he needed to stick to his dreams. That night he opened the book she gave him and started to work on the math and where the rocket went when the police said that it started the fire. He calculated that he didn't start the fire.
Homer quit his job, went back to school, and won the County Science Fair. He was sent to Indianapolis for the National Science Fair. His dad was disappointed again that Homer went back to building rockets. He was the only one in town who didn't believe in Homer and his friends. His father helped him out when all of Homer's rocket supplies were stolen in Indianapolis the night before the science fair. His father made him
another one and sent it to him the next morning. So this means that he is starting to believe in Homer's dreams and future.
He won the science fair, shook the hand of his favorite scientist and brought home a gold metal and a college scholarship. The entire town praised him when he came home but his father wasn't there. He went to thank his dad for helping him and to tell him that they were going to shoot their last rocket and his dad said he was too busy. Homer told his dad that he wasn't any different from him and that he was always his hero.
When he was about to shoot off the last rocket, he was thanking everyone for their help and support and his dad showed up. Homer let his dad push the button to launch the rocket. This rocket went for miles and miles. Miss Reilly and the people in the town could see the rocket from there. While his father was watching it get higher and higher, he realized that his son has done something spectacular with his life and that he was right for following his dreams. This story is about a teenage boy that had a dream and he went for it. No matter what, he never gave up and he kept getting better and better at building rockets and understanding science. He knew that he didn't belong to Coalwood and that he could do something great in his life. The people believed in him after they realized he wasn't giving up. Let the inspirations keep inspiring
October Sky was one of the greatest novels I’ve ever read. The story is inspiring and touching. The ups and downs the kids go through to achieve their dreams. They all worked as a team and they put their efforts and dedication to build rockets. The rocket boys face many obstacles and failures but they never let it get to them, instead they just took it as a step closer to success. I highly recommend this novel to anyone that likes to hear and inspiring true story.
C Ruby
P. 4
2/1/10
“Ivan Ilych's life had been most simple and most ordinary and therefore most terrible.” On one typical day Ivan Ilyich hung his new curtains in his home in hopes of impressing his rich elite friends and with one wrong step he fell and was plummeted into a sea of self-consciousness. Once there, Ivan experienced the agony and anguish of existence and the thought of his own morality. He obtained a fear of his mortality because of his realization that his entire life was a crude façade that stemmed after his innocent childhood and prevented his spiritual enlightenment and personal growth. The purpose for Tolstoy’s short story The Death of Ivan Ilyich is to showcase a man who is confronted with his own life’s falsity as well as his existence and mortality. Its main themes are the error of living in inauthenticity as well as the need for self-consciousness and personal human connection. The error of living refers to Ivan’s life being lived solely by the direction of the aristocratic elite. He failed to understand the human element of his life and instead attempted to fill the emptiness with materialistic garbage that filled his home to the brim yet left him isolated and stranded. This shows the kind of life that Tolstoy believes is incapable of sustaining instead, Tolstoy would say that one must live simply and personally which also refers to the second theme of Ivan’s existential crisis. Ivan’s journey is also a metaphor for his existential crisis in which his illness is the pain one feels when confronted with the thought of existing. This thought especially bothers Ivan because if he must accept that he exists on a personal level he would have to accept his own death which he is unable to do due to his inauthentic herd-like life that has not been properly lived. This conflict creates amazing tension becoming powerful and poignant. In short, Leo Tolstoy’s short story “The Death of Ivan Ilyich” captivated me with its powerful message regarding life and the importance of living authentically.
Tolstoy’s style of clear direct language helped best communicate his ideology while still maintaining a compelling story that is not muddied. This style is unordinary but refreshing, it helps prevent a never ending boundless narrative that is overdrawn and too overly ambitious and complex. Tolstoy’s short stories especially are so powerful in the few short time parameters they have due to the direct style Tolstoy’s language portrays. Yet this direct, emotionless writing is also is used to show Ivan’s lack of personality and existence – it best highlights Ivan’s formality and his less emphasis on his true self. This style shifts and becomes heavily entrenched in Ivan’s thoughts and emotions, so much so that one becomes completely emerged in Ivan’s mind and anguish that it is hard to cope with his suffering.
C Ruby
P. 4
2/1/10
Part 2
The characters in “The Death of Ivan Ilyich” are so important because they each symbolize a particular philosophical belief regarding life and the way one should interact with humanity.
Ivan Ilyich, the main character of the short story, is a judge who lives his life by what others determine is proper and decent. He is detached from his personal beliefs and consciousness and instead adopts the beliefs and priorities of the aristocratic society. Ivan Ilyich is obsessed with maintaining a perfect lifestyle and natural decorum in his life and home. Ivan constantly emulates the elite in action, career path, and interior decorating. He reads what is most popular at the time and is always looking for ways to impress his family and colleagues. Ivan Ilyich gains a job that earns the best pay and only obtains a wife because it was described to him as the proper way to continue his life. As Ivan becomes more and more obsessed with maintaining a sense of decorum in his life, he is furiously annoyed with any disturbance like a bad hand in cards. This is also the case when he is confronted with his wife Praskovya’s pregnancy, which he sees as a disturbance that must be alleviated and distanced from. This leads to a grotesque detachment from his wife and later their children, which thus creates a detachment from all of humanity and reality. Instead, Ivan favors his fantasy life devoid of any hardship and self-consciousness. Ivan adopts a formal attitude in regard to his family and work life, and is constantly plagued with a sense of dissatisfaction. As time progresses and Ivan falls and mysteriously becomes ill, it is obvious that this is more than a physical illness- it is the beginning of his spiritual transformation and existential crisis. As Ivan has time to reflect and he begins to see his true life behind the façade he constructed. When faced he is finally able to not only logically understand the concept of death, but experience it personally so as to accept his personal connection to it he is able to find peace in his human connections. It was not simply enough to understand that men die, but he had to belief and accept his existence and that he himself was dying. Another hurdle during his transformation regards accepting the falsity of his life and seeing the error in his empty materialistic lifestyle.
Praskovya, Ivan’s wife is also obsessed with social status and in maintaining a perfect lifestyle. Her personal attitude regarding Ivan and humanity in general is artificial, inauthentic, and self-interested. Her relationship with Ivan is tumultuous and volatile. They both argue constantly and maintain a mutual formality in their interactions. The only time the two ever connect on something is when they are following the aristocratic train-track lifestyle like going to an official’s home. Ivan finds little pity in her great anguishes like mischarges and in turn just like how Ivan found Praskovya’s pregnancy to be a great disturbance, she in turn finds Ivan’s illness as troublesome and annoying. She sticks to her elite fantasy and believes that if Ivan can only adhere more closely to the set rules and regulations that he will be cured. She also refuses to believe or accept that he is dying and instead maintains a sense of disinterested hope and becomes the connection to Ivan’s old life. As Ivan begins to see her as artificial and indifferent he begins to loathe her. He begins to increasingly hostile and rude to her as a reaction to his disapproval of the old life she portrays. He is unable to connect with her and she in turn is unable to offer the comfort and pity he requires. Due to Ivan’s constant hostility, Praskovya begins to pity herself and wishes for his speedy death and distances herself from him. Yet at the end when she encounters Ivan dying on the sofa her humanity surfaces and her emotions pour through and she begins to cry- showing the curative effects of Ivan’s journey.
C Ruby
P. 4
2/1/10
Part 3
Gerasim is Ivan’s compassionate caring nurse during his illness. A simple peasant butler and nurse, Gerasim comes from a humble background yet he is still far more developed and advanced than Ivan’s character, he is remarkably able to bridge the gap between Ivan and humanity. He is also able to offer his emotional support—even physical support as he holds up Ivan’s legs to alleviate his pain. He is the only character that is able to deal with the concept of Ivan’s death and can offer Ivan the pity he required. His optimistic uplifting sunny attitude comforts Ivan at a time when he feels the most alone during his alienation of his old life. The scene in which Praskovya comes to sit with Ivan while Gerasim is tending to him shows Ivan’s rejection of his old life by asking Praskovya to leave instead of Gerasim. Gerasim also shows Tolstoy’s concept that the upper classes’ materialism only dilutes the soul and corrupts them morally since Gerasim, the hero of the novel is a simple poor peasant boy who is more spiritually powerful than Ivan. Yet he also represents a cognitive but detached view of death, he only passes off death as an everyday occurrence that must be dealt with and ignored and not worried about. He is not the only salvation for Ivan because he does not possess a perfect philosophy regarding death; Gerasim disregards death similar to the way a comedian can joke about death to prevent the topic from being too serious. This is not the solution that Ivan must strive for, which is why he is not healed when he encounters Gerasim, he must not see only the logic that men die, or ignore its powerful significance he must accept its occurrence yet make it a personal experience to fully appreciate and understand death and himself.
The setting for the short story is an aristocratic picture perfect Russian home. There is less emphasis on the outside setting of the novel which helps to create a more personal feeling that anyone could relate to. The aristocratic element of the setting is shown as destructive and detrimental to personal development and spiritual growth. The materialistic lifestyle it creates weighs down personal conscious thought and instead pollutes the mind with the herds own ideals and beliefs. The setting seems to coincide with the time factor and extend of Ivan’s illness. Just as Ivan is getting closer and closer to his death, the setting in which he dwells becomes closer and compact. The setting transforms from the entire outside world, the false aristocratic meeting places and Ivan’s friendship company meeting grounds to only the house, to only one room, to only the sofa. As Ivan’s illness gets more and more serious he becomes more crippled in his movement and is forced to confront his mental state and emotional well-being. During this time he is also able to reflect internally and thus the smaller setting aids his journey by limited the outside noise that once silenced his inner voice.
C Ruby
P. 4
2/1/10
Part 4
The plot of “The Death of Ivan Ilyich” follows the life of Ivan Ilyich, starting at the chronological end with the reaction to Ivan’s death. Ivan’s colleagues and friends get the news and their reactions are indifferent and selfish, they see Ivan’s death as a chance to get a new promotion and make more money. The men even go so far as to relish in their lives despite what happens to other people. Then the story shifts to the beginning of Ivan’s childhood. It is a brief summary of his family and life and yet at this point there less emphasis on his childhood and it then shifts again to Ivan’s adolescence. At this tender age Ivan is forced to assimilate to the behavior of those in a higher social standing. This begins Ivan’s new materialistic life He becomes obsessed with maintaining a perfect decorum and finds solace in his social standing and well paying job and decent wife. Once Praskovya becomes pregnant Ivan’s peace is disturbed and he retreats to his work life and detaches from that reality and discomfort. In the midst of attempting to show off his new lavish surroundings, Ivan falls and hits his side, and later on he begins experience some discomfort in his left side and an unusual taste in his mouth. This pain escalates rapidly and Ivan’s illness is persistent, excruciating, and incurable despite the aid and help of numerous specialist doctors. Ivan is convinced by his wife that by adhering to the doctor’s strict pill intake, he will be cured and his life can continue as normal. However, as time progresses Ivan’s pain continues and intensifies, Ivan is no longer able to enjoy anything and his illness flares whenever some disturbance is encountered. In his crippled immobile state Ivan is forced to reflect on his life—yet he is convinced that he has lived decently and properly. This inability to accept his own faulted life prevents him from salvation and being healed. At this time Ivan meets Gerasim who acts as a spiritual guide and compassionate sympathizer for Ivan. This marks a turning point in the novel and from then on out Ivan begins to become reborn and finally at the end of the novel Ivan accepts that his life was not lived correctly and instead of pitying himself he seeks redemption. He finds it once he finally connects with another human being by placing his hand on his son Vasya’s head. He can finally have redemption for the falsity of his life by being the inspiration for his family to better themselves. Ivan finally can die with dignity, peace, and grace once he has accepted his existence and connected with humanity.
C Ruby
P. 4
2/1/10
Part 5
There is an obvious connection between Tolstoy’s short story and Charles Dicken’s A Christmas Carol. Both stories revolve around an older mean-spirited man who had his best years as a child, grew up and lived incorrectly, and discovered the errors of his life and finally redeemed himself through human interaction. In A Christmas Carol Scrooge is very similar to Ivan, only Ivan’s character touches upon the themes in a much deeper way than Dickens’ novel. The two ideas are similar but Tolstoy’s execution is much cleaner and more profound. Style is another key element in which Tolstoy shows his uniqueness; Dickens’ signature long-winded muddied plots and run-on sentences were replaced with Tolstoy’s charming direct language and poignant short sentence structure. Tolstoy greatly admired Dickens and that could be one of the reasons why he mirrored his story after his. “The Death of Ivan Ilyich” is also similar to Søren Kierkegaard’s existential philosophy illustrated in Sickness unto Death and Fear and Trembling. Since Ivan’s illness is existential and Kierkegaard’s philosophy was the backbone of existentialism it is easy to see the similarities such as the anguish of conscious existence.
In conclusion, after studying and learning to appreciate this novel I became fascinated with Leo Tolstoy, thus the short story did its job excellently. I would completely recommend “The Death of Ivan Ilyich” to everyone but especially to someone who would be interested his other Tolstoy books such as War and Peace and Anna Karenina. This short story is an excellent stepping stone to test out the water, to expose oneself to see if one would be interested his type of message, structure, and language. But even those who have no interest in those books might also enjoy this short story because of its rich philosophy and masterful use of tension that has the ability to force one to confront his own mortality and existence as we all must one day.
J Hernandez
Period 1
David klass the book is danger zone. The book was about a group of
basketball players that they were chosen to represent the United
States of America. I think that this is great book and if you read
it you will like it. This book is very interesting to read this
sport book. That group of basketball player became the best thing team
in the world.
The theme of the book Danger Zone I think is to don't give up
even if people thinks you can't do things right. Jimmy was from
Minnesota he was chosen to represent the United States of America. When
he got to los ageless where they were all his teammates but there was
one kid that didn’t like him because he said that he didn't know how to
play basketball and also because hi was white. Jimmy never gave up
playing basketball and hi was always trying to don't get nervous when
he was playing basketball.
I like how the book was written in one thing that I didn’t like
about the book was that they didn't talk about the death of his father
and another one is that they only talk about him and his family and a
player named Agustus. The voice that the author use make it sound like
if hi was the character and hi sounds like a 17year old guy hi also
uses a lot of details so the reader could imagine the character.
The character was a young boy his seems to be a nice boy.
That he enjoy to play basketball more than anything else in the world
He was also a guy that looses its temperature easily. The thing that I
Like more about the character was that he didn’t give up playing basketball
And he always keeps doing his best in everything.
The book took place in Rome, LA and in Minnesota he start playing
Basketball. In his high school and two mans enter and chose him to represent
The United States of America he accepted to play and then they took him to
UCLA there he was going to practice and he was going to meet his teammates
And coach the was how the book was in was interesting to read this kind of book
Edgar Rodriguez, per.2
Part 1
Locked in Love
In the dark cold city of Harlem, New York Antonio and Natasha would roam the streets hugging and laughing with no care in the world. Antonio and Natasha are crazy in love with each other, but their love is put to the test when Antonio is accused of murder. They dreamed of running away and starting their own businesses and him working in music. To them it feels like just yesterday they were out at the park “bugging out” and jumping over cars having fun. They also remember their various sexual encounters out in public at city parks, city colleges and school hallways. Natasha becomes lonely without her love around and decides to do better for their lives. They love everything about one another and cannot keep their hands off each other. Natasha and Antonio swore they would love each other till death but soon things change.
The main characters in the book are Antonio and Natasha. Antonio Michael Lawrence is a tall dark male with curly hair like many of the people living in Harlem. He wasn’t the type of person that would miss school, but once his freedom was taken he realizes its importance. At school he was known as a troublemaker, he would have security guards escort him to class. If the teachers knew they had Antonio in class they knew it would be a struggle. Natasha is a very young woman who falls in love with Antonio. She is a independent headstrong and stubborn woman who became very educated after Antonio was accused. Much like Antonio Natasha had family problems as well, she also lost her father.
One night Antonio came home and heard screaming and yelling coming from his house. There was many times he had witnessed his father abusing his mother but that time it was out of control. Scared and frightened he was in shock not knowing what to do , seconds passed and he saw his brother reacting to the situation. Trevon then slowly walks to the kitchen cabinet and carefully pulls out a knife. With hate and fear in his eyes he “stuck the knife in his fathers back”. He was out of control he kept jabbing and jabbing until his father falls to the ground. Antonio then realizes he just stood there frozen and useless and was no help to his brother. He feels he was as guilty as his brother and it was his crime as much as Trevons. Therefore he confesses the killing of his father as his own. He states early in the book that he would do anything for his family and this has proven it.
Edgar Rodriguez per.2
part 2
As Natasha is lonely without Antonio she doesn’t know what to do next except study for her education so she can proceed to college. So Natasha is stunned and she goes and dates a guy named Roland. Natasha tries to keep it to herself, but Antonio finds out by his best friend black. As Antonio is shocked and heartbroken he lost control of himself and tells Natasha that he knows what happened and to leave him alone. So Natasha feeling guilty and sad apologizes to Antonio. Antonio in a couple of months without writing a letter back to Natasha sends one and tells her she can do what she wants and he accepts her apology. Then while Antonio is in jail and Natasha as free as she is going to college finds someone else. Natasha tells Antonio about her boyfriend and Antonio accepts her goodbye. As Natasha starts a new relationship Antonio’s mother pasts away. Antonio feeling heartbroken sad depressed and guilty doesn’t know what to do but get his GED for school.
My opinion I think Antonio did a wonderful job in everything he had to go through. While Antonio watches his mother get physically abused by his father and doesn’t do anything. I myself would feel guilty if I didn’t do anything at that point. He did very good on being there for his brother who was 7 years old, and took the blame for his father’s death. His relationship with Natasha well he did well in letting her start a new life with another person. He knew she was going to be better off without him because he was holding her back on living her life. Him getting his GED that’s an important thing u need to have in your life to get a great job. What I think Antonio did wrong was getting his girlfriend pregnant very young, but otherwise he did a wonderful job.
The readers message in the story is to never give up always proceed and never put your head down on one mistake u make because life is life and it will proceed. There would be more mistakes people can create and feel guilty for. I mean it’s a long life errors are meant to be included in life. Antonio’s mistake was to watch his mother get physically abused. He could’ve stopped his father, or he could’ve taken his mother and his brothers out of the house to prevent any crime. Antonio wasn’t thinking while everything was happening because everything was happening to quick, his fathers hand, his mothers tears, his brother walking to the cabinet and reaching for a knife, and his heart beating faster because of everything he was seeing and not reacting. Antonio regrets watching everything and not doing anything to prevent something. Otherwise he doesn’t regret anything else leaving Natasha free, taking the blame for his brother Trevon, in fact Antonio is a wonderful brother.
The setting, well it was on the year 1990-1996. It takes place in a small town in Harlem, New York. Where you walk outside and you will see graffiti everywhere crime everywhere. This is a city where people would be afraid to visit, except for the people who lived and knew more about the city. It was on the years where a lot of crime was done and it was easy to trick officers especially in a small city like Harlem. The street we can just say its very dangerous. People are and will be afraid to go on vacations and leave there house in a city like Harlem.
Edgar Rodriguez per.2
part 3
In all this is a story of love and heartbreak their love was strong but both of them had to move on and there was nothing they could do. Life is like love you really can’t control it a hundred percent. Well for Antonio and Natasha they were to young they fell in love but their love was teenage love. I mean people grow and change their ways and by their ways I mean the act different treat people in a different way. Antonio was a loving caring with a great heart, why? Because he loved his mother father his brother and his girlfriend Natasha. He took the blame of the crime his brother committed. He let his girlfriend move on for her dream to become her realistic life. Antonio feels great he is a free man with a little boy he loves his life and is enjoying it as a free man.Antonio puts his whole name convicted for a crime he didn’t commit he was a true man unjust fully accused but his freedom was everything to him.
Elvin Herrera
Period: 05
The Five People You Meet In Heaven by Mitch Albom
Heaven, the ultimate paradise. No one is correctly sure of how heaven is classified. The majority of the world believes and seeks to attend it after there lives. Even though we live life we have to eventually stop and think of how it’ll be when you go up there. Some of us are constantly asking ourselves why “do this” or “do that” and “what’s the point”. But as this book tells, everything has a remarkable meaning even if it’s the most unexciting thing. This story begins with the last hour of Eddie’s life as he runs his daily routine as Maintenances when an unexpected accident occurs that tragically takes Eddie’s life away. His taken away to the heavenly unknown, there he will meet five people that’ll each share there connections and message.
The theme of this book is rather broad. The best way to explain it would be “…all endings are also beginnings. We just don’t know it at the time” (pg.1). While in the vast creation of Heaven Eddie is told different stories by the five people he meets “Take one story, viewed from two different angles” (pg.42). Each person impacted or was impacted by Eddie’s life. The message that sends out is that life after death can be rewarding just don’t lose faith and be patient. The author has written this book very precise that not once did I ever think about death. Overall it has had a positive impact on me.
The day Eddie died was his 83rd birthday and unfortunately he spends it alone since his entire family has past away. As a boy his life has been wrapped around Ruby Pier a costal amusement park. It’s described by the author with so much passion and detail that I imagine it’s an actual place. The book had a nice flashback feature where at the end of every chapter Eddie’s most important birthdays where picked up starting from his 5th to his last. Also every now and then we got a glimpse of reality on the days that followed Eddie’s death on Earth. The author’s style of writing was unique because we had to keep in mind different points in time like the show “Lost”.
Eddie is the main character in the story. Most of his life was spent at Ruby Pier and because of that fact he feels he never accomplished anything in life. Eddie is old and alone, all of his family has past away.At night the image of war still hunts his dreams “The darkness that…shadowed” (pg.188).He has had a very long and eventful life full of pain, joy, neglect, but . His journey in Heaven is surreal and in the end he receives paradice.
The Blue Man is the first person Eddie encounters in Heaven. When Eddie was a child playing at the docks he once went after a ball, the blue man almost ran him over. It turns out that Eddie killed the Blue Man who had nervous problems and because of that he ended up crashing soon after due to his nerves. He gave Eddie the message of fairness in Life.
The Captain was Eddie’s third person. He was the captain of Eddie’s unit during the war. For heaven he chose the place he died in combat. But he saw it as a place untouched by war. He in the end gave Eddie the realization of sacrifice.
Ruby was the third person. She never met Eddie but it was because of her that the Pier was built in the first place considering its called Ruby Pier. She explained that “Things that happen before you are born still affect you…And people who come before your time affect you as well” (pg.123). Her story made Eddie forgive his father who he disliked.
Elvin Herrera
Period: 05
Page 2
The Five People You Meet In Heaven by Mitch Albom
Marguerite is Eddie’s wife and fourth person. It had been three decades since Eddie had seen her. She was still young and beautiful as he last remembered her. With her he spends more time with, probably days and nights. They relived there wedding and moments forgotten. She gave him comfort.
Tala is a small Asian girl. Apparently she was killed by Eddie in the war. This was Eddie’s final person who was causing him to heartbreak. His last task was to cleanse away the marks of the girls and make her forgive him. His family appeared throughout the story filling in the spots where Eddie was most important. His dad was a typical smokier gambler and ignorant figure. His mom gave the love and tenderness. Joe was the oldest brother but no the strongest. These characters had a huge impact before and after Eddie’s death.
As old Eddie enters the frontier of Heaven he is amazed by how wonderfully well he feels. His in a calm place where the skies change color. Heaven is the main setting of the story but it changes as he encounters his five people. But as it is described its where time has no schedule or routine and you don’t know if its been an hour a day or a year The apartment where Eddie lived was a very important setting because it’s the same apartment of his childhood, his marriage, and in the end his loneliness. The author made the setting seem very realistic where ever Eddie was present. Every setting was very realistic and imaginable.
The journey Eddie takes is reflected through his life. From the moment he dies until the moment he is initiated into Heaven he continues to ask each person if he saved the little girl from the falling ride. This question is brought up throughout the story making it suspenseful until the end when it is finally answered. So basically this story is about an old guy who dies at his job doing what he does best and after being directed to a place that seems like Heaven but more like a pre-Heaven experience.
This book gives faith and hope to all those who are lost, in despair, or confused. Many people can relate to this book and get a sense of what might come.
m gamboa
period 2
A Teenagers Journey, by, Richard B. Pelzer is about a boy that overcomes a childhood of abuse. In this story, his own mother treats a boy like a dog on the street. He was not given any food, clothes, and it was hard for him to live in his own house. His mom moved from Daly City to Salt Lake. He did not want to move, he had friends that accepted him for who he was and what he went through. He knew that if he went to Salt Lake the kids there would not like his shyness, self-conserved kind of person. He felt wrong moving but he did not have a word in the call his mother did and his two younger brothers could not say anything either. He talks about his older brother that left the family because he could not take it anymore. The mother was extremely abusive, if she did not like something, or her kids did not do something right she did not care where the hit went but she just went at her kids.
m gamboa
period 2
However, mostly to this boy, it was as if he was her main target. He had to do everything, but the fact is that went he got to Salt Lake, everything started getting worst. His mother became more abusive with him and he did not do anything or say anything but just take the hits, the name-calling, and all the yelling from his mother. His two younger brothers would just watch and that all they could do. To his mother his two younger brothers would not get hit. He would talk how he felt out of the family, or out of place.
m gamboa
period 2
He was confused and did not know what direction to go. Sadly, he went to school and things for him just started escalating. People did not like him, so since then he started to find people who used drugs and partied. He did and he called that his “group” or the “normal’s.” He started doing heroin and weed and he even started selling it for a while so he can buy himself what he needed but instead he kept wasting it on drugs and parties. He loved to drink beer just to ease the pain that was inside of him. He would get beat for coming home late, but then it started to seem to him like he had the stuff to alleviate.
m gamboa
period 2
He was doing heroin constantly that his friends started knowing him as the hard-core heroin addict. So slowly, his friends started too swept away. However, one thing was that for his own pleasure and to make himself happy he got some of his girl friends that he hung out with and snuck them into his house. In the end he ended up leaving his house and starting his own journey, but one thing was that he prayed and asked god to help his little brothers with his mother.
with that I thought that this was going to be an interesting book because it already started with some action. Towards the middle of the book the author tells the story about his incapability to forgive his mother for abandoning him and his younger brother. He becomes very confuse and make wrong decisions that lead him to lose his love. The setting that the author describes referring to the place were his mother is living at really comes to the readers mind that she is going through some economical difficulties. His half brother is stilling from the customers that come to the restaurant that his mother owns and is really made at the fact that he is poor and his brother is living the rich life in his favorite soccer team. Santiago Bernabeo is the Real Madrid stadium and when this seen is described in the book it tents to make you feel part of the audients. The magic of football is rising through the bleachers and in to the people that are watching this magnificent show.
In a personal manner this book is really interesting to me because I love soccer and spots in general. It really shows the reader how some professional soccer player get over there head and forget were they come from. If you give to much fame to someone they get off there heads and look at people around them as nobodies. They tend to forget were they originally come from and that they should appreciate what life has given to them and not get t cocky with the situation. The author adds some dramatic since like when he finds out that his mother is alive and that he now has a second brother. His whole problem that he is losing Roz because he doesn’t spend time with her because she stayed back in Newcastle. Santiago also receives pressure from the media because he is constantly seen with another famous show host from Madrid and this builds up tension in the relationship with Santiago and Roz.
The connections that I see in this book were very similar to the situations that are going on in today’s world. For example there is a player how’s name is Giovanni Dosantos and has change from being a great football player to a big show off that has his football level come down. He was playing for the U20 Mexican’s national team and was offered a spot at Barcelona F.C., one of the best football clubs in the world write of the bat just by winning the world cup. He was a good player don’t get me wrong, but his fame and glory got to his head to far up and people stared to noticing that when he played in the first squat he would hardly ever pass the ball. They offered him a contract and he denied it because they were not going to pay him the amount that he was asking for. We got to remember that he is a young man at the age of twenty years of age and he still has a lot to prove to the world and experience to gain. They compared him to “the next Ronandinhio” and that brought him over his head. This book connects to a personal level because I love soccer and at one point soccer was my life.
In conclusion I highly recommend this book to any one how loves to read and for those how don’t but love soccer. It tells a wonderful story about a man how’s dreams have come true but doesn’t now what to do with all the power that is being throne at him. Many of the starting soccer player think that to become a famous soccer player is the best thing in life but in the real world the hardly get to do anything in privet because there’s always the press getting into your business. The story of a young man that forgives and forgets the people that have cost pain to him for a long time and that is something to admire. In a personal leave I like this book very much and make me see football from a totally different perspective.
Alex D Romero
Period 3 Part 2
Part 1
Fame and Glory
The fascinating story of Robert Rigby, Goal 2 “Living the Dream”, is one of my favorite books that I have ever read and tells a story of many professional soccer players that go through challenging obstacles. It talks about a young Mexican man how dreams had just come true and stared playing professional soccer in England in a team called Newcastle United. This is the second book of Mr. Rigby have written and through out the book, he talks about how Santiago changes to a person that no one around him has ever seen from him. He stars getting over his head with all the fame and glory that is provide to him and he finds out many answers to the questions he has always asked him self through out his life. He stars forgetting of the things and the values that his poor grandmother had shone him and go’s off doing many things that later in life he is going to be regretful of committing. He starts from being that little Mexican kid playing in the dirt to a wealthy man playing for one of the best soccer clubs there has ever been, Real Madrid F.C.
The style that this author uses in his nobles is really emotional and at the same time they are entertaining and intense. Santiago has never known about his mother and he finally finds her in Madrid, Spain. Through out his life he has never seen her only through pictures that his grandmother would show him. His father always spoke badly about her because she left the family with out saying anything what so ever and abandoning a loving family. The way that the author tells the way that Santiago feels makes a reader consider for them to be touched. Especially when he finds out that his grandmother new that his moms was in Madrid and hide it from him all this time. She stated “I was only doing this to help you and I didn’t want for you to get hurt”. Santiago replies, “This was my choice and you didn’t have the right to hide this from me, she will always be my mother”. This got me thinking how a young boy how has always been though to hate his mom came to a conclusion and forgive and forget his mothers mistakes.
In this novel Rigby really use Santiago’s character in many different ways that were never to be known in the first book. He relay throws out the message how people can change when you give them too much fame and glory. Santiago’s changes always come from the non-sense that his friend Gavin Harris tells him. Santiago see’s that Gavin has luxuries materials and hi wants then as well. Even though that he is leaving a great life with Roz and they are both happy the way they are and don’t need more. Santiago’s lack of steeling doesn’t come to place until the end of the noble. He always wants to have more and for this same reason it is way he will eventually lose his true love. Gavin wants to be the big shot of the team, but his problem is that his contract is about to end and he is afraid that the team would not re-new his contract because he is getting old. I dislike his attitude towards life because he doesn’t make the smartest choices in life. He always sites around and party’s all the time. Making the club looks bad because he is in the Champions League season and supposes to be fully concentrated in football.
The setting in this book made me feel in the game playing with Santiago. The tension that the author created in the story was really good because he made the reader think what was going to happen next after Santiago would kick the ball. From the beginning of the book he starts off by describing a platy that Santiago was doing. Just
C.Vargas
Period 1
4/13/10
Dreamland
“I cry myself to sleep because it’s the only thing I can do right, I avoid you because I would rather be alone, I dress in black so I can be invisible at …” Sarah Dessen’s Dreamland scared me with knowing how abuse can start and end in seconds.
The theme of the book is abuse. Abuse is surrounding everyone everyday and doesn’t stop. Hitting, pushing, insulting words and anything to put a person down is abuse, some may think its contact but you experience abuse every day. A life lesson is that love blinds you. Being a teenager is hard enough and to go through a lose and then abuse is hard enough, sometimes to find love you have to stand pain and suffer. Abuse is the overriding theme of the book, both physical and emotional abuse from others. It comes in so many forms- direct physical contact, threats with intimidation, and abandonment. Abuse is abuse is abuse is abuse.
The style of the author is life-touching and always brings a life lesson along. What I like about the writing style is that the text brings you in and really makes you feel and live what the characters are going through. I dislike that in parts of the book the author drifts away from the point and losses the main character in the situation. It’s not funny in the way that it’s abuse from teen to teen but it does make a reader laugh afterwards because to know that anyone can really live it and like Caitlin not say anything because of fear and that you might get really abused more than you already are. Teenagers close themselves to the world because the abuser can be threatening or just for fear of what might happen to you. It gives you sense, emotion, and everything because the author takes you through the reality of abuse day to day and knowing that in society no one does nothing about it or tries to stop it. The authors voice in unique because from other books because she brings out a controversy problem that is going on every single day, hour, minute, even second, she looks into people’s soul and their real life.
Characters are an important factor. The most important character, her name is Caitlin; a sixteen-year-old decides to make a major change in her own life after her older sister runs away and leaves her alone. She losses love and looks for it in different people, finally finds it but with the wrong person and begins her nightmare. She is the main character, at such a young age and an unexpected way how abuse comes into her life. Rogerson Biscoe, the guy she is going to fall for. His green eyes and dark curly hair, is absolutely seductive. An appearance that no teenage girl can resist and would do anything for. The writer does make you believe in them as a person because she has such depth and emotions into the sentences that anyone can really feel the characters emotions and what they are going through as you read. I like Caitlin the main character because she actually goes through so much pain and at the end she manages to come out of the spell and continue her life. Every time she falls she manages to get back up. “If only I do better, I won’t get hurt…” Caitlin said it at the beginning and it started setting the tone for her character but towards the end she lastly said “I don’t deserve this”. It meant that she finally had broken out of the boys spell.
C.Vargas
Period 1
4/13/10
My conclusion to this story is that everyone should read it and have a feel from the book that this one brought to me. It took me through a real life experience of an abused teenager, just hearing it gives anyone the chills and no one in society actually takes time to listen to teenagers and their problems. Society judges on appearance but they should take time and really get to know the person and see that appearances to lie and someone may seem happy and cheerful on the outside but in reality they are just putting on a fake smile so no one can ask them anything. My final opinion on this book is that it’s the best book that I have read and everyone has a story to tell.
C.Vargas
Period 1
4/13/10
The setting in this story starts off as her old life, school, her neighbors’ house, her own home. Then it all changes once her sister leaves and transforms into Rogerson’s car and house, her new friends house Corinna and Dave’s house, and her own thoughts and dreams. The difference in between the two are Caitlin living in her sisters shadow when she is with and after when her sister leaves and she is left alone, desperate for someone to love her and she looks at life with everything being right and never wrong. Going into situations where she is lost and doesn’t seem to understand anything. She separates and forgets her past but the consequence is that she doesn’t know what is right and what is wrong and goes on living in a lost world. The setting is similar to the world the we live day to day because abuse runs through us, we show it and receive it in the most unexpected ways. Sometimes in ways we don’t even know its called abuse. I feel part of the setting due to the fact that author gets in touch with the reader as the story progresses and it seems as if your Caitlin and living it. Picturing the story is easy because every detail is in the literature and understandable. The feel you get by reading is when she gets hit or yelled or abused you feel as if you’re the one getting hit and the intensity is strong.
The plot/summary is a sixteen-year-old girl named Caitlin, she is living with her older sister, and she has neighbors, school, and people that love her. On her sixteenth birthday, her older runs away from home, thrusting Caitlin out of her sister’s shadow and into the limelight that she is unprepared to face at such a young age. Cass, Caitlin’s older sister left home without telling anyone three weeks before she was to begin her freshmen year at Yale University. Her sudden departure creates a blank in the family portrait that Caitlin’s parents can’t handle. They direct all their time to the abandonment of the family and Cass’s reason for running away, and leave Caitlin is left without parental guidance. She is brought into a whole new world when she starts high school and with no one there for her to lean on and support her in the time when she really needs it. She moves into an old ladies house where she cooks, cleans, and many other chores in order to live there and have at least a roof over her head. It follows Caitlin through her sophomore year of high school as she tries to make her own path in the absence of her parents’ guidance, and her sister. She begins to fill in the empty places with whatever attention comes towards her. That attention coming from a new guy friend Rogerson Biscoe and the two other new friends named Corinna and Dave. Her sophomore year is when Rogerson started paying attention to her and she started feeling that someone was actually taking interest in her too. Her fairytale and one of the most anticipated dreams of her might just be coming true once and for all after two or three years from her sister’s disappearance Cass. Rogerson asks her for her number and she doesn’t doubt in giving it to him, they go out and have a blast. It seems right to her and as time goes on her love towards him starts growing and she gets lost in everything that she does everything. It starts with one abusive word and moves to a push, then a slap, and until to the point where abuse is so harsh that she sheds blood from the force of hits and shoves and everything that comes her way. For two years she takes the pain until she says “that’s enough” and leaves and to know where she went is unknown, to know what is of her is unknown, but one thing is for sure she is someone that can do anything because anyone that can take a hit from a man for two years and have the courage to get back up every time is something incredible!
J. Nelson, Period 4
1984 by George Orwell (Part 1)
Have you ever imagined life in a totalitarian society? Living in a land such as present-day America, it is easy to take for granted the many freedoms we have in everyday life. However, George Orwell's 1984 paints a picture of a world where no real freedom exists, and where the life of the common man is a cookie-cutter template that fits the needs of the central government. Orwell's purpose in this novel is to provide a glimpse as to what society could de-evolve into if the individual subjects his freedoms and needs to the government in exchange for security. By creating a very believable and yet fantastic future world, and through engaging storytelling, Orwell posits a possible negative outcome of excess of governmental control.
Two major themes readily make themselves apparent in 1984: the necessity of control of the sexual act for authoritarian rule, and the oxymoronic expression that "war is peace". It is revealed early on in the novel that "the real, undeclared purpose" of the Party (the organization of citizenry subject to authoritarian rule) is to "remove all pleasure from the sexual act" (65). Indeed, many young women of the Party are members of the Junior Anti-Sex League, who promise to abstain from the act for life. This behavior is not the result of morals or some religious obligation; rather, the strategy of the government is to keep the energy of intercourse bottled up to it can be dedicated to service in the Party. The narrator explains that "there was a direct, intimate connection between chastity and political orthodoxy...the sex impulse was dangerous to the Party" (133). By controlling the internal urges of the citizen, the central authority goes a step beyond simple obedience and commands submission of the individual's subconscious mind. Finally, after the main character Winston finds a love partner in black-haired Julia, she admits to him that she had had sex "scores of times". However, this does not deter him; on the contrary, "anything that hinted at corruption always filled him with a wild hope" and "he wished it had been hundreds--thousands [of times]" (125). Previous to this point in the novel, Winston is concerned that he is alone in his "thoughtcrime" against the Party and his rebellious wishes. However, the fact that Julia had done something so fundamentally against the establishment fills him with wonder and contentment. Another theme present in this novel is the expression "war is peace". In this book, the world is split into 3 major regions; Oceania, Eurasia, and Eastasia. (Winston is a citizen of Oceania.) At any given time, Oceania is at war with either Eurasia or Eastasia with the other as Oceania's ally, and whenever Oceania changes enemies, all knowledge of the previous war is wiped out. As the narrator explains, "Oceania was at war with Eurasia: therefore Oceania had always been at war with Eurasia. The enemy of the moment always represented absolute evil..." (34). This rather confusing state of affairs seems to demean the real purpose of war, to fight for a greater cause, and to an extent this is true; in 1984, the government uses war, as everything else, to promote its own self interests. A fictional book in this story ("The Theory and Practice of Oligarchial Collectivism" by Emmanuel Goldstein) describes the true motives of the government: "The primary aim of modern warfare...is to use up the products of the machine without raising the standard of living" (188). As the government increases production and efficiency to accommodate the needs of war, this extra income is sent directly to the oligarchial rulers rather than to the citizenry. This justifies the expression "war is peace" because the state of war brings about economic prosperity to those in power. The themes of sexual control and "war is peace" are prevalent throughout the work.
J. Nelson, Period 4
1984 by George Orwell (Part 2)
Orwell uses imagery and descriptive language as well as symbolism as main components of his literary style. The beginning of the novel reads as follows: "It was a bright cold day in April, and the clocks were striking thirteen. Winston Smith, his chin nuzzled into his breast in an effort to escape the vile wind, slipped quickly through the glass doors of Victory Mansions, though not quickly enough to prevent a swirl of gritty dust from entering along with him." (1). Orwell's style is very easily readable, yet it is also very descriptive and detailed in nature. The reader feels drawn in to the world of 1984 and it is very hard to put the book down. In addition to using descriptive imagery, Orwell makes use of sophisticated symbolism throughout his work. For example, in the neighborhood of the proles (the commoners who aren't subject to the Party) Winston finds a small antique shop. Within it is a curious item described as a "heavy lump of glass, curved on one side, flat on the other, making almost a hemisphere. There was a peculiar softness, as of rainwater, in both the color and the texture of the glass. At the heart of it, magnified by the curved surface, there was a strange, pink, convoluted object that recalled a rose or a sea anemone" (95). This strange artifact from a past world seems to symbolize a small sliver of hope and freedom among the new world dominated by government and socialism. It is a representation of Winston himself who finds himself not belonging to the setting he is placed in, as he yearns for freedom as the proles have. The narrator elaborates on this glass paperweight: "What appealed to him about it was not so much its beauty as the air it seemed to possess of belonging to an age quite different from the present one...The thing was doubly attractive because of its apparent uselessness" (96). Winston wants to own this thing partly because it has no real purpose for existence in the world of extreme government efficiency. Furthermore, it is a connection to the past world which Winston can only dream of, a world where men lived free and separate from the chains of government. Orwell's style is very engaging, full of descriptive language and symbolism.
J. Nelson, Period 4
1984 by George Orwell (Part 3)
The characters of 1984 are very diverse, round, and believable. Winston Smith is described in the beginning as " a smallish, frail figure, the meagerness of his body merely emphasized by the blue overalls...His hair was very fair, his face naturally sanguine..." (2). Smith, the protagonist of the novel, questions his place in the world and the necessity of so much control by the government. However, he is unable to take action or speak out because the government, Smith believes, has the power to read the minds of its citizens. By so much as having a rebellious thought (thoughtcrime), one is in danger of being arrested by the Thought Police. As a result, Winston ends up taking small, gradual steps towards revolt against the government and Big Brother. Eventually Winston finds a love partner in Julia, a former member of the Junior Anti-Sex League who has the same thoughts against the Party. Julia is "in some ways...far more acute than Winston, and far less susceptible to Party propaganda" (153). Julia much more readily speaks her mind about the degrading state of affairs, and she is extremely smart in knowing who is trustworthy and how to avoid getting caught in her conversations against the government. She inspires Winston in his revolt and leads him to make bolder moves to assert himself. Finally, a co-worker of Winston named Parsons represents the loyal members of the Party. He explains to Winston that his 7 year old daughter arrests a suspicious man to make sure "he was some kind of enemy agent...She spotted he was wearing a funny kind of shoes...Pretty smart for a nipper of seven, eh?" (57). Parsons and his children are brainwashed by the government to be completely obedient in all things and to immediately turn in any suspicious persons to the police, many of whom are never seen again. These kinds of citizens are the antithesis of Winston who is desperate to do anything contrary to the Party and yearns to break free from this crazy world. The characters of 1984 are diverse, genuinely interesting and realistic.
J. Nelson, Period 4
1984 by George Orwell (Part 4)
The setting in Orwell's novel is very sci-fi, strange, and seemingly realistic. As the book was written in 1949, the title 1984 refers to the year in which the plot takes place. Secret anti-government writings within the novel state that "the world of today is a bare, hungry, dilapidated place compared with the world that existed before 1914" (188). The futuristic world is devoid of hope as the central government has taken over everything and the lives of the people are products of the government's needs. In essence, the setting is often described by readers as a "dystopia" -- a utopia that failed and deteriorated into something terrible. In this novel, the world is divided into 3 major regions; "The splitting up of the world into three great superstates was an event which could be and indeed was foreseen before the middle of the twentieth century...Oceania comprises the Americas, the Atlantic islands including the British Isles, Australasia, and the southern portion of Africa" (185). Oceania is where Winston resides, and is one of the three grand states which make up the world, the others being Eurasia and Eastasia. All three superstates have identical government structures and demands of the people. In essence, the lives of the citizenry are the same everywhere across the world. It is revealed that "in one combination or another, these three superstates are permanently at war" (185). At any given time, Oceania is either at war with Eurasia or Eastasia. The purpose of this is that wartime increases overall production by the nation and therefore increased income, none of which is returned to the hardworking citizenry. This serves to aid the government in its selfish aims, which are more control and more money. The setting of 1984 is a corrupted, hopeless future dominated by socialistic authoritarians.
J. Nelson, Period 4
1984 by George Orwell (Part 6)
I believe Orwell is successful in his objective of projecting his views on the results of a socialist or authoritarian society. While socialism may never become so extreme in a country as to make the citizenry unable to think a bad thought against the government, Orwell's novel says something about the loss of individualism that comes with this structure of society. The freedoms of the common man and his ability to make his own choices are necessarily taken away in order to provide more security and equality for the individual. While socialism may be appealing to some because it guarantees equal treatment for all men and women and an equal life, it takes away from the uniqueness of life that one can experience. Orwell's 1984 is an extreme representation of the socialist system that successfully projects his negative attitude towards this system of rule.
One book that shares themes with 1984 is Lord of the Flies by William Golding. Both of these novels deal with certain aspects of the downfall of the human race. However, where 1984 involves the deterioration of society that arises from increased governmental control, Lord of the Flies is a commentary on the deeper nature of man. Golding predicts that in a desert island scenario, man will ultimately succumb to his instinctual selfish desires and animal behaviors, and that civilization is merely a product of years of interaction between human beings. These novels do share a genuinely interesting story filled with symbolism that is appealing to the reader. Where 1984 is more suited to a science-fiction fan, Lord of the Flies better suits a more scholarly, philosophical kind of person who wishes to probe the true inner being of the human race.
1984 is a yet relatively simple yet satisfactory take on the concept of the negative utopia. Orwell creates a very believable, almost scary world in which the government controls and permeates every aspect of life. Winston Smith's struggle against this indomitable foe makes for an extremely engaging read saturated with imagery, symbolism, and just plain great storytelling. The characters, setting, and plot of this novel are all equally interesting and worthy of praise on their own, but woven together into a work of literature, they interact to create something greater than the sum of its parts. It really is difficult to find something negative to say about this novel. For its unique plot, believable setting and characters, and page-turning story, 1984 gets 5 out of 5 stars.
*****
J. Nelson, Period 4
1984 by George Orwell (Part 5)
The plot of 1984 primarily surrounds the protagonist Winston Smith in his gradual rebellion against the domineering socialist regime. The first instance of Winston's rebellion occurs in the beginning of the novel when Winston writes in a diary. Even this simple act is forbidden by the government because it leads to dangerous thoughts. As Winston explores the depths of his mind he finds himself writing "DOWN WITH BIG BROTHER" over and over again. The narrator explains "Whether he wrote DOWN WITH BIG BROTHER, or whether he refrained from writing it, made no difference...the Thought Police would get him just the same" (19). In the world of 1984, the Thought Police investigate suspicious citizens by observing their facial expressions on telescreens and listening to private conversations in hidden microphones to incriminate suspects. The Thought Police are completely subject to the government, and victims who are arrested are often never heard of again. In committing these sinful acts against the almighty socialist system, "to be killed was what you expected. But before death...there was the routine of confession that had to be gone through" (103). This process of confession consists of writhing in agony on the floor, being tortured relentlessly by interrogators and admitting to horrible things you know you never did. The purpose of this torture is to train the citizenry and to cleanse them of all thoughts of revolt, to create a perfectly mechanized, obedient people. The only purpose of the citizenry in the government's eyes is to subject themselves to Big Brother. Eventually, after getting together with Julia and committing all kinds of thoughtcrime and conspiracy in secret, Winston is finally caught. His house is invaded by men and as Winston looks upon them, he realizes "for the first time in his life he was looking, with knowledge, at a member of the Thought Police" (224). This is a big turning point in the novel because it marks the first time that Winston and Julia are separated from one another. The novel continues on to describe what happens to Winston after he is caught, and the acts of "cleansing" he is subjected to which is intended to make him just another robotic citizen doing his duties to the Party. The novel of 1984 is full of twists and suspense, and succeeds in keeping the reader engaged.
Zodel Pedroza
Period 5
April 14, 2010
The Reptile Room by Lemony Snicket continues the Baudelaire tale of misery and woe. The three orphans get a new home with their Uncle Montgomery Montgomery. Luckly for the three orphans their new uncle they met was quiet nice and cheerful. Unfortunately for the very unfortunate orphans something bad and evil always had to happen. Little did they know their evil Uncle Count Olaf is after their fortune and with Uncle Monty's new assistant, Stephano, arrives. To their horror, the children discover that Stephano is the nasty Count Olaf, intent in his pursuit of their trust fund.
This book is definitely not a bed time story, though it's not scary, it doesn't have a happy ending. Snicket tells you this early in the book, you'd think that it would spoil it all, but it actually makes you want to read on, because you just can't believe that this story will end all that bad. Snicket describes the characters so well; it was as if I had known them personally. He described the setting so well, I could picture everything perfectly.
The authors’ purpose if this book is mainly about even people with very unfortunate events in their lives they’re bound to find a needle in a haystack. There will always be a happy event in their lives that might change them and not have to live a life so miserable their entire life. For the Baudelaire orphans are very intelligent and also very bright but even I thought after all some people are just dimwitted like anybody else. I say this because the Baudelaire orphans don’t have common sense. It really ticks me off but after all they’re just lonely unfortunate orphans.
From my point of view this is a little problem for the orphans because they are intimidated and don’t have enough courage to overcome obstacles that are problems in their life’s. Uncle Monty is a renowned herpetologist with a large home an exotic reptile room, and loads of books. Stephano attempts to do crazy things to but he has to hold his anger in order for his evil plans to work. Uncle Monty doesn’t realize that Stephano is up to no good even after all the hard evidence; he actually thinks Stephano is after his new reptile. “The Incredibly Dangerous snake” that he previously had discovered after his journey.
As our erstwhile author periodically enjoys pointing out, life is not to be happy for the Baudelaire orphans, and Count Olaf appears once again, though disguised. It takes very little time for Uncle Montgomery to be killed; and once again the orphans risk being in a very bad situation. Eventually, through the cleverness of the orphans, you must know that Count Olaf will somehow be unmasked, and the children saved, though to what end?
This book was not quite as dark as the first book, and the implied sexual situations relating to Violet did not appear to exist in this book, for which I was very happy. However, death reappears in this book, and Count Olaf remains the evil person he was in the first. Thus this book is likely unsuitable for younger readers and age 9 should likely be a reasonable minimum. While the images are dark in this book, they are not as dark as in the first. I recommend this book. I really enjoyed it and will keep on reading the book after this one.
E. Gonzalez
Period 3
April 14, 2010
Tears Of A Tiger (Part1)
Sharon M. Draper’s story Tears Of A tiger not only made me memorize but made me remember a lesson that I already know in that is never to drink and drive. One quote from the book is “and I’ve been glad I had such good friends now one of them is gone and I fell responsible” this quote has a big impact not only on me but can be a big impact on anyone who would feel the same way because it talks about death which is something that will always be shocking. Now the plot of the book Tears Of A Tiger all starts off with a boy’s friend that dies in a accident while he drove the car and a story about what happens to the boy after the car accident also what he goes through with his life after a terrible deadly accident. My opinion on this book is that this book has a lot of lessons like one is never to drink and drive also never to feel guilty but also push yourself and let others help you if needed help. In my opinion Tears Of A Tiger is a sad but a good book that will keep you turning the page because it talks about situations that can happen in the real world.
The theme of the book is that you don’t need to drink and drive if you like drinking and that’s how you can have a good time you can always ask a friend, family member, and even a taxi to give you a ride home. Also the theme of Tears Of A Tiger is that you should never blame anyone because there is no need because it can cause more problems or it just wont make it any better by blaming another person or yourself. The life lesson this book illustrates is a life lesson that everyone in the real world should no and that’s never to drink and drive because you can take your own life away or you can also take another life or lives away that can be innocent human lives another thing drinking and driving can do is put you behind bars for life or years but also make other families heart broken due to a loss.
Now Sharon M. Draper’s style in this book is really touching because she makes each moment in the book like you are really experiencing it but also you think about it and it makes you think situations like this can happen to anyone at anytime also that her style is a really realistic style of writing. What I like about the book’s writing style is that the whole book is written in conversations that people have. What I dislike about the style is that you never know who is speaking sometimes because in the story when they speak it doesn’t have quotations so you got to be paying attention to the story in order to find out who’s speaking to whom. Yes the story gives a really great sense of the place it is set because mostly each chapter’s title tells you the place, date, and time which is a good thing about Tears Of A Tiger. Sharon M. Drapers voice is sort of the same voice as previous books I have read because it is a voice that is used by the story’s characters through out the book.
E. Gonzalez
Period 3
April 14, 2010
Tears Of A Tiger (Part 2)
The main character in this book is Andy Jackson who goes to Hazelwood High School which he plays basketball in the Team Tigers and dreams of becoming a N.B.A superstar in the future but all that ends when he drives one night after a really successful game that he and his team wins. Another character in the story is Robert Washington who plays with Andy in the same basketball team and has the same dreams in becoming a N.B.A superstar but been better then Andy but wishes to play him in N.B.A and he is one of the reasons of this story. Other characters in the story are B.J and Tyrone who witness and also experience a big accident along with their best friends Andy and Robert. The female characters in this story are Kiesha and Rhonda, Kiesha is Andy’s girlfriend who tries to help out Andy through the whole story and Rhonda is the girlfriend of Tyrone who live a good relationship but opposite of Andy’s relationship. Yes the writer makes the characters believe like they are real people because of all the conversations they have through the entire book. Yes I like the characters because Sharon makes their voice be heard and understand what they talk about detail by detail.
The setting in this book is in Andy’s High School, the characters homes, and also in a street by their school. This story really compares and contrasts with the real world because if you read the book it talks about things that can happen to any human being in the real world. Yes the author makes you feel like part of the setting because in every chapter the characters describe exactly what they are doing and were they are at. Yes I can picture the setting if close my eyes because the story’s situations happen in homes and in school so this makes me see the setting because I am also a high school student.
Now the plot of this story is that the main character Andy Jackson and three other friends had just won an important basketball game. They decided to get together and go celebrate their victory. All of them drink except for B.J. doesn’t like drinking. They hear honking while been on the road but just laughed because of all the alcohol. All of a sudden, a wall is in front of them and before they know it, they hit it. Three of the guys get out but Robert Washington, Andy's best friend and captain of the Hazelwood Basketball Team is stuck inside of the car. Two guys run over to help Robert out but as soon as they get on the hood of the car they are thrown off after a loud and strong bang. The gas tank explodes with Robert been stuck inside while he burns to death. Now, months later, Andy can't stop blaming himself for what happened. As he turns away from family, friends, and even his girlfriend he finds he is losing the most precious thing of all which is believing in himself.
Yes I can probably compare this book to other books that I have read because of realistic type of voices that this story has and the problems that can happen to anyone at anytime and also that have happened to human lives on this earth. Yes this book can really relate to current events and issues because of the main thing about this story which is drinking and driving like for example my favorite M.L.B team the Angels lost a player and friend name Nick Adenhart due to drunk drivers so yes this story can relate to real events. Yes this book connects with me on a personal level because this book can be so realistic that the situations and problems in the book can happen at any second to anyone breathing.
My recommendation for this book is that I recommend it to anyone who likes to read about real life lessons and likes to read about things that we should think 100 times before doing it. I also recommend this book to anyone who enjoys drama and mysteries because it’s a book full of surprises and a book that will leave you thinking also shocked.
O. Ortiz
Period, 3
4/14/10
Looking for Alaska (part 1)
The book begins with Miles Halter's parents throwing him a goodbye party, as he is leaving his Florida home to go to Culver Creek Preparatory School in Alabama. Although his parents are disappointed when only two people attend, Miles has learned to expect nothing more; he is not popular at his current school. When pressed, he uses François Rabelais's last words. This ambitious first novel introduces 16 year old Miles Halter, whose hobby is memorizing famous people's last words. When he chucks his boring existence in Florida to begin this chronicle of his first year at an Alabama boarding school, he recalls the poet Rabelais on his deathbed who said, I go to seek a Great Perhaps. Miles's roommate, the 'Colonel, has an interest in drinking and elaborate pranks pursuits shared by his best friend, Alaska, a bookworm who is also 'the hottest girl in all of human history.
Alaska has a boyfriend at Vanderbilt, but Miles falls in love with her anyway. Other than her occasional hollow, feminist diatribes, Alaska is mostly male fantasy a curvy babe who loves sex and can drink guys under the table. Readers may pick up on clues that she is also doomed. Green replaces conventional chapter headings with a foreboding countdown ninety eight days before, fifty days before and Alaska foreshadows her own death twice I may die young, she says, but at least I'll die smart. After Alaska drives drunk and plows into a police car, Miles and the Colonel puzzle over whether or not she killed herself. Theological questions from their religion class add some introspective gloss. But the novel's chief appeal lies in Miles well articulated lust and his initial excitement about being on his own for the first time. Readers will only hope that this is not the last word from this promising new author.
Pudge becomes encircled by friends whose lives are everything but safe and boring. Their nucleus is razor sharp, sexy, and self destructive Alaska, who has perfected the arts of pranking and evading school rules. Pudge falls impossibly in love. When tragedy strikes the close-knit group, it is only in coming face to face with death that Pudge discovers the value of living and loving unconditionally. Florida was plenty hot. Hot enough that your clothes stuck to you like scotch tape and sweat dripped like tears from your forehead into your eyes. But it was only was hot outside, and generally he went outside to walk from one air conditioned location to another.
This did not prepare him for the unique sort of heat that one encounters fifteen miles south Birmingham, Alabama, at Culver Creek Preparatory School. Now was the time for a magnificently cold shower for Pudge the small bathroom contained a huge full length behind the door, and so I could not escape the reflection of himself surprise him. Unfortunately the shower seemed to have designed for someone approximately three feet, seven inches tall when he opened the bathroom door after his shower, a towel wrapped around his waist, he saw a short muscular guy with a shock of brown hair, he was hauling a gigantic army green duffel bag through the door of his room.
O. Ortiz
Period, 3
4/14/10
Looking for Alaska (part 2)
After the first week keeping up with his classes proved easier than he expected. By the third week of classes, plenty of kids had been sunburned to a bufriedo like golden brown from days spent chatting outside in the shadeless dorm circle during free periods. One of the unique things about Culver Creek was the jury. Every semester, the faculty elected twelve students, three from each class, to serve on the jury. The jury meted out punishment for nonexpellable offenses, for everything from staying out past curfew to smoking. Usually it was smoking or being in a girl’s room after seven. The eagle served as the judge, and he had the right to overturn the jury’s verdict, but he almost never did. Pudge was so in love with Alaska that even that she was taken he didn’t care about it, he didn’t want anyone else but her. Alaska found him a girlfriend but all she had to do now was to convince Pudge to like her and her like Pudge.
The name was Lara which she sat on his lap on the way to McDonald’s. it was clearly obvious that she liked Pudge because she was clearly talking about having hot sex with him. Their triple and a half date started off well enough. Pudge was in Alaska’s room for the shake of getting him a girlfriend. On Wednesday morning he woke up with a stuffy nose to an entirely new Alabama. As he walked to Alaska’s room that morning, the frosty grass of the form circle crunched beneath his shoes. Alaska was holding a burning green candle in her hand upside down, homemade volcano that looked a bit like a Technicolor middle school science project. Later that night, after Alaska stuck her finger down her throat and made herself puke in front of us because she was to drunk to walk into the woods, he laid down in his sleeping bag.
Lara was next to him so he moved his arm to the edge of her bag and pushed it slightly to her hand. Then out of the nowhere they start kissing with out stopping then Pudge ask Lara if he wanted to be his girlfriend and she accepted that’s when they start going out when Pudge knew he didn’t like her that he was in love with Alaska. After getting drunk and smoked a lot one day they Alaska, Pudge and the Colonel were drinking as usual they were very drunk at that time and Alaska came out with the idea of play truth or dare so she started and she asked Pudge truth or dare so Pudge choose to do a dare. Alaska then told him to hock up with her then with out thinking about it Pudge start kissing her then after a while the both end up on the floor kissing and madding out. They last a while when Alaska told him that she was very tired that it was “to be continued” so they stopped but Alaska out of the nowhere starts crying.
O. Ortiz
Period, 3
4/14/10
Looking for Alaska (part 3)
Pudge thought that she was crying because of what happened but then she told Pudge and the Colonel to go and distract the eagle because she wanted to leave. So they did they distract the eagle so she could leave. The next day the eagle told everyone to meet on the gym because they had some important news to tell them, when they were all there they told them that Alaska die in a car accident. They said that she was very drunk and that she crash with a police car and that the impact was to hard that she hit her chest with the car wheel and she died right away. They couldn’t believe it specially Pudge because the love of his life was dead now. Weeks later the Colonel and Pudge started to investigate the cause of her dead because they wanted to know why did she died they were wondering if it was a suicide or an accident.
After week on trying to figure out what really happened they end up giving up Pudge wanted to keep investigating but it wasn’t worth it soothe school decided to make a park on her memorial, so that’s when they decided to do it that way she would like to do it. They end up hiring a stripper so that the day that they open the park the stripper was there he took off his clothes and danced with as the music was played. Pudge was still in love with Alaska but am sure that she’s going to be in his heart forever because you never forget your true love. We cannot be born, and cannot die. Like all energy we can only change shapes and sizes and manifestations.
In my opinion I do hardly recommend this book because it all starts with a simple guy (Pudge) who goes to college and starts sperimenting a lot of new thing that he never thought he would go through. This book simply contains how really college life is. It involves sex, drugs, drinking, and dead. Pudge was so in love with Alaska that even though she was taken he still fall in love with her, and even though she died with out anyone knowing why the reason why she did that he refuse to give up on her. I think that this book bases on reality because that’s how life is specially in college you fall in love with someone and out of the nowhere that person is gone and your still there loving that person but you cant do anything about but try to move on and keep going with your life.
Y. Padilla
Period 1
Have you fallen in love and find out a big secret he/ her has hide from you? The novel name Evermore written by Alyson Noel was written as a love, tragic, self-honest and mystery. The book has to do with immortals and how Ever Bloom falls in love with Damen Auguste. But not knowing each others secret of being immortals. Ever can read people’s future, auras and hear their thoughts just by a touch of hands. This book was written to see how couples react to each other when their secrets are told or said. The novel explains how true love can never die and last forever. The interesting things about this book was how Damen is mysteriously delivers red tulips to Ever, how he is an immortal, and he goes though difficult things to be with Ever.
The theme in this book was about love and how immortal’s fall in love. Both Ever and Damen fall deeply in love not knowing that they read each others mind and both are immortals. The lesson that this book gives to people or couples is to be honest, trustful and understanding. They shouldn’t think about other people and just be a respectful couple. Like being sweat to your partner. In the book it says how Damen is sweat and mysteriously delivers tulips to Ever. He always has her parking spot reserve.
The author’s in the novel where believable by have the qualities and having the emotions towards the others characters. As reading the book I would believe I was
Ever and how romantic Damen was. This novel made me enjoy it, get so attach to it, it made me become the character. My dislikes about this book was that it wasn’t a happy ending. Both of them ended up separated and become enemies. After told that Damen was an immortal.
This can’t compare other books because I haven’t read others that has been interest, loveable and tragically. The book informs you how many couple goes thought difficult situations just to be with the partner. The novel may be romantic but it sure isn’t an issue in real life because there’s not such a thing as immortals. But life can be romantic and have the same quality as the book. Like honest to your couple and not keep the secret to yourself… Understanding the problems towards the person but also having the compassion towards her/him.
I recommend this book to students/others to read this book because it’s interesting and has a love story. This book may be to those who enjoy romantic stories. The novel says how you can be love just by staring. Just how Ever and Damen fell in love..
Y. Padilla
Period 1
Have you fallen in love and find out a big secret he/ her has hide from you? The novel name Evermore written by Alyson Noel was written as a love, tragic, self-honest and mystery. The book has to do with immortals and how Ever Bloom falls in love with Damen Auguste. But not knowing each others secret of being immortals. Ever can read people’s future, auras and hear their thoughts just by a touch of hands. This book was written to see how couples react to each other when their secrets are told or said. The novel explains how true love can never die and last forever. The interesting things about this book was how Damen is mysteriously delivers red tulips to Ever, how he is an immortal, and he goes though difficult things to be with Ever.
The theme in this book was about love and how immortal’s fall in love. Both Ever and Damen fall deeply in love not knowing that they read each others mind and both are immortals. The lesson that this book gives to people or couples is to be honest, trustful and understanding. They shouldn’t think about other people and just be a respectful couple. Like being sweat to your partner. In the book it says how Damen is sweat and mysteriously delivers tulips to Ever. He always has her parking spot reserve.
The author’s in the novel where believable by have the qualities and having the emotions towards the others characters. As reading the book I would believe I was
Ever and how romantic Damen was. This novel made me enjoy it, get so attach to it, it made me become the character. My dislikes about this book was that it wasn’t a happy ending. Both of them ended up separated and become enemies. After told that Damen was an immortal.
This can’t compare other books because I haven’t read others that has been interest, loveable and tragically. The book informs you how many couple goes thought difficult situations just to be with the partner. The novel may be romantic but it sure isn’t an issue in real life because there’s not such a thing as immortals. But life can be romantic and have the same quality as the book. Like honest to your couple and not keep the secret to yourself… Understanding the problems towards the person but also having the compassion towards her/him.
I recommend this book to students/others to read this book because it’s interesting and has a love story. This book may be to those who enjoy romantic stories. The novel says how you can be love just by staring. Just how Ever and Damen fell in love..
A Separate Peace
JTorres
P:4
4/15/2010
Part:1
“ I think its the best-written, best designed and most moving novel I have read in many years. Beginning with a tiny incident among ordinary boys, it ends by being as deep and as big as evil itself” (Aubrey Menen). John Knowles’ A Separate Peace captivated my uttermost attention with its engaging plot that moves towards an interesting target.
One of the major themes of this novel is man vs. self. The time setting of this novel is during World War II, but the actual fighting of the war is never described by the author. The technique he uses is a completely different approach to the war novels because he places a strong emphasis on the war within oneself rather than the actual fighting of the war. Through this Knowles is implying that in a certain point in their life everyone goes to war with themselves. Knowles writes, “Everyone has a moment in history which belongs particularly to him. It is the moment when his emotions achieve their most powerful sway over him...” (Knowles 32). This is evident in the novel’s main character, Gene. Gene’s inner war is brought forth by the envy that he feels towards his best friend, Finny. He himself realizes this when when states that he “would kill [himself] out of jealous envy (Knowles 44). The novel implicitly associates this realization of the necessity of a personal war with adulthood and the loss of childhood innocence. Gene’s envy makes him loose his innocence when he starts to have radical thoughts about his friendship with Finny. For example, he believes that Finny and him have a “death rivalry” (Knowles 48). In either case, the overall theme is clear: all humans create enemies for themselves and go to war against them.
A Separate Peace
JTorres
Part 2
Knowles has an unique writing style. This story is told in a first person point of view by Gene Forrester who tells his story recalling the events that happened fifteen years earlier at his boarding house. Much of the story contains a dark style that overwhelms the reader. This dark tone is in part due to that the fact that Gene, the narrator, narrates events as they happen but he does not quite touch upon his emotions or thoughts on the events which leads the reader to distrust Gene. For example, when Finny reveals to Gene that he is his best friend, Gene believes that “it was a courageous thing to say” (Knowles 40). Although Gene feels admiration towards Finny towards he does not say that he considers Finny “his best friend also” (Knowles 40). Gene states that this is because “something held him back”, yet he does not reveal what that thing is (Knowles 40). This ambiguity on behalf of Gene continues throughout the story and that is why the reader feels that Gene is an unreliable character. This novel is unlike any other novel that I have ever read because of the fact the I feel that the narrator is distrustful. I am used to trusting the narrator as the story progresses instead of losing my trust in them. I believe the dark style fits the time setting, the middle of World War II. “A moment in history” where “people in America cry often” (Knowles 32).
The protagonists of the story are Gene and Phineas, both of whom are best friends. Gene is the narrator of the novel. When the reader first encounters Gene he is visiting his old school, Devon School, as an adult. This is the point of the novel in which the reader discovers that Gene is an adult looking back at his childhood experiences at Devon School. Gene is described as “the best student in the school” and “a pretty good athlete” (Knowles 47). Gene is a character full of mystery. He seems unsure of many aspects but one thing that he is sure of is his envy towards Finny. Although, he considers Gene his best friend he can not help but feel envy towards him. Even though Finny trusts Gene completely, Gene is not loyal to Finny. Phineas, or Finny as Gene likes to call him, is the complete opposite of Gene. Finny “was without question the best athlete” of Devon School. (Knowles 47). He was so good that he managed to achieve “certain feats as an athlete” (Knowles 33). Finny’s only flaw was “that he was a very poor student”; in class he generally “sat slouched in his chair’, “written tests were his downfall...and as a result he got grades which were barely passing” (Knowles 46, 47). Throughout the novel Finny proves to be a charismatic figure who can talk his way out of any situation. For example, he talks his way out of trouble with the headmaster when he wore “the Devon School tie” as a belt” (Knowles 20). His used the excuse that it represented “bombing in Central Europe, because when you come down to it the school is involved in everything that happens in the war” and according to Finny “it’s all the same war and the same world” (Knowles 20). Through this the reader can also infer that although he constantly tests the limits Finny does not want to prove victorious in any of the situation, thus showing that Finny has a non-competitive viewpoint of life. One extreme example of Finny’s non-competitiveness is when he breaks the Devon school record and no one is around. Instead, of breaking it again in front of an audience, like Gene suggests, Finny states that they are not “going to talk about this” and that “its just between you and me” (Knowles 36). Finny’s carefree attitude is the aspect that Gene dislikes most of him. This leads Gene to feel envy towards Finny. Finny’s inability to see Gene’s envy makes him a good person because he never imagines that Gene’s feeling for him are not as pure as his for Gene.
A Separate Peace
JTorres
Part 3
Knowles does make the characters believable because they are portrayed in real life situations and how each character learns to deal with it. For the most part the characters are likable except Gene who at times becomes too radical.
The novel is set in Devon School, an all boys’ boarding school located in New Hampshire.
Due to the fact that it does “not stand isolated behind walls and gates” but rather “emerged naturally from the town” it is considered “the most beautiful school in New England” whose “power was asserted” to every onlooker (Knowles 3, 4). The school’s majestic beauty is in part due to its well thought out structure which is composed of “a large yard, a group of trees, three similar dormitories, a circle of old houses-living together in contentious harmony” that make it look “like a museum” (Knowles 1, 4). The trees that surround the school are “massive and almost annoying behind their thick layers of ivy, big, old-looking leaves”, yet they give they school a naturalistic atmosphere. Devon is given human qualities when it is characterized as “both scholarly and very athletic” which makes the reader infer that it is widely praised. The time setting of this novel is 1942, a few months after the United States entered World War II. It is mentioned in the novel that due to the war the United States is in search for labor force and soldiers. This brings a focus on the fact that the war impacts Devon School who set up the “Summer Session...to keep up with the pace of the war” (Knowles 7). The setting of this novel contrasts with the world around me because in today’s society boarding schools’ are seen as oppressive forces, therefore public and even private schools’ are more common. It also contrasts to the world around me because their is no world war going on and it is now illegal to prepare young adults for war in school. Although one may infer that it would be difficult to picture Devon School, it is not. Knowles use of descriptive details makes it difficult, if not impossible to not picture the setting. An example would be the Devon’s playing field which is described as “healthy green turf...brushed with dew...shot through with the twilight sun” (Knowles 10). Another example would be the description of the gym that “meditated behind its gray walls, the high, wide, oval-topped windows shinning back at the sun” (Knowles 23).
A Separate Peace
JTorres
Part 5
A Separate Peace Book Review
is also the first to find out that war does not just mean that “nylon, meat, gasoline, and steel are rare” but rather that tens of thousands of people are dying everyday overseas (Knowles 32). Leper’s later desertion of war shows that although Devon school tries to prepare them from war the things that go on can never be taught at boarding school. In Lord of the Flies, Simon serves as the christ-like figure because he represents a human goodness that is connected with nature. Nature within the novel serves as a sanctuary for him away from the other boys (in this case society) is given a garden of eden state. Unlike some of the other boys, Simon shows morality because he believes in it not out of guilt. His goodness is apparent when he behaves kindly toward’s the littluns. He becomes the first to realize that the beast does not exist, but is rather the savagery that deep within human impulse. He discovery later leads him to his destruction because once the road to civilization is paved the dark side of human nature steps in. His discovery portrays the primitive characteristics of mankind because it shows that there is an inherent evil within everyone. Simon brings a contrasting ideal because he is the essential human goodness which portrays civilized characterization. His murder shows that savagery comes between man’s journey towards civilization. A Separate Peace does not relate to current events or issues and it does not connect with me on a personal level.
In conclusion, A Separate Peace is a novel full of a dark tone and a pessimistic view of human nature. For its splendid ability to captivate the reader in its engaging lot, I award this novel five out of five stars. I highly recommend this novel to anyone who is interested in a challenging read and who is willing to be lost in a world filled violence, envy, and deception.
A Separate Peace
JTorres
Part 4
The plot of this novel is very engaging. The novel begins with the narrator looking back at past events in his life that occurred during his childhood at Devon School. Early on in the novel the reader is introduced to Finny, the narrator’s best friend during his childhood. At first their friendship is described as close and intimate. This close and intimate friendship is broken when Gene starts to feel resentment and envy towards Finny for his carefree attitude. As Gene’s envy grows stronger and stronger Finny becomes less and less blind towards its evils. When Finny has an accident the reader is filled with doubt as to whether Gene caused it or not. Gene later reveals his guiltiness to both the reader and Finny but Finny still refuses to believe that Gene would have an evil feelings towards him. Instead, Finny begins to live his life through Gene’s. As the war continues, most of the boys at Devon School begin to enlist. Both Finny and Gene are scared of enlisting so they begin to say that the war is just a figment of everyone’s imagination. Brinker, a boy close to both Finny and Gene, begins to questions Finny’s accident. He decides to confront both Finny and Gene about it; when things remain unclear he calls in a surprise witness. The scene ends with Finny making his way “across the marble floor towards the door”; then what had to happen happened (Knowles 168).
A Separate Peace can be compared to Golding’s Lord of the Flies. This is in part due that the protagonist’s of both novels are young adults who suffer from the evils of envy. In A Separate Peace, the reader encounters the friendship of two boys, Gene and Finny. Finny is always getting Gene an himself into troublesome situations. On one occasion Gene almost has accident, but Finny saves him. Although Finny saves his life, Gene does not thank Finny because he was “stopped by that level of feeling deeper than thought, which contains the truth”. In this case, the truth is that Gene feels envy towards Finny. Genes envy towards Finny develops more and more as the story progress; it goes to such extremes that Gene becomes paranoid of Finny’s every move. For example, Gene comes up with the idea that he and Finny have a “deadly rivalry” (Knowles 48). The reader is aware that Gene’s idea has reached an extreme when he states “Finny had deliberately set out to wreck my studies” so that Finny “would be way ahead” (Knowles 45). The strong envy that Gene feels towards Finny blinds him from realizing that Finny is just trying to keep their friendship strong. Finny in no way feels like he and Gene are rivals. This same situation is also apparent in Lord of the Flies. In the beginning the reader is informed that Jack and Ralph had a “shy liking” towards one another (Golding 23). This liking disappears instantly when Ralph is voted chief over Jack. Jack is suddenly then overcome with a strong envy towards Ralph. This envy grows over the course of the novel as Jack becomes more and more savage. For example, Jack ignores Ralph rules and disrespects his authority hoping to encourage the boys to deprive Ralph of power. When Jack finds his task unsuccessful Jack starts his own “tribe” of “hunters” (Golding 150). Jack’s envy does not let him see that Ralph is a far greater leader then he would have ever been; Jack would have never established rules to provide order or a rescue strategy. These novels are also similar because they both contain archetypal character of the outcast who serves as a biblical figure. In A Separate Peace, Leper serves as the christ-figure because he represents is the first character to be lost in the unknown. The unknown in this case is World War II. Leper was suppose to be drafted into war “before the end of this next academic year” but he decides to enlist early (Knowles 15). Leper’s decision to enlist early shows his ability to understand that there is no escape from the war because even though it is being “fought very far from America” it “will never end” (Knowles 32). As the first to enlist he
E. Trujillo
Period 5
Because I Am Furniture
By: Thalia Chaltas
Part 1
Thalia Chaltas’ Because I Am Furniture is an amazing book. I really like this book because it talks about a situation that has happened to many people all over the world.
The book Because I Am Furniture explores a few themes, which include hatred, abuse, low self-esteem and family. It explores the theme of abuse by showing us how Anke’s father abused of her two older siblings and tried to abuse her friend. It explores the theme of hatred by showing us how much Anke and her siblings hate him and by how they take out their anger on his belongings. Self-Esteem is shown through Anke because she feels that she isn't worth anything, not even her dad's abuse. The theme of family is also explored by showing us how at the end they become a real family. The book talks about how we shouldn't stay quiet and report if we know some one is being abused. It also shows us that we are worth a lot and we shouldn't believe that we don't even deserve the worst things in life. The lessons and the themes explored in this book are good but the way is written also attracts you to read it.
I like the way the book is written because it describes some of the scenes with good descriptions. The book is also written in short paragraphs and not in really long paragraphs like other books which make want to read even more. The book is written in a form that looks like a poem or like a diary entry. The thing I don't like about the way is written is that it talks about one thing and then it skips to talk about something else and then it kind of comes back to the other subject. I also like the fact that this book is similar to other books I have read. The author's voice shows us how much she suffered because the story of the book is similar to her life story. The characters in the book are really good as well.
The main character of the story is Anke, a girl who has to witness her father's abuse towards her siblings. Yaicha is Anke's older sister and she is the one being abused the most by her dad. Darren, Anke's older brother is also abused by his dad but not as much as Yaicha. The book makes you feel that the characters are real because the situation that they are facing can happen to anybody. I it also makes you think it could be real because if we were in their place, we would probably act the same way they do and not say anything. I really like Anke's character because she finds the courage to speak up about her father's abuse and bring happiness back to their home. "You think no one knows, you hurt my brother, my sister, you hurt my friend, small trusting prey” (222). The setting is not as good as the book but is a simple place and where most of the similar stories like this would happen.
M Lopez
Period 5
Liz Ruckdeschel and Sara James “what if... all the boys wanted you” is a good book because it goods form back and forward the life of the teenage life at school and at house.
The theme of the book is about when you have to learn about the teenager life. Or a student that are in a past and future life in school and house. And she is tell us that there is not matter what goes on that you can try your best and become a good student or a parent life. That it does not care of the past. That what she is telling us about the theme.
The style of the voice of the teenage is that she talks like a good student. And that she does not care what people say. That she like a voice of a small teenage that in high school. Like the freshman year of her life that why she talks like that. Will it some times is funny but not really because of her friends that make fun of her. Or she makes jokes out of it in her life. Will it like flashback of her life and that it is like unqire. Why because she gives a lot of the images about it what is going on the past or story is about.
Well on the author opinion is that the characters are in not in involved of the story. She say about here best friend whitey. Why her because at her past they talk a lot in it most of the story between them in high school. Will both they say the entire true about? Like for example when they love some one. They do not say all crazy people. They say it like all normal person has to be.
The setting takes places at her house and at school, or a friend house. Will sometimes it does go in the contrast world of the mean of the teenager’s life’s. Will the author does not make me like all the part of the story only sometimes it does. Like when they want to go some where but there parents does not let go. Like far away form the house. Like to San José trip with some old friends they have. Yes I can picture this in my mind of the story is about the life a teenage in high school. Will is good because it goes from school and house of a friend and the house of the teenage.
Will is long story about two people that are like best friends. And they go to the same high school and they live in the same st. will it a long story it goes back and forward is like a flashback story. What will have the first teenager that is say the story? And what will happen to the second teenager is she fell in love with a guy from school? Are the cool people at school? Do they have a lot of friends?
Will there is not another book. Why because is it like a story of a teenager life and there is not another book. So sorry I can not find another that is like same as this story or book.
Will I will give a 10. Why because is a good book. You sure read it because you can see the different of the story of a teenager lives. And can be like us you never now. I will tell you to read it is a good book to read.
E. Trujillo
Period
Because I Am Furniture
By: Thalia Chaltas
Part 2
Most of the story takes place at Ankes' house. Some of the story also takes place at Anke's school. The setting shows us things that pretty much could occur in our schools. Anke's house is described as a house full of furniture to represent better the title of the book. In the book, you can't really visualize the setting that well but you are able to imagine some parts of where the story takes place like the kitchen and the school. Some parts of the story also take place in a volleyball court but this only happens when Anke has a game to play. Even thought the story is not well described, the story itself is really good.
The story is about a girl named Anke and her siblings. Anke has to live every day witnessing here father's abuse towards her brothers but she has to pretend that she doesn't see anything. She also feels that she doesn't deserve anything not even her father’s abusive treatment. Anke has always been quiet about their family's problems until a day when she couldn't take it anymore and she spoke up. When Anke decides to try out for the volleyball team everything changes for her and she learns a very important thing that helps to resolve her family’s situation.. Anke's life is really hard because she finds out how her dad didn’t only abused of her siblings but he also tried to abuse her friend. Anke is been lucky and has never been touched by her dad but that makes her feel even worse because she feels that she isn't worth her father's time. Anke also notices how her dad takes out his anger on Darren because he was mad at her for being on the volleyball team and he ends up yelling at Darren. There is also an event that make's Anke confront her dad. Anke finds out that she has a voice and that if no one wants to speak up, then she will have to do it herself.
This story is similar to other stories I have read. Is similar in the away that it talks about how teen suffer from different problems. This time the book was about teens that are being abuse by a family member. The current event that this book explores is that many teens have been abused my either a family member or by some one else and many of those times they don't say anything about it because they are afraid to speak up. Many of the times the people who abused them threaten them so they wouldn't say anything. Even thought this has never happened to me I think that it wouldn't be easy for me to talk about this and I would hope to find a way like Anke did to speak up and get justice.
I would really recommend this book to other people because is a really good book. It talks about things that could relate to many people because this might have happened to them or to someone they might know. I really hope that more people could read this book and learn more about this situation.
A.Jeronimo
Period 5
Darkness Before dawn
Part 1
Your spirit is a shining silver star, chile.Cant nobody take that away from you. A phrase of
the friend of the speaker of the story. The story starts bad then it goes well and it ends up
in a tragedy. Sharon M. Draper “Darkness before Dawn”
Interesting book and teaches lessons about life.
In the beginning of this novel there are a lot of tragedies like in one the beginning there
were a group of friends and a girl came running to them and told them that one of their
friends had died. He had shot himself. In this passage of the story it shows us that people
shouldn’t just commit suicide just like that because it doesn’t only affect you but every
one surrounding you. What I like about this book is that it is easy to understand and one
person is the one telling the story and you could see what’s happening in the novel. This
book is a book that makes you think before you do something and I would say it’s a
book about giving lessons. I liked that these story tells you what the characters are doing
and it lets you visualize everything there doing and the part it takes place. The speaker of
the story seems to be over everything like if she were to just do anything she wants and
like if she’s sad depressed and just doesn’t want to do anything.]
The characters on this novel are all teens that have problems or have passed to some
Rough times. All this teens are just teens that don’t like school and just hangout with there friends. The author refers to the characters as people and like what life is really like. The characters are actually realistic and act like how us people would really act like in those types of situations. The characters are the ones the make the book interesting and people want to read it. “We wait in the darkness for the signal to begin I wonder what’s taking so long. The character is just impatient because she wants the days to go by fast so that she can graduate already. “ Andy is dead’ Andy in the story was every ones friend and he was one of the first persons to die in the novel and so in this book there are a lot of deaths going on.
This book contrasts to the real world because there are a lot of people dying for just simple things or because of people committing suicide. Also because people in this story are people like us and they live like we are and they react the same way we would if something like what happens to them in the story would happened to us. The author of this story makes every moment of the book realistic and yes anyone could picture the book with there closed eyes and the author also put what the characters are feeling and there expressions to things. The author made this book so that people can actually see what’s going on and so that you can feel like it’s just real.
A.Jeronimo
Period 5
Darkness Before dawn
Part 2
The story is about a group of High School teens living in tragedies and at the end it goes well. The main character of the book Keisha just wants the days to go by so that she can graduate from high school but while days go by Keisha meets her boyfriend and they are together but what she doesn’t know is what takes her doing bad things and her almost losing her life. Her boyfriend makes her suffer till it all ends.
This book can be compared to other books because it’s a book that is just realistic and has things that in real life are happening as well and on other books they have the same things issues tragedies and happy moments as well.
J. Marin
Period 2
4/15/10
Victor Villasenor’s Thirteen Senses truly inspired me with its amazing lessons of life, faith, and family. The story is based on the marriage of Juan Salvador Villasenor and Lupe. Throughout their first years of been married there are various challenges that they must face in order to become a successful marriage. Juan’s mother, a Yaqui Indian, is a woman with outraging life-virtues and an extraordinary faith that blows me away. There marriage took place in the twenties and Juan is a bootlegger. Lupe has always been told that alcohol and gambling can cause more destruction and pain in families than war by her own mother. The story takes us in a diverse and complicated tale where Lupe learns the truth about her husband and she decides to stay with him because she is now pregnant with their first child.
This book is full with delightful surprises. The story is about courage and real people in life situations where they try to find themselves. The story is full of diverse and unpredictable characters. Juan and Lupe face many obstacles that without the great love that exists for each other and his mother’s advice, their marriage could come crumbling down. Juan is a bootlegger and at one point he almost gets himself and his family killed when the stove blows up and the whole house catches on fire.
Juan’s brother Domingo has been put into prison because he was caught making alcohol for Juan. Dona Margarita is Juan’s mother and she is truly a living angel. Her faith and fondness for god and all the saints is simply amazing. Her teachings and lessons have a spiritual manifestation and she makes more sense with her stories about creation and god than any other person.
After Juan and Lupe get married there’s a gigantic feast in Carlsbad where Juan’s friend Archie, slaughters various goats, chickens, pigs, and makes a food carnival that lasts for three days. For three days the celebration continues and there’s unlimited whisky and rich food with delicious hand-made tortillas. Lupe is very nervous about moving in with her husband after the wedding so she stays with her family for the first week after the marriage day.
The story takes us through the marvelous and passionate night in which Lupe and Juan unite as one and give in to each other in their room in the house that Juan bought for them. Lupe gets pregnant and they decide that they will name her Hortensia. During Lupe’s pregnancy she has many health issues and Juan takes her to doctor. It is recommended that Lupe stays with her family for the last days of her pregnancy and the first few weeks after Hortensia’s birth. Maria, Lupe’s sister, has a terrible dream about Hortensia dying and so without Lupe’s or Juan’s permission she decides to baptize the child with the name of Maria Hortensia.
Juan is very angry at Lupe for allowing this to happen but it wasn’t her fault cause she was sound asleep when Maria took the baby from her and did this without her notification. At the end of the story Lupe and Juan must escape to Mexico because there was a murder in front of their house and they are witnesses. They make it to Mexico and eventually buy a home there.
This book is amazing because it teaches many lessons about god and creation. It also teaches me how marriage is not an easy job to handle. I would definitely recommend this book for anyone out there that is interested in adventure, romance, and spiritual strength.
Y.Medina
P-3
Part 1
Remembering Mog
by: Colby Rodowsky
Colby Rodowsky’s book titled Remembering Mog was yet another inspirational/motivational story that allows one to see how even though the loss of someone can make you hit rock bottom time can and will heal all wounds. Annie, the main character is a young teenage girl who lives with her family and Reilly, her cousin. Both Annie and her family are dealing with changes in their life’s since the murder of her older sister Mog. Mog was two years older than Annie. She was murdered the night before her graduation. She had gone out to a party with her boyfriend and never made it back home. Ends up that Mog and her boyfriend Bobby Ritter left the party early and headed out to Fells Point where Mog received two shots to the head and one to the heart. Bobby Ritter was severely injured but survived. After two years of confusion and pain pass and Annie decides to get help. She gets into contact with a Therapist who she begins to see. With Harriet, the therapists help; Annie is able to move on with her life. She alo has to face the fact that her mother will never be the same since that night that night her sisters life was taken.
Colby Rodowsky is sending out a very strong message while at the same time teaching us a lesson. One lesson that we can learn by reading is that though death can be a hard time in life and though one can grieve for quite some time it is not ok to go on grieving forever. Life doesn’t stop; it just continues to go forward. A message being sent out is that if we see we need someone to talk to or feel lonely from time to time we should seek help because keeping things locked up isn’t good. For example in the story Annie feels alone and cant seem to be able to mention Mogs name around the house therefore she cant talk about her feelings with anyone. Once she seeks help and gets into contact with Harriet she is able to speak out and has someone who is there to hear her out. This allows Annie to express her feelings and to think about her “future”. Annie is then able to move on and get out of living in the past.
The way Colby wrote this story was interesting. She talked about an event while talking about a past event at the same time. She knew how to combine the events so that one wouldn’t get confused while reading. I thought the way she talked about Annies thoughts and the moments she talked about her reminiscing were clear and understandable. Overall her style of writing was magnificent.
Y.Medina
P-3
Part 2
Remembering Mog
By:Colby Rodowsky
In my opinion the characters seen in the novel can be compared to people in today’s society. The reason I say this is because of the way that Colby shows their personalities and characteristics. For example; Annies mother, ever since Mogs death she has not been the same. It is as if she was lost in a world of her own and Annie cant seem to understand why her mother is that way. While Annies mom is dealing with pain of her own Annie is dealing with problems and pain of her own. Annie feels lost and confused about life even though graduation is right around the corner and all of her friends are talking about college and jobs. However, Annie doesn’t feel it’s the right time to go off to college so she ignores it. According to her she will go when the times right and things have been fixed. Many people in todays society are going through similar things and find themselves dealing with similar pains.
This story can be compared to situations that are going on around the world today. That is because many people out there somewhere are grieving and dealing with the loss of a loved one. People pass away on a daily basis therefore there is always someone going through the pain of loosing a loved one. Also, many teens suffer the way Annie suffered after Mogs death. Its all a matter of time before things get better for any of these people. Some may never find peace like Annies mother who seems to be unable to find it. However, others are able to accept their loved on is lost and no longer coming back.
I would really recommend this book to anyone no matter how old they are. Anyone can read this story and be touched. Also, they would learn a lesson or two.
A. Rivera
Per. 1
04/15/10
The Pearl by John Steinbeck
You don’t appreciate the things that you have until you lose them. That is the theme of John Steinbeck’s novella The Pearl. The Pearl is very different from the rest of Steinbeck’s literature works, while his other works deal with man vs. man/society conflicts this one deals with man vs. self which leads to tragedy.
The theme of the book symbolizes conflict within oneself and what man is capable to do when it becomes obsessed with something that he does not realize that might bring harm to him or his beloved ones. The setting of the book is in La Paz Mexico with a very poor pearl diver, Kino, that lives whit his wife, Juana, and his new born child Coyotito. The author shows lots of details of how the environment around the characters is and what they feel being in it. The story starts to take its shape, in one morning were just like other stories start with the main characters living their lives just normally but then something unexpected happens, in this case Coyotito gets stung by a scorpion. Since it’s a very remote location, it lacks of resources like a doctor, Kino takes his child to a doctor but when he get there the doctor refused to see Coyotito because he knows that they don’t have the money to pay for his services. John Steinbeck talks about how the characters resemble sea animas and what they are capable to do for and to others, he also talks about how unfair the rich are to the poor and how unfair the rich were to the poor because they lacked of education. The story continues on the next morning with Kino discovering a very big. Kino thinks that the pearl is good luck and hopes to sell it to give his son an education and that way that will free his people. Immediately after the other divers and the whole town find out about the discovery of the pearl, they show their true colors and try to take it from Kino.
In conclusion, this is a book that I would recommend because it is a good story and the way the story is told.
I give this book a 7.8/10
T.De Costa
P.2
4/15/10
Ender's Game by:Orson Scott Card
How would you feel if you were taken up to space at the age of six? I would be something different but wouldn’t you get homesick,and sad being cut off from your family? Ender’s Game is about a boy named Ender Wiggin who is sent to space on a ship which is a Battle School. He meets many people, friends, enemies, people he likes, and people he dislikes. The Battle School is set up in space preparing the kids for a war against an alien race known as the Buggers. Orson Scott Card’s Ender’s Game is an astonishing read and amazes you about how young you can be to fight for Earth.
One important theme of this book is the Game. None of the kids realize what it is really for but some of the kids think of it as a game. The game gets really competitive and from time to time there are grudges between different characters. Towards the end of the story, you began to realize that all of the games they have been playing are that it helps them facing who the true enemy is.
Scott Card writes in a different way compared to many other authors writing styles. Card writes his stories from the perspective of different characters rather than on one single character. In this book there aren’t very many transitions between characters compared to the later series of this book. Card introduces you interactions with characters you don’t hear very much about towards the beginning of each chapter. He makes you aware on what is happening and what is going to happen.
The characters in this book are extraordinary compared to your normal human beings. The kids who enter Battle School are ones who have the mind for war. It makes it fit in with what all the kids are doing and why they are killing the Buggers. Ender, his brother Peter, and his sister Valentine have the minds of an adult. After years with Ender in space, Peter and Valentine later set their minds towards the government and its problems. I find it kind of weird that these kids are that smart and that a lot of people follow them without knowing who they really are.
While most of the time the story is taking in space, you wouldn’t be able to get a feel for it. The time setting attempts to be around way into the future where you are able to fly on ships to outer space and desks that act a little like computers. Many times you will hear different countries named and where all these people are located from. Often many times I would space out and I would start thinking of this story and what is happening to Ender. It would be like if I was in a group with him playing the games.
The central theme around this story is between the Buggers and Ender’s self conflicting thoughts which help throughout the story. At the beginning it begins like a normal day for a kid going to school. The thing is Ender had some machine attached to his head and many people were surprised it was taken off. Ender later gets in a fight with a bully named Stinson and unintentionally killed him. Ender has an older brother who picks on him, threatening to kill him. He gets asked if he wants to go to space on a ship which holds a Battle School with other children with the risk of not seeing his parents and friends. Ender finds a game program on his desk and advances through the game. The people who are in charge of the Battle School noticed he had advanced further than anybody else has and that he was in a completely different area than where the game is suppose to really be at. Ender is a smart kid and would be in control of his own Toon Army. He teaches his army good strategies to face opposing armies and teaches many other “launchies” on what to do correctly.
This book was a great book to read. It had a different twist to the ending that I wouldn’t expect to happen. I would give this book an 4/5.
A. Tenno
Period 4
2/16/10
The Red Badge of Courage Book Review
Human emotions and reasoning for actions is a widely discussed topic, one that is extremely popular for a plethora of authors. American Naturalism, the period of stark realism expressed in the 1870’s and 1880’s, searches for the reasoning behind many of our actions. Stephen Crane, in The Red Badge of Courage, explores the human psyche to a wide degree with his depiction of a young soldier experiencing the horrors of war for the first time. Henry Fleming, the young soldier, soon realizes that war is not as glorified as his texts would lead him to believe, and faces great inner conflict. Crane’s use of themes, style, characters, settings, plot, and allusions all help explore universal themes such as the quandary that death and heroism proliferates.
Crane uses a wide variety of themes and archetypes to make his novel much more relatable to the reader. One of the most memorable themes is the coming of age of a young man, something that is extremely relatable to most of the population. By the end of the novel, the main character begins to feel “a quiet manhood, non-assertive but of sturdy and strong blood… He was a man” (186). Becoming a man is a universal theme in society, whether it was the Ancient Spartans forcing their young men to survive out in the wild amongst the beasts, or a Native American killing his first buffalo out on the wide plains, this is a universal theme that all adolescent boys encounter. Whether by joining the military or being allowed to flip burgers at the family barbeque, becoming a man is a celebrated and treasured ritual in humanity. In the beginning of the novel, Fleming was enthralled by the glory of war. He was captivated by the “large pictures extravagant in color, lurid with breathless deeds,” (7). The glory in war is something that all of society experiences, either through its portrayal by Hollywood or by the tales of great heroes, such as Odysseus or King Arthur. The appeal of war has led to many a young man dying, finally realizing his disillusion at the brevity of war’s horror. Glory and power motivate our society to “Go Army”, as it is our patriotic duty, yet we do not realize the true horrors and overwhelming possibility of death. Yet fear is the most powerful theme that Crane uses. “There was no shame in his face. He ran like a rabbit” (56). Crane discusses fear and the characters reluctance at accepting his decision. He is disgusted yet amicable with his decision to run away, and manages to become some sort of hero after he gets in touch with his regiment again because of his “wound”. The inclusion of the theme of fear makes the novel much more believable and interesting to read, as does becoming a man and going off to war.
A. Tenno
Period 4
Red Badge of Courage Part 2
Crane’s style is also very intriguing. Not only does he skillfully explore the human psyche, he crafts a novel that is relatable to many readers. Also, Crane is noted for his extremely vivid description of nature during the battle scenes. “The youth stared at the ground in front of him. Its foliaged now seemed to veil powers and horrors.” (143) This is a great example of how Crane is extremely vivid in this novel; something that only heightens the reader’s experience whilst reading. “The ground was cluttered with vines and bushes, and the trees seemed to spread out like bouquets.” (64) His style is also in one’s head, so to speak, as much of the novel is a third person omniscient voice that details much of Fleming’s emotions and thoughts. “Shame was upon him and with profound regret that he was perhaps no to be counted in the ranks of his fellows youth could detect no expression that allow him to believe that the other was a thought to his narrowed future the dungeons perhaps and starvations and brutalities liable to the imagination. All to be was shame for captivity and regret for the to antagonize” (154) Once again, we see how Crane’s use of internal conflict helps the reader understand the characters, and helps the reader relate to the novel even more. All in all, Crane’s style is extremely vivid and accurate, especially with his frequent use of English dialects to make the story much more accurate and believable to the reader.
The most important character, and the most noteworthy in the short novel, is the young soldier: Henry Fleming. His journey from a boy to a man is one of great intrigue and believability. He is extremely believable, especially in modern day America. “He had burned several times to enlist. Tales of great movements shook the land. They might not be Homeric, but there seemed to be much glory in them” (7). This quote could be applied to all young men who have ever felt the need to serve their country or do their patriotic duty. Although the wars and their hypocrisy have changed over the past millennia, young men still believe it is their duty to enlist to protect their beloved nation. Although Fleming does not seem to have a personality that is his own (as it is the product of Crane’s questioning of the human psyche), he seems almost “too” perfect to be believable, almost like certain politicians that appeal to our every need. His character is very round, but almost in a predictable sort. One can predict that he will become a hero after being the deserter in an earlier battle. Yet his perfection and flaws make the character likeable and believable, which only heightens the reader’s enjoyment.
A. Tenno
Period 4
Red Badge of Courage Part 4
One can make many connections to this novel. First, one can connect the novel to the many coming of age stories that coincide with Joseph Campbell’s Hero With a Thousand Faces. One can connect many of the archetypes he discusses in his novel, such as the call to adventure and the departure from the mother. Also, one can connect the novel to many other civil war stories, as they all deal with morality and the feeling of a God backing their side. Finally, one can connect this novel with the other Naturalist authors, such as Steinbeck, due to the vivid descriptions of nature and delving into the motives behind human emotion.
All in all, The Red Badge of Courage was an excellent novel. It skillfully creates a web that entices the reader to read more, yet leaves the reader unsatisfied and wanting more at the end of the novel. Because of all its merits and excellences, I give the novel an 8/10. It only looses the last two points because the reader is left hanging, and wants to know more about what will happen to Henry. However, it was still an excellent novel and I would recommend it to any who enjoy a good war story.
A. Tenno
Period 4
Red Badge of Courage Part 3
The setting the novel is also extremely believable, as discussed earlier. Crane pays great attention to shaping the detail of the setting, which is extremely helpful when one reads a novel about civil war battles that occurred way before his time.
The reader knows that Henry is fighting for the South in the Civil War, but Crane never discloses where the regiment is at any time. Crane focuses on the natural world directly surrounding the soldiers. For instance, Crane describes the area at one point in the novel: “the landscape was streaked with two long, thin, black columns which disappeared on the brow of a hill in front and rearward vanished into a wood…The river was not in view” (18). Notice how the name of the river is not mentioned, and no significant landmarks are given a proper title. Again, this adds to the sense of realism experienced in the novel by directly stating the surroundings, rather than naming them and expecting the reader to know what they look like. Nature is simply where he finds his cohesiveness, and his writing flows through it. Although this novel takes place in the Civil War in the 1860s, it is not intended to be about the war. Instead, the novel is intended to magnify the thoughts and feelings of the common soldier.
The plot of the novel is extremely predictable, yet also fulfilling. Fleming goes from a young soldier tasting war for the first time, to a coward who deserts his union, to a liar who uses disillusionment to be accepted among a group, to a war hero who carries the flag and volunteers for a suicidal charge to prove his manliness. The novel, although extremely short, does an excellent job of detailing the maturation of a young man. This makes it exciting to read, albeit with an extremely predicable ending. Fleming gets a chance to prove himself once again, and out of fear and desire to not desert again, becomes known as a great warrior and somewhat of a hero. Crane uses the plot of the novel to delve into the psyche of the individual, and how we fear actual fear itself: the fear of not being accepted, the fear of not doing one’s duty, and the fear of making the wrong choice.
J. Boldizar
Period 4
The Stranger by Albert Camus
Part 2
Setting is the biggest thing that this book is focused on. The details are so vivid, “…the sun wasn’t too hot, but the water was warm, with slow, gently lapping waves,” (34). When I read this, I can picture the scene in my head; it’s so beautiful. Besides breath taking descriptions of the beach, there are also great images portrayed of the streets, “On the sidewalk across the way the tobacconist brought out a chair, set it in front of his door, and straddled it, resting his arms on the back,” (22). This is the image outside Meursault’s apartment on a late Saturday afternoon; its simple nature and calm words make it relaxing to read.
Meursault, the narrator, is a young man living in Algiers. After receiving a telegram informing him of his mother’s death, he takes a bus to Marengo, the old persons home, to go to the funeral. When he gets back home, he runs into an old friend, and gains a new pal. However, with the coming of a new pal, comes drama that Meursault never expected.
I have never read a book like this, but I’m glad I did. It made me appreciate the physical part of the world more and showed me that I don’t need to put so much emotion in everything that I do and everything that comes up. I give it four out of five stars.
C. Head
Period 4
4/15/10
In the Time of the Butterflies
By: Julia Alvarez (Part 1)
“A chill goes through her, for she feels it in her bones, the future is now beginning.” (pg. 10) In In the Time of the Butterflies by Julia Alvarez, as this quote says, the Mirabal sisters future was just at the beginning. Throughout this novel the Mirabal family is living in the Dominican Republic under the horrible dictatorship of Trujillo. They see all the problems in their beloved home, from people disappearing to the deaths of innocent people. In my personal opinion In the Time of the Butterflies is a wonderful book and everyone should read and experience the rollercoaster ride it takes you through.
This novel had many themes, but one in particular that is consistent throughout the story is the theme of change and invoking that change. The fight for change is portrayed through Virgilio Morales the most. One particular quote shows that there should be a fight for what you believe in. Lio says, “‘If I leave my country, it’s only to continue the struggle. We can’t let Chapita kill us all.’” (pg. 73) In this particular situation Lio and Jaimito have just gotten into a huge fight over a something that shouldn’t have happened in the first place. Virgilio or Lio is talking about the change he is invoking or attempting to invoke all around him and he’s telling Jaimito that if he left it would only be because he wanted everyone to see the struggle and so that he could continue the fight against the injustices he’s seen, as well as the ones he had to face. Virgilio Morales sort of instigates the retaliation in this novel; he helped the sisters realize that this fight was for future generations as well. However, the fight for change was not an easy one and bad things tended to happen to people who fought for something they wanted. “‘I know of at least three of Virgilio’s friends who have disappeared.’” (pg. 89) Minerva and her father had different points of views on changing things and in this particular situation he is afraid for his daughter and he’s trying to convince her that she needs to keep her thoughts in her head instead of putting herself in danger because there was a constant fear of spies. One final way this theme is shown in the novel is when Mate is reading Mama the Sunday paper. “…Mate read right out how there had been a demonstration at the university, led by a bunch of young professors, all members of the Communist party. Among the names listed was that of Virgilio Morales!” (pg. 74) This shows the theme of change majorly because Virgilio knew it was the right thing to do to fight for this and even though he knew about the consequences he’d face would most likely be horrific he would fight for it because it was the right thing to do. After reading the novel I was left with the impression that change should be fought for and it’s not something that everyone gets to experience in their lifetime.
C. Head
Period 4
4/15/10
In the Time of the Butterflies
By: Julia Alvarez (Part 2)
Julia Alvarez’s style in this novel was incredible. The book was written through the points of views of the four sisters. The style wasn’t necessarily funny, but at many serious points in the novel the serious tone was broken by a funny comment or action. “‘Ay, Dios mio, spare me.’” Mama sighs, but playfulness has come back into her voice. “‘Just what we need, skirts in the law!’” (pg. 10) The situation this particular quote was used in was slightly uncomfortable and tense because one of the sisters, Minerva, has been begging to be sent to the capital for law school, but her parents are done hearing this. Her mom takes on a playful tone so as to make the situation slightly less tense. The way the girls tell the story gives the reader a sense of where the story takes place. For example, “Oh yes. The gringos need a time.” (pg.4) Words such as galeria, pobrecita, promesa, peseta, etc. are used throughout the novel giving the reader a sense of where the novel is set. The narrator’s voices are actually unique to other books I’ve read. Each sister is different in her writings. In fact, Maria Teresa’s accounts are done through a little diary her sister gave to her, as well as the fact that many of Dede’s stories are done through the eyes of the interviewer. Each sister differs in her thoughts, actions, and opinions which makes each so intriguing.
The main characters in this story were Dede, Minerva, Maria Teresa, and Patria. The novel is told from each sisters point of view as aforementioned. Each sister is very believable as a person. One way the author makes this possible is how each character is easily relatable. They are just normal young girls that face every day troubles just like every other person around them. I think since these characters are so likeable and easy to relate to that it makes the book a lot better for the reader. One way that you can see that these are just normal young girls at the beginning is when the girls are sent to the Immaculada and Minerva experiences a problem when she awakes. “…I felt the damp sheet under me. Oh no, I thought, I’ve wet my bed! … I couldn’t make sense of the dark stains on the bottom sheet… Sure enough, my complications had started.” (pg. 20) Minerva is so honest and she doesn’t hide that she had started her female complications. It makes the character seem more real because we see that she has to face normal teenage issues as well. Another sister that really shows a regular side would have to be Maria Teresa. Maria Teresa is the youngest of the girls and it shows through her writings. “And you may not know this, little book, but I always cry when people laugh at me.” (pg. 31) Maria Teresa shows this complete raw side as she writes in her little diary and it kind of opens the door to her soul in a sense. Many girls probably face teasing everyday and they would probably like to know that they’re not alone in that. Throughout the novel, Patria struggles with her religion. Many people struggle with religion each day and hearing that others deal with the same problems sometimes makes things easier to deal with. “But my prayers sounded more like I was trying to pick a fight. I’m not going to sit back and watch my babies die, Lord, even if that’s what You in Your great wisdom decide.” (pg. 162) Patria has lost her baby and she’s seen the loss of many lives and she was not ready to let more go, which is an easy thing to relate to because many a times one might get frustrated with the Lord and want to fight back in the one way they may know how.
C. Head
Period 4
4/15/10
In the Time of the Butterflies
By: Julia Alvarez (Part 3)
This novel takes place in the Dominican Republic during the awful time Trujillo had all the power. This setting is nothing at all like the world that I personally live in. “‘People who opened their big mouths didn’t live very long…’” (pg. 18) In the world I know there’s never been a situation where people were afraid to state their opinions because they would be killed for them. The very idea of that is scary and there are no words to describe what that must be like for people living in that condition. The author does a good job of making the reader feel like he or she is a part of that setting and when the reader closes their eyes they can clearly see the family’s house and the rooms. “‘It’s the road by the anacahuita tree. We don’t name them…’” (pg. 5) This paints the reader a clear picture of a house that is a little bit away from a big tree and perhaps on a dirt road considering that the streets remain unnamed. The author also paints a clear picture of a dangerous and unhappy place. “Over and over again, I saw the SIM approaching... I saw the throng of men at the door, I heard the stomping, the running, the yelling. I saw the house burning… I heard doors open, I saw hands intrusive and ugly in their threats. I heard the crack of bones breaking, the thud of a body collapsing. I heard moans, screams, desperate cries.” (pg. 201) The guards were terrible people and they caused darkness across the country in a sense.
The plot of this novel took us chronologically through the events of the girls lives. It opens with Dede and her interview, it then goes from there back in time and consists of flashbacks and diary entries. The novel follows the tale of these four sisters that lived during the reign of Trujillo and saw the horrible things he did to their country. They take a stand and one thing after another takes these girls and their families through many painful and strengthening trials.
I couldn’t really compare this book specifically to another novel. However, this could be compared to moments in history such as Martin Luther King Jr.’s as well as Ghandi’s peaceful fight against the injustices around them. This book doesn’t really connect with me on a personal level because I’ve never lived during a time of unfair dictatorship, but nonetheless it’s a riveting and capturing tale that will hold you until the minute the novel ends. In the Time of the Butterflies would definitely receive 4 out of 5 stars in my book.
Y.Macias
Per.2
4/15/10
Tuesdays with Morrie
by: Mitch Albom
part 1
“Aging is not just decay, you know. It’s growth.” That was only one of the many lessons that were mentioned in this book. In the book “Tuesdays with Morrie”, by Mitch Albom, a man named Mitch is reunited with his old college professor of over 20 years ago, after finding out his professor, Morrie, is diagnosed with a lethal disease, ALS. Their rekindled relationship turned into one final "class": lessons in how to live. This heartwarming book takes you through a journey of lessons, it will let you realize all the small things in life that we all take for granted.
In this book the author’s style is very unique from other books. Mitch Albom, being the author is also the narrator. The book is based on a true story of Mitch and his beloved professor Morrie Schwartz. The author’s style tends to give a sense of the place it’s set. At the end of each chapter the author would add a little flashback adding and extra view of how he and his professor really were in and outside of their classes. The narrator’s voice sounds sympathetic and loving, it shows how much he really cared for his professor. The style that Mitch Albom uses makes the book even more unique.
The two main characters in the book are Mitch Albom, the student, and Morrie Schwartz, the teacher. The author makes you believe in the characters showing all their emotions.
After discovering his old professor had a lethal disease, Mitch is determined to see his professor again. After visiting him Mitch remembers how much he loved their classes. Mitch was so determined that he came to visit him every Tuesday. This shows how caring and concerned Mitch was for his professor. “The most important thing in life is to learn how to give out love, and to let it come in.” This quote was one of the few advice that Morrie would give out to Mitch, it shows how even though he was suffering form his disease he was still willing to sit out for hours every Tuesday and give his time and attention and advice to his student/friend.
The setting in this book mainly takes place in the household of Mitch’s professor, Morrie. The setting compares to the world I know because everyone has to have had someone older, patient and wise, who understood them when they were young and searching, someone who helped them see the world as a more profound place, and gave them sound advice to help them make their way through it. Every time I would read this book I would imagine the setting in which the book takes place, I would picture Morrie’s study where the two would sit and talk, and I would sense the feelings that the author would give out.
Y.Macias
Per.2
4/15/10
Tuesdays with Morrie
by: Mitch Albom
part 2
This book is about life’s greatest lesson. After finding his old professor while watching the “Late Night Show” with Ted Koppel, Mitch is determined to find his old teacher. He finds him and the two share and catch up on each others lives the past 20 years. The two make an agreement that each Tuesday Mitch would come and visit Morrie, until the two were separated by death. With Morrie’s disease every time Mitch comes to visit Morrie seems more and more weak. These visits he takes soon become to them as their last “class” together. The two become closer than ever before, until they are permanently separated.
This book has connections to current lives. This book can relate to any other book which talks about lessons. The chemistry between the two characters can be compared to anyone who has ever had anyone older or wiser close to them giving them advice and helping them along the way of life. Mitch was very fortunate to have had that kind of relationship with a teacher. This book can relate to many people and events which involve someone being inspired by another. However this book does not connect to me on a personal level.
In the end this book was a fascinating journey. I learned many lessons in life which I did not know before. After reading this book you will understand life and its confusions a little bit more. You will realize all the simple little things we view as ‘problems’ aren’t that big of a deal when you realize your days are limited. It will help you not take things for granted and that it is never ever ‘too late’. I truly recommend reading this book.
V Silva
Period 1
4/15/10
Native Son by Richard Wright
During the 1930s when race was still a big issue and the cities you live in were run by racist people who would discriminate on anyone that wasn’t their own. In the Book Native Son by Richard Wright he shows how life was like for a teenager who is being oppressed by society which leads him to committing two major crimes. Richard Wright’s, Native Son, opens up your mind and makes you reflect about society tension and how it affects not just the adults but the younger generations.
Native Son explores many themes through out the story; one of the major themes in the book is the effect of racism. Bigger, the protagonist portrays the black people of the 1930s. He is corrupted by the racial injustice in his community. This is an example of when our minds get affected or corrupted with so fear and hatred that we can not distinguish what’s right and wrong; a and that we sometimes might go to extremes to get justice for ourselves.
This story is told from first point of view, which makes this story more realistic when you read the story you feel of part of the story as if it were you experiencing everything that what happing. The style of the book is not like a regular Biography the story is told more of a diary even though it wasn’t meant to be a diary. The characters in the story portray the society of the author’s time and even today. Bigger, the protagonist is a poor, uneducated black man. He came to America to rise up from the bottom of the ladder, to become something in his life but he is being oppressed by the majority. He has felt trapped his whole life, resents, all the whites who have kept him down. Mary Dalton is the daughter of Mr. Dalton, Bigger’s rich employers. Mary identifies herself as a progressive and interacts with Bigger with little regard for the strict limit society imposes between black men and white women. Mary’s wrongdoing of interacting Bigger leads to her death and the resulting progress of his character.
The story’s setting is in a city like any other but is full of racist and injustice people. The author makes you feel like your part of the story due to its first point of view. If you close your eyes you will imagine yourself in a city that you have very strict limits to you and your people. You will know where you’re going because there isn’t much to look at other than what was limited to you. I don’t complain for this because it does go through a lot of action of a human being. The plot of the story is about a 20 year old African American named Bigger Thomas who lives in Chicago during the 1930s. Fear and anger are a part of his daily life. He wakes up every morning listening to his mother yelling and screaming at him to get a job with a rich white man. Bigger takes a job as a chauffeur for the Daltons. He soon starts to open up because the Daltons are generous towards his people. This generosity makes him think a lot, but to the point where he accidentally kills the daughter of Mr. Dalton, Mary. He tries to lie about the murder, but soon gets caught after committing another crime, when he realizes what he has done wrong in his life it was a little to late.
I think this book can almost be compared to a diary, but with a usual plot like all stories. It relates to the society of black people during the 1930s. It also relates to today’s society for its political theme and individual theme for example, the fear of communism issues and fear of a human being. This story has given me a bigger sense of how life was and still probably is in some parts, I learned that there are still some people who are racist and put down the minority to make them feel superior.
Overall I think this is a very open minded book to read for its reality of life back then. I recommend this book to anyone who wants to know more about the experiences of people who were being oppressed during the 1930s. It will make you think on how our society was and how hard life was like for the minority.
A.Karel
Period:5
4/15/10
Julia Hoban’s Willow was an interesting and sad story that mesmerized me. “It’s hard to keep a secret when its written all over your body”. It’s about a girl willow when a terrible accident happens she turns to the razor it’s the only way she knows how to survive.
I think the theme is about life and how there are ways to deal with life. The life lesson is about how there are different ways to cope with tragedies. The authors writing style is regular. There is nothing about the authors writing style that I do not like. There are different places where the book is set its mostly at school, the library, college Campos and at her brothers apartment. The authors voice was like talking about the character and also most of the time its like the characters talking. The book isn’t that unusual from other books I read.
The author makes it seem as if every character is real. It’s as if it could be a real story about someone’s life. There are three main characters they are willow, Guy and David. There is not a character that I like or dislike in the book. It doesn’t change the way I feel about the book. The character willow is the main one and she is very complicated but just needed the right person to help her. Guy is the person who meets willow and finds out her deepest secret. He’s a very nice person and a gentlemen. David is willows brother and they have a complicated relationship.
The setting in the book is like the world I live in. when I read the book it’s like a movie playing in my head. I feel like I am a part of the setting. I feel like I could be a part of the book as one of the characters. It feels to me as if I am escaping from the real world and going into another.
The plot is about a girl named Willow. A terrible accident happens and she blames herself for what happens and turns to pain instead of coping with it in a different way. It’s the only way she has learned to survive. Willow meets guy and he is as complicated as her. He’s the only one who knows about her secret and doesn’t handle it as well as willow thought he would.
I would compare this book a little bit to Go ask Alice because its similar in ways how they have a lot of problems and don’t have anyone to tell. They keep it inside of them instead of talking to someone about it and that’s not a good way to deal with things that you need to let out and talk about. I think that it has a lot to do with current issues many kids go threw issues like what willow goes threw in the book. It does not connect with me on a personal level. I would recommend you to read this book if you like reading about teen issues or abuse.
J. Kumar
Period 4
The Joy Luck Club (Part 3)
This novel has several plots that all contribute to the development of the author’s message. In the first of the four parts of this novel, each of the mothers talk about an incident in their childhoods when they wanted to be closer to their own mothers. We are introduced to the daughters in the second part of the book and they each tell a story about how they were unable to relate to their mothers when they were growing up. In the third part, the daughters continue talking about their lives and how their mothers do not understand the problems they are dealing with in their relationships and jobs. In the last section of the book, the mothers express how they feel helpless because their daughters do not want to take their advice, and they talk about a period in their lives when they faced similar struggles as their daughters are facing.
The Jungle by Upton Sinclair is another novel about immigrants that is similar to The Joy Luck Club. In both of the novels, the characters struggle to adjust to American life after leaving their home countries in search of a brighter future. However, in The Joy Luck Club, the characters never lose faith in their ability to achieve the American Dream whereas in The Jungle the characters are quickly disillusioned. Both novels skillfully analyze the struggle of immigrants.
The Joy Luck Club is impossible to put down. Each of the sixteen stories is riveting and insightful. I give this novel 5 out of 5 stars.
J. Kumar
Period 4
The Joy Luck Club (Part 2)
There are eight main characters in this novel: four mothers, and four daughters. Even though the mothers and daughters do not always see eye to eye they have many similarities they are not aware of. One mom says “my daughter thinks I do not understand what it means to not want a baby. When my daughter looks at me, she sees only a small lady. That is because she sees only with her outside eyes” (248). This enforces Tan’s message that the deep connection between a mother and her daughter crosses cultural lines. Jing-Mei Woo, the daughter of the deceased Suyuan Woo, is the central character who provides a bridge between the two generations as she must “replace [her] mother, whose seat at the mah jong table has been empty since she died two months ago” (19). Suyuan herself is another important character who shares her daughters strength and independent spirit. Although she is not able to tell her story directly we are able to see her through the perspective of her daughter. An-mei Hsu and her daughter Rose Hsu Jordan both let others push them around, but eventually find the strength to decide their own fates. Lindo Jong and Waverly Jong both have “double faces” (266). Ying-ying St. Clair and her daughter Lena both have a gift for “knowing a thing before it happens” (243).
The setting of this novel alternates between America and China. This highlights the cultural separation between the mothers and daughters. One daughter expresses her embarrassment that her mother does not conform to American ways saying “my mother- wearing light blue polyester pants, a red sweater, and a child’s green down jacket…didn’t look like anybody else” (199). Towards the end of the novel, the stories reveal that even though the mothers and daughters grow up in different environments, they have actually dealt with similar situations. One of the mothers says this about her daughter: “If she doesn’t speak, she is making a choice. If she doesn’t try, she can lose her chance forever. I know this because I was raised the Chinese way: I was taught to desire nothing, to swallow other people’s misery, to eat my own misery…I know how it is to be quiet, to listen and watch” (215). The difference in setting is also the central issue in the mothers’ and daughters’ inability to connect to one another. One mother laments that her “daughter has put [her] in the tiniest of rooms in her new house…But to Chinese ways of thinking, the guest bedroom is the best bedroom” (242).
Gurjot Kaur
Period-4
Part-2
The Awakening Book Review
Edna is a rich and beautiful Creole who is married and has two children. She is the main character and embodies all the realistic human traits. She is shown as a real woman who wants to be independent, not obedient, and free from the oppressed society. Another major character in the novel is Robert Lebrum, who is the lover of Edna. He is a young guy who loves adventure and is madly in love with Edna. Leonce Pontellier, another main character, is Edna’s husband who loves his family. He is a traditionalist who believes in women taking care of the children and men working to make money. He is seen as the perfect husband who provides well for his family. He gives his wife money, diamonds, and a beautiful house. However, he treats his wife as his property and want women to be obedient.
There are two places where the setting takes place. The first setting is at Grand Isle. This is where she is vacationing with her family. As the reader reads the description of the setting he or she can see the beautiful island and the blue beach. The author uses descriptive imagery to describe the setting and makes the reader feel as if they are part of the setting too. Also, another setting is at New Orleans, where Edna and her family live. The author also uses descriptive details to make the reader feel as he or she is part of the setting. The author does a very good job at describing the atmosphere and the rich society of New Orleans.
Like any other book this novella has an initial situation, conflict, climax, suspense, and a conclusion. But the basic plot of the story is that Edna is at Grand Isle with her family and falls in love with Robert Lebrum. She soon starts to find that she doesn’t want to act as a traditional woman. This is called Edna’s “awaking” because she realizes that she wants to be independent and not seen as a possession of her husband. Sometime later Edna and Robert fall in love with each other, but Robert realizes that he cannot love her because she is married and having an affair is wrong. Therefore, he goes to Mexico and Edna becomes unhappy. After a week later Edna and her family end their vacation and go back to New Orleans. There she starts to disobey her husband by not listening to him and coming home late. This leads to a series of chained events that change Edna’s life as she becomes more independent and free.
The Awakening relates to another novel called The Wuthering Heights, written by Emily Bronte. These two novels are similar because they both contain a similar character. For example Catherine Earnshaw and Edna Pontiller are two main characters who are beautiful and loved by more than one man. For example in The Wuthering Heights Catherine is loved by Heathcliff and Edger Linton whereas in The Awakening Edna Pontiller is loved by Robert and Leonce. Also, they both are rich, beautiful, married to a man who they don’t love, and annoying. So if you love reading feminist novels then The Awakening is the novella for you because it demonstrates a major shift in a woman’s role in society.
Thome, M.
Period 4
4-16-2010
A River Runs Through it, written by Norman Mclean is about two brothers who grow up fly fishing on the Blackfoot river in Montana. They are reunited when Paul, the younger brother is thrown in jail for getting in a bar fight. After, Norman bails his younger brother out of jail he asks him to go fishing with him and his wife’s brother. Norman’s in-law turns out to be a self righteous son of a bitch who turns out to be a real pain for the two brothers. Norman and Paul wind up loving each other with all they’ve got, in the end, the siblings go on one last fishing trip with their dad before he is too old to wade out into the river anymore. They go to their home river and each get their share of fish, but Norman and the Reverend watch as a Paul artfully casts his fly into the passing currents and as he catches the biggest fish they’ve ever seen. They all go home in a state of nirvana, until about a month later they find that Paul has been beat to death and his right hand mangled. This ends the story.
One of the main themes throughout the story is that of family and that they are always there even through the roughest of times. When Norman tries to help his brother but realizes that Paul doesn’t accept help but would gladly help him with anything at all. The family is constantly being pulled back together similar to what happens in the end of the book when they go on their final fishing trip. Another example of family as a central issue in the story is when the narrator takes his brother in law fishing even though he knows that he is a whiny man who only wants to have sex and drink like where comes from in California.
Another key theme throughout the novel is helping yourself before you are able to come to the aid of others. Norman tries to help his brother Paul, but Paul doesn’t let him because of his pride. In the end our narrator realizes that he himself was the one who was in dire need of assistance and Paul would eventually be the one who would assist him with it.
The final major theme I think was nature and its calming aspects that it can have on a person’s soul. Whenever one of the brothers or the father in the story go fishing in one of the rivers, they feel as if they have been returned home or as if everything else in the world has gone except for themselves, their fly, the water, and the fish. Paul is a character of power that holds nature in his pocket trying to keep it in balance while holding it under his grasp. Anyone that has truly been immersed in nature knows the satisfying feeling of being alone in the wild.
A River Runs through it was one my favorite books of all time, it made me feel more in tune with nature like the metronome of Paul’s mother and helped me to appreciate the family that I have overall I’d give this book a four out of five and recommend it to anyone with a sense of humor, a love for nature, and a longing to feel reconnected with their family.
Ferreyra, Nancy
period, 2
04/15/10
"Wild Roses"
If your very romantic, and you love to hear or read Love stories, well then this is a Great book to read . I recommend you to read this book: “Wild Roses” By: Deb Caletti.
This is a book based on romance “Love Story”. Where this seventeen-year old girl named Cassie Morgan lives with Dino Cavalli, who she has never liked, her stepfather. Cassie’s mom divorced Cassie’s dad. This incident changed Cassie’s life because Dino Cavalli, to Cassie is an erratic, self-centered bully, but to the world Dino is one of the world’s renowned violin player and composer. To Cassie Dino seems to get worse and worse every day. And even more when he stops taking his depression medication while he prepares for his huge comeback concert. So that’s whet has changed to Cassie, and her mother even seems to have fear for Dino.
However, Cassie who “ had had enough of people of passion”, prefers astronomy to music. Yet she falls in love with Dino’s student, Ian Waters, a violin prodigy with his own family secrets. Cassie falls in love with him after one evening that Cassie saw him going into the drive way in his bike, with his black coat and his eyes green. Cassie evades trouble as best as she can until she falls for Dino’s gifted student, Ian; Dino forbids their relationship, but Cassie and Ian find it impossible to stay away from each other, even though Ian is preparing for an audition upon which his family’s future stands, and even though Dino is becoming increasingly, frighteningly erratic.
And whatever happened to Ian and Cassie they never separated each other and their still in love with one another even though Ian now moved to another state. At last they tell each other that no matter what happens it’s True Love for Life.
D.Valdovinos
Period 4
April 16, 2010
The Picture of Dorian Gray (part2)
dream. Yet he had not dreamed at all. His night had been untroubled by any images of pleasure or of pain. But youth smiles without any reason. It is one of its chiefest charms” (210). As Dorian wakes up he is as calm as usual as disregards the fact that he has killed Basil. The way Wilde describes this scenario is gothic because it finds a beauty in something menacing. Wilde also uses satire to make fun of aristocracy and portrays that as having nothing to do. Henry comments “it is only shallow people who do not judge by appearances” (24). This show that the only thing that people of a higher social class judge every aspect of a person. They are ruthless people who hide their insecurities by patronizing other people. Wilde’s style is his own and uses different sources to create a broader sense of understanding within his readers.
To support his theme of moral corruptness Wilde uses Dorian Gray, Lord Henry Wotton, and Basil Hallward to portray the different types of people that make up society. Dorian Gray someone who is so naïve “Dorian Gray listened open—eyed and wondering” that he is molded easily by other people, such as Lord Henry, in a negative light (25). Dorian was so captivated by Lord Henry’s cleverness that he unaware of what is being instilled in his mind. Lord Henry portrays the temptations that lie in society preying on those who do not know better. Lord Henry turns Dorian into someone who is constantly seeking instant gratification and preaches that “there is such little time that you youth will last—such a little time” (25). Basil Hallward acts more of less like Dorian’s conscience telling him “you know that you have been silly, Mr. Gray, and that you don‘t really object to being reminded that you are extremely young” when he is acting out (31). He goes as far as asking Henry to leave when he wanted to meet Dorian because he knew the lord Henry would be a bad influence. This overprotection leads to Dorian wanting to know this man even more. These are great very real characters that are relatable for today’s society.
London is the perfect setting for this novel because it offers the heartlessness of high society and underground locales that add to his theme of moral corruption. The insignificance of human life is made apparent when Sir Geoffrey says “good heavens! I have hit a beater. What an ass the man was to get in front of the guns!” (207) A man might be dead and all that Sir Geoffrey is concerned about is that his sport is ruined. This disregard for life made it easier for Wilde to convey his message more clearly. Along Dorian’s self corruption he brings innocent people down with him like his ex-friend “You leave me no alternative. I have a letter written already.
D.Valdovinos
Period 4
April 16, 2010
The Picture of Dorian Gray (part 1)
The Picture of Dorian Gray written by Oscar Wilde illustrates how corruption can penetrate the purest thing in the world. The protagonist, Dorian Gray, begins as an innocent virtuous youth and later in the novel his ego is elevated when he sees his portrait and becomes aware of his overwhelming beauty. Dorian wishes that he may never grow old and decrepit so as his wish come true Dorian’s portrait ages and his soul become more and more corrupt. Wilde aptly uses Dorian as his model to show that societal pressures and outside values can alter a person and damage their view of the world.
Wilde’s overriding theme is that of becoming morally corrupt. This quote catalogues Dorian reflecting on how he became corrupt “he knew that he had tarnished himself, filled his mind with corruption, and given horror to his fancy; that he had been an evil influence to others, and had experienced a terrible joy in being so; and that of the lives that had crossed his own it had been the fairest and the most full of promise that he had brought to shame” (225). This shows that even if only one person is corrupt he/she can influence others to act as they do. It’s almost like when an orange gets moldy the oranges within close range will also gets moldy. Basil can no longer go on hearing negative comments about his friend so he goes to Dorian’s home and finds out his secret “By the way Dorian what does it profit a man if he gain the whole world and lose his own soul” (220). Dorian regrets losing his virtue and begins to regret the wish he made because it was a segway into his immorality. He regrets his wish and begins to question whether or not eternal youth was worth becoming a corrupt vile person. Dorian is no longer a compassionate person and says “The Jew wanted to tell me about her history, but I said it did not interest me. You were right. There is something infinitely mean about other people’s tragedies” (58). This is towards the beginning of the novel and is when Dorian begins changing. Here we see the disregard Dorian shows toward what other people have to say. Wilde uses Dorian as a vessel in which he shows how society can alter a person negatively.
Wilde’s style consists of using many other works to tie his story together. One example of this is portrayed when Sibyl says “I saw through the hollowness, the shame, the silliness of the empty pageant which I had always played. Tonight, for the first time, I became conscious that the Romeo was hideous, and old, and painted, that the moonlight in the orchard was false, that the scenery was vulgar, and that the worlds I had to speak were unreal, were not my words, were not what I wanted to say” (90). Wilde uses Shakespeare’s plays to show the passion they have inspired in Sibyl. He also uses Romeo and Juliet to show the tragic death of Sibyl from her own hand. Wilde also uses gothic touches here and there as show in the following quote “As he opened his eyes a faint smile passed across his lips, as though he had been lost in some delightful
Post a Comment
<< Home